Marc 2008 r1 Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines

Marc® 2008 r1

Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines

CorporateMSC.Software Corporation2 MacArthur PlaceSanta Ana, CA 92707Telephone: (800) 345-2078FAX: (714) 784-4056

EuropeMSC.Software GmbHAm Moosfeld 1381829 MunichGERMANYTelephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6

Asia PacificMSC.Software Japan Ltd.Shinjuku First West 8F23-7 Nishi Shinjuku1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku Tokyo 160-0023, JAPANTelephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201

Worldwide Webwww.mscsoftware.com

User Documentation: Copyright © 2008 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.

This document, and the software described in it, are furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. Any reproduction or distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written authorization of MSC.Software Corporation is strictly prohibited.

MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior notice. The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this document are for illustrative and educational purposes only and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS AND ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.

MSC.Software logo, MSC, MSC., MD Nastran, Adams, Dytran, Marc, Mentat, and Patran are trademarks or registered trademarks of MSC.Software Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.

NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. Python is a trademark of the Python Software Foundation. LS-DYNA is a trademark of Livermore Software Technology Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC.Software suppliers.

METIS is copyrighted by the regents of the University of Minnesota. HP MPI is developed by Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. MS MPI is developed by Microsoft Corporation. PCGLSS 6.0, copyright © 1992-2005 Computational Applications and System Integration Inc. MPICH Copyright 1993, University of Chicago and Mississippi State University. MPICH2 copyright © 2002, University of Chicago.

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software) and DFARS 227.7202 (Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation), as applicable.

MA*V2008r1*Z*Z*Z*DC-VOL-D

C o n t e n t s Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines

Contents

1 IntroductionCommon Blocks Description, 14

Note on Double Precision, 14

Format, 15

Element Result Database Utility Routine, 17Example, 19

Nodal Results Database Utility Routine, 19

Table Evaluation Routine, 21

MATDAT Common Block, 23

CONCOM Common Block, 29

ELMCOM Common Block, 36

BCLABEL Common Block, 40

Determining the Elements or Nodes in a Set, 43

Internal Data Structure, 43Element Data, 44Element Order, 45Nodal Vectors, 45

2 User-defined Loading, Boundary Conditions, and State Variables User Subroutines List

2 User-defined Loading, Boundary Conditions, and State Variables User Subroutines

FORCEM — Input of Nonuniform Distributed Loads, 61FLUX — Input of Nonuniform Fluxes, 66UWELDFLUX — Input of User Defined Welding Flux, 68UWELDPATH — Input of User Defined Welding Path, 70CUPFLX — Coupling of Inelastic Energy and Internal Heat Generation, 72

Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines

4

UINSTR — Input of Initial State of Stresses, 74UFOUR — Input of a User-defined Function F(Q) for Fourier Analysis, 76FORCDT — Input of Time Dependent Nodal based Boundary Conditions, 78

Stress Analysis, 78Heat Transfer Analysis, 81Format, 81Joule Heating Analysis, 82Diffusion Analysis, 83Electrostatic Analysis, 84Magnetostatic Analysis, 86

FORCDF — Input of Frequency Dependent Loads or Displacements in Harmonic Analysis, 88Stress Analysis, 88Piezoelectric Analysis, 89

FILM — Input of Nonuniform Film Coefficients, 92FLOW — Input of Mass Flow Rate and Inlet Temperature, 94UFOUND — Input of Nonlinear Foundation Stiffness and Damping, 96UFILM — Input of Nonuniform Convective Coefficients, 98USINKPT — Input of Sink Point Temperatures, 100UQVECT — Directed Thermal Flux, 101GAPT — Input of Thermal Contact (Conrad) Gap Temperature, 103UFORMSN — Definition of Constraint Conditions, 104CREDE — Input of Pre-specified State Variables, 109INITSV — Initialize State Variable Values, 112NEWSV — Input New State Variable Values, 113USSD — Input of Spectral Response Density, 115USINC — Input of Initial Conditions, 116USDATA — Input of Initial Data, 117UTIMESTEP — Input of User-defined Time Step, 118UVELOC — Generation or Modification of Nodal Velocity Vectors, 119MOTION (2-D) — Definition of Rigid Surface Motion for 2-D Contact, 120MOTION (3-D) — Definition of Rigid Surface Motion for 3-D Contact, 123UGROWRIGID — Changes the Size of a Rigid Body During the Analysis, 126UFRIC — Definition of Friction Coefficients, 127UFRICBBC — Definition of Friction Coefficients for Beam-to-Beam Contact, 129DIGEOM — Definition of 3-D Rigid Surface Patch, 131SEPFOR — Definition of Separation Force, 132SEPFORBBC — Definition of Separation Force for Beam-to-Beam Contact, 134SEPSTR — Definition of Separation Stress, 136UHTCOE — Definition of Environment Film Coefficient, 138UHTCON — Definition of Contact Film Coefficient, 141UDAMAGE_INDICATOR — Indicator of Material Damage, 143UHTNRC — Definition of Thermal Near Contact Film Coefficient, 145

5Contents

UVTCOE — Definition of Environment Electrical Film Coefficient, 148UVTCON — Definition of Electrical Film Coefficient, 151UVTNRC — Definition of Electrical Near Contact Film Coefficient, 153UMDCOE — Definition of Environment Mass Diffusion Coefficient, 156UMDCON — Definition of Contact Mass Diffusion Coefficient, 159UMDNRC — Definition of Mass Diffusion Coefficients between Surfaces almost in Contact, 161UNORST — Definition of Normal Stress, Flow Stress and Temperature at Contact Node, 163INITPL — Initialize Equivalent Plastic Strain Values, 167INITPO — Initialize Pore Pressure in an Uncoupled Fluid-Soil Analysis, 168NEWPO — Modify Pore Pressure in an Uncoupled Fluid-Soil Analysis, 169UREACB — Definition of Reactive Boundary Coefficients in an Acoustic

Harmonic Analysis, 170UCAV — Input of Volume-Dependant Pressure Load for Cavities, 171UOBJFN — Definition of Objective Function and its Gradient, 173UPRFILM — Input of Nonuniform Pressure Film Coefficients, 175UFAH — Define Correction Factor for Convection Coefficient aH, 177UFLUXMEC — Determine the Rate of Ablation due to Mechanical Erosion from Sources other

than Particle Impact, 179UFTHP — Define Empirical Correction for the Effect of Surface Temperature, 180UGLAW — Determine the Empirical Correlation G for Flux Calculation, 182UTIMP — Define Thermal Effects of Particle Impact, 184UFMEC — Define Empirical Correction Factor for Mechanical Erosion by Particles, 186UGMEC — Determine the Empirical Correlation G for Recession Calculation, 188UABLATE — Definition of Surface Recession Rate, 190UABLTNORM — Definition of Direction of Recession, 192UWEAR — Define the Rate of Mechanical Wear on a Surface, 193

3 User-defined Anisotropy and Constitutive Relations User Subroutines List

3 User-defined Anisotropy and Constitutive Relations User Subroutines

ANELAS — Elastic Anisotropy, 205HOOKLW — Anisotropic Elastic Law, 218ANPLAS — Anisotropic Yield Surface and Creep Potential, 221UFAIL — User-defined Failure Criterion, 223UPROGFAIL — Definition of Material Stiffness Reduction Factors for Progressive Failure

Analysis, 225ORIENT — Specification of Preferred Orientation, 228


6

ANEXP — Anisotropic Thermal Expansion, 230ANKOND — Input of Anisotropic Thermal Conductivity Matrix, 232UEPS — Input of Anisotropic Permittivity Matrix, 234UMU — Input of Anisotropic Permeability Matrix, 235USIGMA — Input of Anisotropic Electric Conductivity Matrix, 237USPCHT — Definition of Specific Heat, 238UCURE — Define the Cure Kinetics, 240USHRINKAGE — Define Volumetric Cure Shrinkage, 242UCRPLW (Viscoplastic) — Input of Creep Factors for Power Law Implicit Creep, 244CRPLAW — Input of Special Creep Law, 246VSWELL — Input of Special Swelling Law, 251WKSLP — Work-hardening Slope Definition, 254USPRNG — Input of Nonlinear Spring, Dashpot and Foundation Stiffness, 257UCRACK — Input of Ultimate Stress for Cracking Analysis, 261TENSOF — Input of Tension Softening Modulus for Cracking Analysis, 263USHRET — Input of Shear Retention Factor for Cracking Analysis, 265UVOID — Definition of the Initial Void Volume Fraction, 266UVOIDN — Definition of the Void Nucleation Rate, 267UVOIDRT — Definition of the Initial Void Ratio or Initial Porosity, 269UGRAIN — Calculation of Grain Size, 271UDAMAG — Prediction of Material Damage, 273UPOWDR — Definition of Material Data for Powder Metallurgy Model, 275UPERM — Definition of Permeability, 277UMOONY — Mooney-Rivlin Material, 278UENERG — Strain Energy Function, 279UOGDEN — Definition of Ogden Material Parameters, 281UELDAM — Definition of Damage Parameters in Ogden Model, 283HYPELA2 — User-defined Material Behavior, 285UFINITE — Finite Deformation Isotropic Material Models, 291UELASTOMER — Generalized Strain Energy Function, 294GENSTR — Generalized Stress Strain Law (Shells & Beams), 299UBEAM — Input for Nonlinear Beam, 301UCOHESIVE — Interface Material Model, 304UPHI — Input of PHI Function in Harmonic Analysis, 306UCOMPL — Input of Viscous Stress Strain Relationship, 308GAPU — Input of Gap Direction And Closure Distance, 310UGASKET — Define the Initial Gasket Gap Distance, 312USELEM — User-defined Element, 313UNEWTN — Input of Viscosity in Flow Analysis, 317URPFLO — Rigid-Plastic Flow, 318UARRBO — Arruda-Boyce Material Model, 320

7Contents

UGENT — Gent Material Model, 321UACOUS — Definition of Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis, 323USSUBS — Superelements Not Generated by Marc, 324UPYROLSL — Calculate the Rate of Decomposition, 326UCOKSL — Calculate the Mass Fraction of Carbon in Pyrolysis Gas, 328UWATERSL — Calculate the Rate of Water Evaporation, 330UPYROLEFF — Define the Effective Conductivity, 332USPCHTAB — Define Specific Heat for Simplified Pyrolysis Model, 335

References, 337

4 Viscoplasticity and Generalized Plasticity User Subroutines List

4 Viscoplasticity and Generalized Plasticity User SubroutinesUVSCPL — Definition of the Inelastic Strain Rate, 343UCRPLW (Viscoplastic) — Input of Creep Factors for Power Law Implicit Creep, 346CRPLAW (Viscoplastic) — Input of Explicit Viscoplastic Strain Rate Law, 348NASSOC — Input of a Nonassociated Flow Law, 350ZERO — Calculation of Equivalent Stress, 352YIEL — Calculation of Current Yield, 353ASSOC — Input of Associated Flow Law, 354SINCER — User Subroutine for Improving Accuracy, 355

5 Viscoelasticity User Subroutines List

5 Viscoelasticity User SubroutinesCRPVIS — Viscoelasticity – Generalized Kelvin Material Behavior, 362TRSFAC — Define a Shift Function for Thermo-Rheologically Simple (T.R.S.)

Material Behavior, 365HOOKVI — User-defined Anisotropic Viscoelasticity, 368

6 Geometry Modifications User Subroutines List

6 Geometry Modifications User SubroutinesUFXORD — Coordinate Generation or Modification, 374UFCONN — Connectivity Generation or Modification, 375MAP2D — Boundary Node Coordinates Modification in Mesh2D, 377USIZEOUTL — Local Refinement Definition for 2-D Remeshing with

Advancing Front Mesher, 378


8

UMAKNET — User-defined Remeshing Routine, 380t18 file for 2-D or Axisymmetric - Fixed Format, 381feb file format - fixed format, 383

UPNOD — Update Nodal Positions in Flow Solutions, 385UACTIVE — Activate or Deactivate Elements, 387REBAR — Input of Rebar Positions, Areas and Orientations, 389UFRORD — Rezoning Coordinate Generation or Modification, 390URCONN — Rezoning Connectivity Generation or Modification, 391USPLIT — User-defined Criterion to Split a Two-dimensional Body, 392UCOORD — Relocate Nodes Created During Adaptive Meshing, 393UADAP — User-defined Error Criterion, 394UCRACKGROW — Definition of Crack Growth Direction and Crack Growth Increment for the

VCCT Option, 395USPLIT_MESH — User Subroutine for Splitting Up a Mesh, 397UADAP2 — User-defined Unrefinement, 399UADAPBOX — User-defined Region For Local Adaptive Meshing, 400UCRACK_PARIS — Define the Crack Growth Increment, 403UTRANS — Implement Local Coordinate System, 405USHELL — Modify Thickness of Shell Elements, 406UTHICK — User-specified Nodal Thicknesses, 407UACTUAT — Prescribe the Length of an Actuator, 408

7 Output Quantities User Subroutines List

7 Output Quantities User SubroutinesPLOTV — User-selected Postprocessing of Element Variables, 413UPOSTV — User-selected Postprocessing of Nodal Variables, 415UPSTNO — User-selected Postprocessing of Nodal Variables, 418IMPD — Output of Nodal Quantities, 420

Stress Analysis, 420Joule Heating (Current Pass) Analysis, 422Electrostatic Analysis, 423Magnetostatic Analysis, 424Harmonic Electromagnetic Analysis, 425Transient Electromagnetic Analysis, 425Acoustic Analysis, 426Fluid or Fluid-Thermal Analysis, 427

ELEVAR — Output of Element Quantities, 428ELEVEC — Output of Element Quantities in Harmonic Analysis, 430INTCRD — Output of Integration Point Coordinates, 432UBGINC — Beginning of Increment, 433

9Contents

UEDINC — End of Increment, 434UBGITR — Beginning of Iteration, 435UBGPASS — Beginning of Pass in Coupled Analyses, 436UELOOP — Beginning of Element Loop, 437

8 Hydrodynamic Lubrication User Subroutines List

8 Hydrodynamic Lubrication User SubroutinesUBEAR — Input of Spatial Orientation of Lubricant Thickness, 443UGROOV — Input of Groove Depths, 444URESTR — Input of Nonuniform Restrictor Coefficients, 445UTHICK (Hydrodynamic Lubrication) — Generation or Modification of Nodal Thickness or

Thickness Change Field, 447UVELOC (Hydrodynamic Lubrication) — Generation or Modification of Nodal

Velocity Vectors, 449

9 Special Routines User — Marc Post File Processor List

9 Special Routines User — Marc Post File ProcessorPLDUMP13/PLDUMP2000 — Marc Post File Processor, 455

Marc Post File Layout (Revision 9 or Higher): PLDUMP 2000, 456Marc Post File Layout (Revision 13 or Higher): PLDUMP13, 521

10 Utility Routines List

10 Utility Routines ListDDOT — Inner Product of Two Vectors, 587

GMADD — Matrix Add, 588

GMPRD — Matrix Product, 589

GMSUB — Matrix Subtract, 590

GMTRA — Matrix Transpose, 591

GTPRD — Transpose Matrix Product, 592

INVERT — Invert Matrix, 593

INV3X3 — Invert 3 x 3 Matrix, 594

MCPY — Matrix Copy, 595


10

PRINCV — Find Principle Values, 596

SCLA — Set Matrix to Value, 597

11 Considerations for Parallel ProcessingOverview, 600

Auxiliary Routines, 600DOMFLAG, 600

Reading Input, 602

Sharing Data, 604

12 Code Coupling Interface User Subroutines and Utility List

12 Code Coupling InterfaceCPLREG_INIT — Initialization of a Coupling Analysis, 612

CPLREG_EXCHANGE — Exchange Data on a Coupling Region, 614

CPLREG_FINALIZE — Finalize the Coupling, 616

CPLREG_FIND_NAME — Find Coupling Regions by Name, 617

CPLREG_GET_INFO — Get General Information about a Coupling Region, 618

CPLREG_GET_QUANTS — Get the Prescribed Quantities on a Coupling Region, 620

CPLREG_GET_MESH — Get the Mesh of a Coupling Region, 621

CPLREG_GET_GLOBAL_VALUES — Get the Values of a Global Quantity, 624

CPLREG_GET_NODE_VALUES — Get the Values of a Nodal Quantity at a Coupling Region, 626

CPLREG_GET_ALL_NODE_VALUES — Get the Values of a Nodal Quantity at a Coupling Region, 629

CPLREG_PUT_GLOBAL_VALUES — Put the Values of a Global Quantity, 632

CPLREG_PUT_NODE_VALUES — Put the Values of a Nodal Quantity at a Coupling Region, 634

CPLREG_PUT_ALL_NODE_VALUES — Put the Values of a Nodal Quantity at a Coupling Region, 636

CPLREG_PUT_EDGE_VALUES — Put Edge Data at Coupling Regions, 638

CPLREG_PUT_ALL_EDGE_VALUES — Put Edge Data at Coupling Regions, 640

11Contents

CPLREG_PUT_FACE_VALUES — Put Face Data at Coupling Regions, 642

CPLREG_PUT_ALL_FACE_VALUES — Put Face Data at Coupling Regions, 644

CPLREG_PUT_ELEM_VALUES — Put Element Data at Coupling Regions, 646

CPLREG_PUT_ALL_ELEM_VALUES — Put Element Data at Coupling Regions, 648

A User Subroutines, Special Routines, and Utility Routines List


12

Chapter 1 Introduction

1 Introduction

■ Common Blocks Description 14

■ Note on Double Precision 14

■ Element Result Database Utility Routine 17

■ Nodal Results Database Utility Routine 19

■ Table Evaluation Routine 21

■ MATDAT Common Block 23

■ CONCOM Common Block 29

■ ELMCOM Common Block 36

■ BCLABEL Common Block 40

■ Internal Data Structure 43


14

In Marc, the user subroutine feature constitutes one of the real strengths of Marc, allowing the user to substitute his own subroutines for several existing in Marc. This feature provides the user with a wide latitude for solving nonstandard problems. These routines are easily inserted into Marc. When such a routine is supplied, the user is simply replacing the one which exists in Marc program using appropriate control setup. A description of each of the available user subroutines is given in this manual. In addition, discussions of special routines are also included.

Note: The reading of data is not recommended in most of the user subroutines since many of these routines are in the recycling loop for nonlinear analysis, and hence, you cannot know how many times per increment the routine is called.

Common Blocks DescriptionOften, when using a user subroutine, more information is needed than is provided through the call arguments. Almost all information is available through common blocks. Much of the information provided below is already available but occasionally, especially in older subroutines, it is not.

All common blocks can be accessed by the user by “including” them in the user subroutine. The syntax to use in the user subroutine is:

include ’yyy’

where yyy is the name of the common block. Note that the word include must begin after column 6 and that the common block name must be within single quotes. A path to the Marc installation directory does not need to be provided.

Note on Double PrecisionMarc is written completely in double precision. Hence, on all machines, an IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) statement is required in the user subroutines. This is to ensure that variables passed between Marc and the user subroutine are compatible and to ensure that any common blocks included are correct.

15CHAPTER 1Introduction

FormatThe following quantities are available in all user subroutines:

TIME AT BEGINNING OF INCREMENT:CPTIMTIME INCREMENT:TIMINCAVAILABLE THROUGH

include ’creeps’

INCREMENT NUMBER: INCSUBINCREMENT NUMBER: INCSUBAVAILABLE THROUGH

include ’concom’

Note: During the output phase, CPTIM has been updated to the time at the end of the increment and TIMINC has been set to zero if the total time for an increment or a series of increments has been reached. If the total time has not yet been reached, TIMINC has been set to the time increment of the next increment.

NUMBER OF ELEMENTS IN MESH: NUMELNUMBER OF NODES IN MESH: NUMNPMAXIMUM NUMBER OF DEGREES OF FREEDOM PER NODE: NDEGMAXIMUM NUMBER OF COORDINATE DIRECTIONS: NCRDAVAILABLE THROUGH

include ’dimen’

In a coupled analysis, reference variable IPASS to determine if the current iteration is a stress or heat transfer iteration:

IPASS = 1 STRESSIPASS = 2 HEAT TRANSFERIPASS = 3 FLUIDSIPASS = 4 JOULE HEATINGIPASS = 5 DIFFUSIONIPASS = 6 ELECTROSTATICSIPASS = 7 MAGNETOSTATICIPASS = 8 ELECTROMAGNETICSAVAILABLE THROUGH

include ’concom’

The following quantities are available in user subroutines which are in an element loop:

ELEMENT NUMBER: MAVAILABLE THROUGH

include ’far’

ELSTO ELEMENT NUMBER: NINTEGRATION POINT NUMBER: NNUSER LAYER NUMBER: KCUS(1)


16

INTERNAL LAYER NUMBER: KCUS(2)AVAILABLE IN

include ’lass’

NUMBER OF NODES IN ELEMENT: NNODEAVAILABLE IN

include ’elmcom’

NUMBER OF DIRECT COMPONENTS OF STRESS: NDINUMBER OF SHEAR COMPONENTS OF STRESS: NSHEARSIZE OF STRESS-STRAIN LAW: NSTRM1ELEMENT TYPE: JTYPENUMBER OF LAYERS PER ELEMENT: NSTRM2NUMBER OF INT. PTS PER ELEMENT: INTELNUMBER OF GEN. STRESS COMP. PER ELEMENT: NGENELAVAILABLE THROUGH

include ’elmcom’

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LAYERS PER ELEMENT: NEQSTMAXIMUM NUMBER OF INT. PTS PER ELEMENT: NSTRESAVAILABLE THROUGH

include ’nzro1’

To determine the coordinates of integration point NN of element M and to place these coordinates in array CCINT, use the following procedure:

include ’lass’include ’dimen’include ’space’include ’heat’include ’array4’DIMENSION CCINT(12)LA1 = ICRXPT + (NN-1)*NCRDMX + LOFRD0 II = 1, NCRDCCINT(II) = VARSELEM(LA1)

LA1 = LA1 + 1ENDDO

Note: This is only available after the first stiffness matrix assembly.

To obtain the array of internal node numbers of an element, use variable LM:include ’blnk’

The first NNODE numbers of LM are the internal node numbers.

To determine the internal node number LINT of user (external) node number LEXT, use the following function call:

LINT = NODINT(LEXT)


To determine the external (LEXT) node number from the internal (LINT) node number, use the following function call:

LEXT = NODEXT(LINT)

To determine the internal element number MINT from the user (external) element number MEXT, use the following function call:

MINT = IELINT(MEXT)

To determine the user (external) element number MEXT from the internal number MINT, use the following function call:

MEXT = IELEXT(MINT)

To determine which contact body (mybody) an element belongs to, use:

MYBODY = GETBODYID (MEXT)

To determine the coordinate of internal node number LINT and place these coordinates in array CCNODE, use the following procedure:

include ’dimen’include ’spacevec’include ’strvar’DIMENSION CCNODE(12)JRDPRE = 0CALL VECFTC (CCNODE, XORD_D, NCRDMX, NCRD, LINT,JRDPRE, 2, 1)

To determine the total displacement of internal node number LINT and place this data in array DDNODE, use the following procedure:

include ’dimen’include ’spacevec’include ’strvar’DIMENSION DDNODE(12)JRDPRE = 0CALL VECFTC (DDNODE, DSXTS_D, NDEGMX, NDEG, LINT, JRDPRE, 2, 5)

Element Result Database Utility RoutineTo facilitate extraction of solution results, it is possible to use the ELMVAR utility routine. This utility routine can be called from any user subroutine that is within an element loop. ELMVAR is used in conjunction with the Marc post element post codes to return the calculated values to the user.

ELMVAR is called with the following header:CALL ELMVAR (ICODE,M,NN,KCUS,VAR)


18

where:

Note: If the user is requesting a tensor, he must make VAR a local array in his user subroutine.

The values of ICODE are given in Marc Volume C: Program Input in the model definition section in the POST option. This routine does not support negative post codes associated with the PLOTV user subroutine. If the ELMVAR utility routine is called from a subroutine within the element assembly or stress recovery stage, the values of VAR are the current ones for this iteration. They are not necessarily the converged values.

ELMVAR can be called from user subroutines:

ICODE is the standard post code.

M is the user’s element number.

NN is the integration point number.

KCUS is the internal layer number.

VAR is the current value(s) of the items requested.

Table 1-1 Element Based User Subroutines

ANELAS FORCEM SINCER UELASTOMER UMDCON USIGMA

ANEXP GENSTR TENSOF UENERG UMOONY USPCHT

ANKOND HOOKLW TRSFAC UEPS UMU UVOIDN

ANPLAS HOOKVI UACTIVE UFAIL UNEWTN UVOIDRT

ASSOC HYPELA2 UACOUS UFILM UOGDEN UVSCPL

CRPLAW INITSV UADAP UFOUND UPERM UVTCOE

CRPVIS INTCRD UARRBO UGENT UPOWDR UVTCON

CUPFLX NASSOC UCOMPL UFINITE URESTR UWELDFLUX

ELEVAR NEWSV UCRACK UHTCOE URPFLO VSWELL

ELEVEC ORIENT UDAMAG UHTCON USELEM WKSLP

FILM PLOTV UELDAM UINSTR USHELL YIEL

FLUX REBAR UELOOP UMDCOE USHRET


Example

Suppose the user would like the plastic strain tensor from within the UADAP user subroutine for a user-defined adaptive meshing criteria. In this example, there are no shell elements, so KCUS=1 and the number of integration points per element = 4, so INTEL=4. The plastic strain tensor is code 321. The plastic strains are stored in a local array EPTEN. The user could create the following routine:

SUBROUTINE UADAP (M,XORD,DSXT,NCRDMX,NDEGMX,LM,NNODE,USER)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XORD(NCRDMX, *),DSXT(NDEGMX, *),LM(*)DIMENSION EPTEN (6,28)KCUS=1INTEL=4ICODE=321DO NN=1,INTEL CALL ELMVAR(ICODE,M,NN,KCUS,EPTEN(1,NN))ENDDO

USER CODE TO DEFINE USER

RETURNEND

Nodal Results Database Utility RoutineNodal values can be extracted from the Marc database by means of the NODVAR utility routine. This routine can be called from any user subroutine.

NODVAR is called with the following header:CALL NODVAR(ICOD,NODEID,VALNO,NQNCOMP,NQDATATYPE)

where:

……


20

Input:

NODEID is the user node number.

ICOD 0 = Coordinates 25 = Reaction mass flux1 = Displacement 26 = Bearing pressure2 = Rotation 27 = Bearing force3 = External force 28 = Velocity4 = External moment 29 = Rotational velocity5 = Reaction force 30 = Acceleration6 = Reaction moment 31 = Rotational acceleration7 = Fluid velocity 32 = Modal mass8 = Fluid pressure 33 = Rotational modal mass9 = External fluid force 34 = Contact normal stress*

ICOD (continued)

10 = Reaction fluid force 35 = Contact normal force*11 = Sound pressure 36 = Contact friction stress*12 = External sound source 37 = Contact friction force*13 = Reaction sound source 38 = Contact status*14 = Temperature 39 = Touched contact bodies*15 = External heat flux 40 = Not available16 = Reaction heat flux 41 = Not available17 = Electric potential 42 = Not available18 = External electric charge 43 = Not available19 = Reaction electric charge 44 = Not available20 = Magnetic potential 45 = Not available21 = External electric current 46 = Tying force**22 = Reaction electric current 47 = Coulomb force23 = Pore pressure 48 = Tying moment**24 = External mass flux

Output:

VALNO*** is the current value of the item requested.

NQNCOMP is the number of components returned.

* Not available when NODVAR is called from within a contact-related user subroutine; for example, UFRIC. Preferably use NODVAR for contact data during the output phase of an increment.

** Only available if the corresponding nodal post code has been requested.*** If a vector is requested, VALNO should be an array large enough to hold all

NQNCOMP components of the vector. When a complex vector is requested, VALNO will contain first all real components followed by all imaginary components of the vector. NQCOMP is then the sum of real and imaginary components and VALNO should be a noncomplex vector.


See the UPSTNO user subroutine for an example of how this utility can be used.

Table Evaluation RoutineWhen using the table driven input format, it is often useful to evaluate the value of a table in a user subroutine. This may be done with the TABVA2 user subroutine from many of the user routines. In particular, it can be done from those routines listed in Table 1-1.

This is based on the fact that the value of the independent variable (s) has been defined in common block CTABLE. In such cases, the evaluation may be obtained by doing the following:

CALL TABVA2(REFVAL, EVALUE, IDTABLE, 0, 0)

where:

The table must have been defined in the input file.

For example, in a cracking problem, one might want to have the strain softening modulus as a function of the temperature dependent Young’s modulus, which is not available in the UCRACK user subroutine. The following procedure can be used:

NQDATATYPE is the type of data returned.0 = Default1 = Modal2 = Buckle3 = Harmonic real4 = Harmonic real/imaginary5 = Harmonic magnitude/phase

* Not available when NODVAR is called from within a contact-related user subroutine; for example, UFRIC. Preferably use NODVAR for contact data during the output phase of an increment.

** Only available if the corresponding nodal post code has been requested.*** If a vector is requested, VALNO should be an array large enough to hold all

NQNCOMP components of the vector. When a complex vector is requested, VALNO will contain first all real components followed by all imaginary components of the vector. NQCOMP is then the sum of real and imaginary components and VALNO should be a noncomplex vector.

REFVAL is the reference value

EVALUE is the valuated value

IDTABLE is the table id given


22

subroutine ucrack(scrack,esoft,ecrush,ecp,dt,dtdl,n,nn,

* kcus,inc,ndi,nshear,shrfac)

include '../common/implicit'

dimension ecp(*),dt(*),dtdl(*), kcus(2)

c

c this routine is called at each integration point for those

c elements that have activated cracking

c

c scrack - user defined cracking stress

c esoft - user defined strain softening modulus

c ecrush - user defined crushing strain

c ecp - array of cracking strains at this integration point

c dt - array of state variables at the begining of increment

c dtdl - array of increment of state variables

c n - user element number

c nn - integration point number

c kcus(1) - user layer number

c kcus(2) - internal layer number

c inc - increment number

c ndi - number of direct components of stress or strain

c nshear - number of shear components of stress or strain

c shrfac - user defined shear retention factor

c

c Define reference value (REFVAL) of Young's modulus = 30.e6 psi

c In input file for this material, table number 1 was associated

c with Young's modulus of this material, so set IDTABLE=1

c

refval=30.d6

idtable=1

call tabva2(refval,evalue,idtable,0,0)

c

c now set the softening modulus to be 10% of the Young's modulus at

c the current temperature

c


esoft=0.1d0*evalue

c

return

end

MATDAT Common BlockThe material identification numbers (1,2,3, etc.) for cross-referencing to various quantities such as TEMPERATURE EFFECTS, WORK HARD, etc., must be used in user subroutines: ANELAS, HOOKLW, ANPLAS, ANEXP, ANKOND, ORIENT, CRPLAW, VSWELL, etc. The common block elmcom contains the material identification number “MATUS” for each material type.

In addition, the reference values of the material properties as given in the model definition section can be obtained in common block matdat. The contents of this common block correspond to the contents of array rprops as available in the ANELAS and HOOKLW user subroutines according to:

et(3) Young's moduli rprops(1-3)

xu(3) Poisson's ratios rprops(4-6)

rho mass density rprops(7)

shrmod(3) shear moduli rprops(8-10)

coed(3) coefficient of thermal expansion rprops(11-13)

yield(1) yield stress rprops(14)

yield(2) ORNL 10th cycle yield stress rprops(15)

yield(3) ORNL reversed plasticity yield stress rprops(16)

yrdr(3) direct ratio's for Hill anisotropic plasticity rprops(17-19)

yrsr(3) shear ratio's for Hill anisotropic plasticity rprops(20-22)

condu(3) conductivities rprops(23-25)

spht specific heat rprops(26)

condv(3) resistivity rprops(27-29)

rhoht mass density for heat transfer rprops(30)

emisv emissivity rprops(31)

costpv cost per unit volume rprops(32)

costpm cost per unit mass rprops(33)

permeab(3) magnetic permeability rprops(34-36)


24

reluct(3) reluctance rprops(37-39)

permair permeability of air rprops(40)

permit(3) electrical permittivity rprops(41-43)

econd(3) electrical conductivity rprops(44-46)

viscosit viscosity rprops(47)

tk21 thermal conductivity 21 rprops(48)



r21 electrical resistivity 21 rprops(51)



c10 Mooney parameter C10 rprops(54)





bulk bulk modulus (Mooney, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce, Gent) rprops(59)

amohr Amohr rprops(60)

enthalpy Enthalpy rprops(61)

flperm(3) fluid permeability rprops(62-64)

phfrac1 fraction of phase rprops(65)

chabpr(10) Chaboche material data rprops(66-75)

formls forming limit rprops(76)

flden fluid density for diffusion rprops(77)

reftempen reference temperature for enthalpy rprops(78)

frctiso fraction for isotropic hardening rprops(79)

flbulk bulk modulus of fluid in diffusion analysis rprops(80)

poros porosity rprops(81)

flperm2(3) fluid permeability (21, 31, 32) rprops(82-84)

ogmu reference (Odgen or Foam) rprops(85)

ogalpha reference (Ogden or Foam) rprops(86)

ogbeta reference (Foam) rprops(87)

vscdevtrm reference deviatoric relaxation time rprops(88)

vscvoltrm reference volumetric relaxation time rprops(89)

μαβ


In addition to array rprops, an iprops integer array is available in the ANELAS and HOOKLW user subroutines. The entries of this array have the following meaning (unless otherwise indicated, if the entry has a value of zero, it is false, and a value of one indicates true):

vscfunct(9) reference viscoelastic values rprops(90-98)

wgtmol molecular weight rprops(99)

errate energy release rate; used for interface elements rprops(100)

dispcrit critical opening of displacement; used for interface elements

rprops(101)

dispmax maximum opening displacement or exponential decay factor; used for interface elements

rprops(102)

fnorsh shear-normal stress ratio; used for interface elements

rprops(103)

xstst NLELAST: reference value for stress-strain curve rprops(104)

xyoung NLELAST: reference value for Young in compression rprops(105)

xpois NLELAST: reference value for Poisson in compression

rprops(106)

xtens NLELAST: reference value of tension cutoff rprops(107)

xcompr NLELAST: reference value of compression cutoff rprops(108)

strdpe(3) NLELAST: strain dependent E11, E22, E33 rprops(109-111)

strdpp(3) NLELAST: strain dependent v12, v23, v32 rprops(112-114)

strdpg(3) NLELAST: strain dependent G12, G23, C31 rprops(115-117)

ve11 first term of volumetric strain energy function rprops(118)

ve12 second term of volumetric strain energy function rprops(119)

ve13 third term of volumetric strain energy function rprops(120)

ve14 fourth term of volumetric strain energy function rprops(121)

vel15 fifth term of volumetric strain energy function rprops(122)

qparm shear-normal energy ratio; used for interface elements

rprops(123)

vis_zeta viscous energy dissipation factor; used for interface elements

rprops(124)

vis_refrate reference rate for viscous energy dissipation; user for interface elements

rprops(125)

comp_stiff compression stiffening factor; used for interface elements

rprops(126)


26

iprops(1) element control flag for anisotropic material behavior defined via the user subroutines

iprops(2) element control flag for non-isotropic material behavior

iprops(3) not used

iprops(4) element control flag indicating that the current element is involved in a shell to brick tying

iprops(5) element control flag indicating that the current element is a composite element

iprops(6) element control flag indicating that cracking is allowed

iprops(7) not used

iprops(8) element control flag for damage material model

iprops(9) element control flag for anisotropic material behavior defined via input file

iprops(10) element control flag for generalized plasticity model

iprops(11) element control flag indicating that the current element is a Herrmann-type element:

0: conventional elements;1: higher-order Herrmann elements;2: lower-order Herrmann elements

iprops(12) number of integration points per element

iprops(13) number of inertia degrees of freedom; used for mass matrix calculation

iprops(14) number of integration points for distributed (edge or surface) load integration

iprops(15) element control flag for curvilinear coordinates; used for element types 4, 8 and 24

iprops(16) element control flag for hypoelastic material behavior

iprops(17) element control flag for thermal rheologically simple material behavior

iprops(18) element control flag indicating that the element is a shell or beam with layer integration

iprops(19) integration point number of centroid

iprops(20) element control flag for isotropic material

iprops(21) internal element type of current element


iprops(22) Updated Lagrange element class type (< 0 implies that Updated Lagrange is not supported for the current element)

iprops(23) Kelvin viscoelastic flag (global variable defined via CREEP option)

iprops(24) element control flag for viscoelasticity

iprops(25) element control flag for Cam-Clay plasticity model

iprops(26) element control flag for powder material model

iprops(27) element control flag for ORNL material law

iprops(28) element control flag for indicating type of ORNL

0: normal ORNL;1: 2-1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL;2: reversed plasticity ORNL;3: full alpha reset ORNL

iprops(29) element control flag for Ogden material model

iprops(30) element control flag for soil material model

iprops(31) user element type of current element

iprops(32) element control flag for implicit creep material model

iprops(33) not used

iprops(34) element control flag for kinematic hardening

1: conventional kinematic hardening;2: combined isotropic-kinematic hardening;3: Chaboche kinematic hardening

iprops(35) element control flag for axisymmetric elements with bending

iprops(36) element control variable giving the class of the current element

0: pipe bend 9: Fourier1: truss 10: axisymmetric with twist2: 3-D shells 11: 2-D with layer integration4: plane stress 12: open section beams5: plane strain 13: closed section beams6: generalized plane strain 14: membrane or shear panel7: axisymmetric 15: gap element8: brick

iprops(37) element control flag for heat transfer elements

iprops(38) element integration control flag0: most conventional elements1: reduced integration elements2: elements without integration (12, 31, 68, 51 and 97)


28

iprops(39) element control flag for rebar elements

iprops(40) internal material identifier of the current element; for a composite element, this is the composite group number

iprops(41) internal element material identifier of the current element

iprops(42) element control flag for hydrostatic stress dependent plasticity law

1: linear Mohr-Coulomb2: parabolic Mohr-Coulomb3: Buyokozturk

iprops(43) element control flag for Mooney-Rivlin material behavior

iprops(44) not used

iprops(45) number of coordinates associated with the current element

iprops(46) number of degrees of freedom per node of the current element

iprops(47) number of direct stress components of the current element

iprops(48) number of generalized strains of the current element

iprops(49) number of nodes of the current element

iprops(50) element control flag to indicate that mid-increment method is not used

iprops(51) element control flag for orthotropic or anisotropic material behavior

iprops(52) control flag to indicate that interlaminar shear is not calculated

iprops(53) number of (membrane) strains per elements if no interlaminar shear calculation is performed; otherwise

1 for 2-D beam element 453 for 3-D thick shell elements

iprops(54) number of shear stress components of the current element

iprops(55) not used

iprops(56) number of transverse shear stresses

1 for 2-D beam element 452 for 3D thick shell elements

iprops(57) element control flag for progressive cracking

iprops(58) number of generalized strains of the current element

iprops(59) internal Marc flag

iprops(60) element control flag to indicate that the current element uses reduced integration with hourglass control


CONCOM Common BlockTwo common blocks might be particularly useful for advanced usage in Marc. Common block concom contains most of the program controls in Marc. The variables and their meaning are given below. Unless otherwise indicated, if the variable has a value of zero, it is false, and a value of one indicates true.

1 iacous acoustic analysis

2 iasmbl reassemble stiffness matrix

3 iautth auto therm or auto therm creep

4 ibear hydrodynamic bearing

5 icompl complex harmonic analysis

6 iconj EBE iterative solver

7 icreep explicit creep

8 ideva(32) debug print flags

9 idyn dynamic analysis type (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) based on the DYNAMIC parameter.

10 idynt permanent dynamic analysis type (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

11 ielas elastic reanalysis or Fourier

12 ielcma flag to indicate this pass is a electromagnetic analysis (0,1,2)

13 ielect flag to indicate this pass is a electrostatic analysis

14 iform contact

15 ifour Fourier

16 iharm harmonic analysis

17 ihcps thermal-mechanical or thermal-Joule-mechanical coupled analysis

18 iheat flag to indicate this pass is heat transfer analysis

19 iheatt flag to indicate that a heat transfer is performed in this job

20 ihresp indicate that currently in a harmonic subincrement

21 ijoule flag to indicate that Joule heating is performed in this job

22 ilem indicates in which part of element assembly

23 ilnmom indicates whether a coupled soil analysis (0,1,2)

24 iloren DeLorenzi calculation required


30

25 inc increment number

26 incext creep extrapolation

27 incsub subincrement number

28 ipass pass number for coupled analysisipass = 1 stress pass = 2 heat transfer = 3 fluids = 4 electrical pass in Joule heating = 5 diffusion = 6 electrostatics = 7 magnetostatics = 8 electromagnetics

29 iplres dynamic, buckling or heat transfer second global matrix required

30 ipois Poisson analysis for this pass

31 ipoist Poisson flag for this job

32 irpflo Eulerian - rigid plastic flow

33 ismall small displacement analysis for this pass

34 ismalt small displacement flag for this job

35 isoil soil analysis

36 ispect spectrum response

37 ispnow perform spectrum response now

38 istore update stress strain information.

39 iswep currently performing eigenvalue extraction

40 ithcrp thermal creep analysis

41 itherm temperature dependent properties are present

42 iupblg follower force

43 iupdat update Lagrange

44 jacflg Lanczos eigenmethod

45 jel elastic increment

46 jparks Fracture mechanics by Park method

47 largst finite strain

48 lfond distributed vs. foundation flag

49 loadup nonlinearity has occurred


50 loaduq nonlinearity has occurred

51 lodcor load correction is activated

52 lovl analysis phase 1 - Memory Allocation 13 - History Definition Input 2 - Model Definition Input 14 - Mass Matrix 3 - Distribute Load 15 - Fluid-Solid 4 - Stiffness Matrix 16 - Fluid- Solid 5 - Solver 17 - Vector Transformations 6 - Stress Recovery 20 - Rezoning 7 - Output 21 - Convergence Testing 8 - Operator Assembly 22 - Lanczos

23 - Global Adaptive Meshing

53 lsub flag to indicate which part of calculation

54 magnet flag to indicate this pass is magnetostatic

55 ncycle cycle number

56 newtnt permanent Newton-Raphson flag (0, 1, 2, 3, 8). See the CONTROL option.

57 newton Newton-Raphson flag for this pass (0, 1, 2, 3, 8)

58 noshr transverse shears included

59 linear storage of betas, etc.

60 ivscpl viscoplastic

61 icrpim implicit creep

62 iradrt radial return

63 ipshft control on inclusion of initial stress terms (0, 1, 2, 3, 4). See the CONTROL option.

64 itshr transverse shear

65 iangin orientation angle

66 iupmdr update-anisotropy flag

67 iconjf sparse conjugant gradient solver

68 jincfl not used

69 jpermg indicates that permanent magnets are included

70 jhour indicates that there are some reduced integration with hourglass control elements

71 isolvr solver flag (0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10). See the SOLVER option.


32

72 jritz indicates that Ritz vectors are used in eigenvalue analysis

73 jtable flag indicates that tables are used for boundary conditions

74 jshell indicates presence of shell elements

75 jdoubl indicates that double eigenvalue extraction is used with Inverse Power Sweep method

76 jform not used

77 jcentr internal flag

78 imini reduced storage flag for the ELASTIC parameter

79 kautth flag used in the AUTO THERM option

80 iautof flag indicating that global adaptive meshing is active

81 ibukty convergence problem with buckling flag

82 iassum assumed strain flag

83 icnstd constant dilatation flag

84 icnstt not used

85 kmakmas recalculate mass matrix flag

86 imethvp implicit viscoplastic procedure

87 iradrte flag for large strain elastic material

88 iradrtp radial return flag for plastic material

89 iupdate updated Lagrange flag for elastic material

90 iupdatp updated Lagrange flag for elastic-plastic material

91 ncycnt number of times the increment restarted with the first iteration in automatic procedures. This variable is used to stop the analysis with exit 3008 if it becomes to high to prevent infinite loop in the program.

92 marmen = 0 if Marc used for normal analysis= 1 if Marc used as reader via Marc Mentat

93 idynme implicit dynamic analysis= 0 for Newmark-beta= 1 for Single Step Houbolt (SSH)

94 ihavca = 0 if Cauchy stresses not stored separately= 1 if Cauchy stresses stored separately

95 ispf Super Plastic Forming analysis


96 kmini used for minimizing memory needed for element quantities if fast elastic-plastic material libraries of Superform are used

97 imixed flag set to 1 in a Rigid Plastic analysis if some part of the material in the model has elasto-plastic material behavior

98 largtt flag to preserve finite strain plasticity flag for the elasto-plastic part of the model while doing the rigid-plastic part

99 kdoela flag to trigger assembly in elastic analysis

100 iautofg flag for analysis with MSC.SuperForm

101 ipshftp flag to save the control for inclusion of the initial stress matrix ipshft during automatic increment restart feature

102 idntrc variable to indicate that the end of an automatic load stepping could not be reached within specified number of increments. The program stops with exit number 3003

103 ipore flag to indicate this pass is a diffusion analysis

104 jtablm flag to indicate that tables are to be used for material properties

105 jtablc flag to indicate that tables are to be used for the CONTACT option

106 isnecma flag to indicate expanded film capabilities (not active in 2003)

107 itrnspo flag to indicate steady state transport loadcase

108 imsdif flag to indicate this pass is a diffusion analysis (not active in 2003)

109 jtrnspo flag to indicate SS-ROLLING analysis

110 mcnear flag to indicate that near thermal contact behavior is included between two bodies

111 imech flag to indicate this pass is a mechanical analysis

112 imecht flag to indicate that mechanical analysis will be performed in this job

113 ielcmat flag to indicate electromagnetic analysis will be performed in this job

114 ielectt flag to indicate electrostatic analysis will be performed in this job


34

115 magnett flag to indicate magnetostatic analysis will be performed in this job

116 imsdift flag to indicate diffusion analysis will be performed in this job

117 noplas flag to indicate no material nonlinearity - reduce memory requirements

118 jtabls flag to indicate that tables are to be used for the SPRINGS option

119 jactch flag to indicate elements have been activated or deactivated

120 jtablth flag to indicate that tables are to be used for the GEOMETRY option

121 kgmsto = 1 store geometry in old format,= 2 store geometry based on geometry id

122 jpzo flag to indicate piezoelectric analysis

123 ifricsh flag to indicate that nodal based friction used

124 iremkin flag to indicate gradual removal of kinematic boundary condition (table driven input)

125 iremfor flag to indicate gradual removal of reaction force (table driven input)

126 ishearp flag to indicate that shear panel elements are in the model

127 jspf = 1 first increment of superplastic analysis

128 machining flag to indicate that machining option is active

129 jlshell flag to indicate that shells are present

130 icompsol indicates the presence of composite solids in the mesh

131 iupblgfo follower force point loads used

132 jcondir contact priority is used

133 nstcrp variable to indicate type of tangent in the implicit Maxwell Creep model or implicit viscoplastic creep model (0=elastic, 1= secant and 22 radial return)

134 nactive number of active physics

135 ipassref default physics type

136 nstspnt not used

137 ibeart permanent flag for hydrodynamic bearing


138 icheckmpc indicate if check mpc is activated

139 noline deactivate iterative contact if increment almost complete

140 icuring set to 1 if the curing is included for the heat transfer analysis

141 ishrink set to 1 if shrinkage strain is included for mechanical analysis

142 ioffsflg 1 for small displacement beam/shell offsets2 for large displacement beam/shell offsets

143 isetoff 0 do not apply beam/shell offsets1 apply beam/shell offsets

144 ioffsetm minimum value of offset flag

145 iharmt harmonic analysis flag

146 inc_incdat flag to record increment number of a new loadcase

147 iautospc flag for AutoSPC option

148 ibrake brake squeal in this increment

149 icbush set to 1 if cbush elements present in model

150 istream_input set to 1 for streaming input calling Marc as library

151 iprsinp set to 1 if pressure input introduced so other variable such as h can be a function of pressure

152 ivlsinp set to 1 if velocity input introduced so other variables such a h can be a function of velocity

153 ifirst_time internal

154 ipin_m number of beam elements with pin flag

155 jgnstr_glb global control over pre or fast integrated composite shells

156 imarc_return Marc return flag for streaming input control

157 iqvcimp in nonzero, then the number of QVECT boundary conditions

158 nqveceid number of QVECT boundary conditions where emissivity/absorption id

159 istpnx 1 if to stop at end of increment

160 igenoa 1 if Genoa interface is used


36

ELMCOM Common BlockIn subroutines that are within an element loop, information about a particular element can be found in common block elmcom. The variables in common block elmcom and their meaning are as follows:

1 ianels anisotropy flag

2 ianiso anisotropy flag

3 irebar rebar element flag

4 icolps indicates collapsed element

5 icomps composite

6 icrack cracking

7 ictrns no longer used

8 idamag damage

9 ianmat anisotropic elastic constants given in input

10 igenpl generalized plasticity

11 iherr Herrmann element (0, 1, 2)0 - not Herrmann element1 - higher-order Herrmann element2 - lower-order Herrmann element

12 intel number of integration points

13 intin integration point number if centroid

14 intpre number of integration points for distributed

15 iort curvilinear coordinates

16 ipela hypoelastic

17 irheol thermal rheologically simple

18 ishell shell

19 isnte integration point number if centroid

20 isotrp elastic material

21 ityp internal element type

22 iupcls -3, -2, -1, 0 - No updated Lagrange for this element type1 - supports updated Lagrange2 - supports updated Lagrange; results given with respect to

convected coordinate system3 - supports updated Lagrange; results given with respect to

curvilinear convected coordinate system


23 ivisc Kelvin viscoelastic flag

24 ivisel Hereditary integral viscoelastic flag

25 jcamcl Cam Clay model

26 jhip powder model

27 joakr Oak Ridge model

28 joakrm Type of Oak Ridge model

29 jogden Ogden

30 jsoil Soil

31 jtype element type

32 jviscp viscoplastic

33 jvisel hereditary integral viscoelastic

34 kinhrd kinematic hardening

35 lbend pipe bend

36 lclass element class0 - pipe element 8 - 3D solid1 - truss element 9 - Fourier element2 - shell 10 - axi with twist3 - none 11 - axisymmetric shell4 - plane stress 12 - open section beam5 - plane strain 13 - closed section beam6 - generalized plane strain 14 - membrane7 - axisymmetric solid 15 - gap

37 lheat heat transfer element

38 lnoint no integration points

39 lrebar rebar element

40 matno material or composite id

41 mats internal material id (see matus in this common block for user material id)

42 mohrc Mohr-Coulomb (0, 1, 2)0 - not Mohr-Coulomb1 - linear Mohr-Coulomb2 - quadratic Mohr-Coulomb

43 mooney Mooney

44 mroz Mroz - not supported

45 ncrdel number of coordinates


38

46 ndegel number of degrees of freedom

47 ndi number of direct components

48 ngenel number of generalized strains

49 nnode number of nodes

50 nomid mid-increment not used

51 noniso anisotropic

52 kkdum1 dummy

53 nregs pointer to transverse shear

54 nshear number of shears

55 nstran number of strains

56 ntshr number of transverse shears

57 ipgrcr progressive cracking

58 ngens number of generalized strains

59 jparel element running in parallel mode

60 jhoure this element is a reduced integration element with hourglass control

61 jfoam foam model

62 nnodg number of nodes per element, excluding extra nodes for Herrmann and generalized plane strain

63 nstrm1 number of stresses stored per section point

64 nstrm2 number of stress points stored per integration point (layers for shell elements, cross-section point for beam elements, 1 for continuum elements

65 irpfle control flag whether this element needs rigid plastic analysis (irpfle = 1) or not (irpfle = 0)

66 jpowlw control flag for various work hardening models= 1 power law= 2 rate power law= 3 Not Available= 4 Johnson-Cook

67 jhamlt not used

68 jyada flag to use Yada grain size model (jyada = 1) or not (jyada = 0)

69 jintel integration points to store stresses (jintel = intel except for the CENTROID parameter when jintel = 1)


70 jvarcon not used

71 jthpor pyrolysis model (not available in 2003)

72 iphase phase number

73 lphase flag indicating this material has multiple phases

74 igasket gasket material group number

75 ipreten cross-section number to which this element belongs

76 ilinel linear elastic material

77 idgeom geometry id for this element

78 lmbody body number of element only valid in stiffness, mass, and recovery

79 ipiezo = 1 stress based piezoelectric element= 2 strain based piezoelectric element

80 jcompsol flag indicating element is a composite continuum

81 jshapemem flag indicating shape memory material

82 intstf number of integration points for stiffness matrix evaluation

83 jgnstr flagged to 1 for generalized composite shells

84 matus(2) two-term array for user material id and internal material idmatus(1) = user material idmatus(2) = internal material id, same as mats

85 jcuring flagged to 1 for curing analysis of the element

86 jcuremt if curing rate is based upon table, then table id

87 jshrink flagged to 1 for cure shrinkage strain calculation for the element

88 jshnkmt if shrinkage law is based upon table, then table id

89 ioffset flag for beam-shell offset:-1 for beams-2 for shells-3 for cbush

90 ioffsum number in list of offset elements (from 1 to n_elmoff_act)

91 jtopcls topology class of element


40

BCLABEL Common BlockWhen using the table driven input format, it is often useful to know the loadcase name and/or the boundary condition name in a user subroutine. The loadcase name is available in all user subroutines and the boundary condition name is available in the user subroutines:

92 mpermtyp flag for magnetostatics new input indicating how the permeability is obtained:0 old style1 permeability2 inverse permeability3 B-H relation4 H-B relation

93 jcohesive interface element

94 ipaddup interface element, large displacement formulation

95 ipshell 1 pshell formulation2 pshell formulation for thick shell

96 jnlelast NLELAST model type (0 to 7)

97 jnlelastsy 1 if nonsymmetric (tension/compression behavior)

98 inlelastcp 1 if constant Poisson ratio2 if constant Bulk modulus

99 inlelastct 0 conventional1 limited tension2 limited compression3 limited tension and compression

100 jslosh flagged to 1 for solid shell element (185)

101 jgenrec 0 if generalized composite layer are not recovered1 if generalized composite layer are recovered

102 nstrm2sv

103 jcwcon flag to see if the element node numbering is clockwise-1 clockwise0 before checking1 normal

104 isolbeam 0 beam section does not use numerical integration (type 98, 52)

1 beam section does use numerical integration (type 98, 52)

FORCEM UVELOC


This information can be obtained by including the common block BCLABEL in the user subroutine. Then one obtains:

Both are character variables of length 32. For example, if a pressure on different parts of the model is different and dependent on the loadcase, and if the boundary condition is applied to a curve, adaptive meshing is used and the element numbers are unknown. Given boundary condition names load 1 and load 2, and loadcases names early and late, one could implement:

subroutine forcem(press,th1,th2,nn,n)

include '../common/implicit'

include '../common/bclabel'

common/lpres3/prnorm(3)

dimension n(10)

c* * * * * *

c

c defined non-uniformed distributed force on an element.

c

c press distributed load increment magnitude

c if follower force then give total magnitude

c th1 coordinate

c th2 coordinate

c nn integration point number

c n(1) user element number

c n(2) parameter identifying the type of load

c n(3) is the integration point number

c n(4) not used

FORCDT USINC

FLUX INITPO

NEWSV NEWPO

UFILM INITSV

UFOUND USINKPT

USESTR

LDCASENAME loadcase name

BCNAME boundary condition name


42

c n(5) is the distributed load index - not used if Table

c inout format

c n(6) =0 if conventional pressure

c =1 if user returns 2 or 3 components for pressure

c in global direction

c n(7) is the internal element number

c n(8) not used

c n(9) general CID load flag

c n(10) boundary condition number if Table input format

c

c for distributed load in a given direction

c prnorm is the direction cosine of the direction of the load

c with respect to the global system

c

c* * * * * *

if(ldcasename.eq.'early') then

if(bcname.eq.'load1') then

press=

elseif(bcname.eq.'load2') then

press=

else

write(6,101) n(1),nn,ldcasename,bcname

endif

elseif(ldcasename.eq.'late') then

if(bcname.eq.'load1') then

press=

elseif(bcname.eq.'load2') then

press=

else


endif

else


endif


101 format(/,'*** warning - forcem for element ',i10,

* ' integration point',i4,' for loadcase ',a,

* ' boundary condition ',a,' is not coded')

return

end

Determining the Elements or Nodes in a SetFrom within a user subroutine, it is often useful to know the elements or nodes that are members of a user-defined set. Subroutine marc_setinf can be used to obtain this information. This routine is used as follows:

call marc_setinf(getnam,ihav,list,ityp,inum)

where

Note: if ityp=12 or ityp=13, then list contains 2*inum entries:

1...inum: element numbers

inum+1...2*inum: edge/face numbers

Internal Data StructureComplex simulations occasionally require additional data which is not passed into the user subroutine. This section outlines some of the data storage issues in Marc and assists in converting pre 2005 r3 user routines to the current release.

Required Input:

GETNAME nchnam character string with setname in lower case.

Output:

IHAV 0 if set name is not found1 if set name is found

LIST List of entries in set in user numbers. See note below.ITYP 0 element set

1 node set12 element:edge set13 element:face set

INUM Number of entries in set


44

Element Data

As of the MSC.Marc 2005 r3 release, the storage of element data like stresses, strains and temperatures has changed. In previous versions, this piece of data was stored in the so-called general memory. The amount of memory allocated per element (stored in the variable nelsto as the number of integer words) was then the same for all elements. This amount was based upon the maximum over all elements of number of integration points, number of layers and similar items. In the new scheme, the elements are internally divided into groups, where the allocation for the elements in each group is the same but it can vary between groups. Now, the allocation is based upon the actual number of integration points and layers etc. and this can lead to substantial savings in memory usage for models using different types of elements. The storage is done outside of the general memory. This is reflected in the memory summary printout in that the element data portion is now in the lower part under "allocated separately". Instead of accessing the data in the array for general memory, vars, it is now accessed in the array varselem. The element loops in Marc are now done as one loop over element groups and then one loop over all elements in the group. This has no implication for user subroutines that are called from within an element loop, except that varselem must be used instead of vars. New element loops must be performed in the new style. We take, as an example, a hypothetical user subroutine to find the largest coordinate of the integration points. These are stored using the pointer icrxpt. In the new scheme this can be done as

include 'array4' include 'cdominfo' include 'dimen' include 'elemdata' include 'elmcom' include 'heat' include 'space'

coordmax=-1.0e+20 do igroup=1,nelgroups call setup_elgroups(igroup,numel_group) do iel_g=1,numel_group mm=ielgroup_elnum(iel_g) ityp=ieltype(mm) call setel(mm) do intp=1,jintel call wrat3n(varselem(ielsbn),n,iel_g,igroup,0) lofr=(n-1)*nelstr la1 = icrxpt + (intp-1)*ncrdmx + lofr do i = 1, ncrd coord = varselem(la1)


la1 = la1 + 1 if (coord.gt.coordmax) coordmax=coord enddo enddo enddo enddo

if (nprocd.gt.0) call domflag(idummy,coordmax,0,1,0,1) write(6,*) 'max coordinate:',coordmax

The variable nelgroups is the number of element groups. The subroutine setup_elgroup sets things up for each element group. This includes pointers like icrxpt and also makes sure the correct varselem is used (different arrays are used for different element groups). The do iel_g loop is done over all elements within the group. In this loop, first, the internal element number mm is defined. Then it picks up the internal element type ityp and calls the subroutine setel for defining element properties; in this case, we need jintel – the number of integration points of this element. In the loop over integration points, we call subroutine wrat3n for handling out-of-core element storage and defining the variable n used for calculating the offset for each element. Then we set the pointer la1 and loop over all coordinates and pick up the current coordinate and check for the maximum. After the loops, we take the maximum over all domains in case we run in parallel (see Chapter 11 in this manual) and, finally, print out the maximum value found to the output file (jobname.out).

Element Order

One of the consequences of the restructured data is that the elements are no longer evaluated in sequential order based upon the user element numbering. Some users would initialize local storage based upon the first element number and perform other operations, such as calculate based upon the last element number. This was not a good idea when using single input DDM in the past and is no longer valid for any analysis in the 2005r3 or subsequent releases. Initialization of data should be performed in the UGBINC or UBGITR user subroutine, and accumulation type operations should be done in the UEDINC user subroutine.

Nodal Vectors

The storage scheme of most nodal vectors like coordinates, displacements, and reaction forces were changed in the MSC.Marc 2005 version. User subroutines using the old storage scheme need to be modified for the 2005 and subsequent versions. In the old scheme, the vectors were stored in the so-called general


46

memory in an array called vars (defined in common block space). For instance, to access the nodal coordinates, one would use the variable ixord, which is a pointer in the array vars. The x coordinate of node 1 would be located at vars(ixord), the y coordinate at vars(ixord+1), etc. In the 2005 and subsequent versions, these nodal vectors are allocated separately. The nodal coordinates are stored in the array xord_d available in common block spacevec. The x coordinate of node 1 is now at xord_d(1).

It is recommended that the nodvar utility routine be used for quantities available there. However, existing user subroutines may access other quantities. Table 1-1 lists some of the nodal vectors that have been changed.

Many of the arrays in this table come in different variants for different passes in coupled analysis. For instance, idsxts (s for structural) corresponds to dsxts_d and is similar for other quantities. However, the list is not complete as several other internally used vectors are also in the new storage scheme. The convention is simple, remove the trailing i and append the _d. The complete list is in common/spacevec. Some integer quantities are in common/spaceivec. Two arrays that are likely to occur in older user subroutines are the ones used for converting between internal and user node and element numbers. Code like

next=ints(inoids+nint-1)

Table 1-2 Some Nodal Vector Changes

Old Pointer New Array

ixord xord_d

idsx dsx_d

idsxt dsxt_d

idsx1 dsx1_d

idsx2 dsx2_d

idynd dynd_d

ipload pload_d

itx tx_d

ipinc pinc_d

ixload xload_d

iptot ptot_d

icofor cofor_d

ifrfor frfor_d

idynv dynv_d

idyna dyna_d


iel=ints(ielids+ielint-1)

can be converted to

next=inoids_d(nint)iel=ielids_d(ielint)

but the best is to use the standard utility routine instead:

next=nodext(nint)iel=ielext(ielint)

As a guide for converting existing subroutines, consider the following simple example of printing out the nodal coordinates to the output file.

Old code:include ’space’include ’dimen’include ’array2’do i=1,numnp

write(6,*) i,(vars(ixord-1+(i-1)*ndeg+j),j=1,ncrd)enddo


48

New code:include ’spacevec’include ’dimen’do i=1,numnp

write(6,*) i,(xord_d((i-1)*ncrd+j),j=1,ncrd)enddo

Chapter 2 User-defined Loading, Boundary Conditions, and State Variables User Subroutines List

User Subroutine Page

CREDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

CUPFLX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

DIGEOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

FILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94FLUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66FORCDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88FORCDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78FORCEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

2 User-defined Loading, Boundary Conditions, and State Variables User Subroutines List


50


GAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

INITPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167INITPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168INITSV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

MOTION (2-D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120MOTION (3-D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

NEWPO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169NEWSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

SEPFOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132SEPFORBBC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134SEPSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

UABLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190UABLTNORM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192UCAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171UDAMAGE_INDICATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143UFAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177UFILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98UFLUXMEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179UFMEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186UFORMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104UFOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96UFOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76UFRIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127UFRICBBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129UFTHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180UGLAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182UGMEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188UGROWRIGID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126UHTCOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138UHTCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141UHTNRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145UINSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

51CHAPTER 2User-defined Loading, Boundary Conditions, and State Variables User Subroutines List


UMDCOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156UMDCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159UMDNRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161UNORST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163UOBJFN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173UPRFILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175UQVECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101UREACB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170USDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117USINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116USINKPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100USSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115UTIMESTEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118UTIMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184UVELOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119UVTCOE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148UVTCON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151UVTNRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153UWEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193UWELDFLUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68UWELDPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70


52

Chapter 2 User-defined Loading, Boundary Conditions, and State V ariables User

Subroutines

2 User-defined Loading, Boundary Conditions, and State Variables User Subroutines


54

The user subroutines described in this chapter provide an alternative to the standard input file for providing data in the analysis. Many problems have complex boundary conditions due to their spatial variation (such as wind loads) or due to their temporal variation. These routines provide a powerful mechanism to define this behavior in a simple manner. Table 2-1 summarizes these routines and indicates what parameters or model definition options are required to invoke the user subroutine.

55CHAPTER 2User-defined Loading, Boundary Conditions, and State Variables User Subroutines

Table 2-1 User-defined Loading, Boundary Conditions, State Variables User Subroutine Requirements

User SubroutineRequired Parameters or Model Definition Options

Purpose

CREDE THERMAL LOADS Definition of state variable including temperature.

CUPFLX COUPLEDIST FLUXES (flux type 101)

Heat generated due to inelastic behavior in coupled analysis.

DIGEOM CONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)Table 3-3, “User Subroutines for Contact Problems”

Definition of rigid surface.

FILM HEAT or COUPLEFILMS (Model Definition)FILMS (History Definition)

Definition of convective heat transfer coefficient and sink temperature.

FLOW HEATCHANNEL

Definition of mass flow rate.

FLUX DIST FLUXES (Model Definition)DIST FLUXES (History Definition)DIST CURRENT (Joule)DIST MASS (Diffusion)DIST CHARGESDIST CURRENT (Diffusion)DIST SOURCES (Acoustics)

Definition of nonuniform flux input.

FORCDF FORCDTFIXED DISP orDISP CHANGE

Definition of point load or kinematic boundary condition in a harmonic analysis.

FORCDT FORCDTFIXED DISP or DISP CHANGEFIXED TEMPERATURE orTEMP CHANGE

Definition of point load or prescribed displacement in stress analysis. Definition of point flux or prescribed temperature in heat transfer analysis.

FORCEM DIST LOADS (Model Definition) Definition of distributed load.

GAPT HEATCONRAD GAP

Definition of thermal contact gap temperature.

INITPL INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN Definition of initial plastic strain.


56

INITPO POREINITIAL PORE

Definition of initial pore pressure in a uncoupled soil analysis.

INITSV INITIAL STATE Definition of initial values of state variables.

MOTION (2-D) CONTACT (2-D)Table 3-3, “User Subroutines for Contact Problems” UMOTIONMOTION CHANGE (History Definition)

Definition of velocity of rigid surfaces.

MOTION (3-D) CONTACT (3-D)Table 3-3, “User Subroutines for Contact Problems” UMOTIONMOTION CHANGE (History Definition)

Definition of velocity of rigid surfaces.

NEWPO PORECHANGE PORE (Model Definition)CHANGE PORE (History Definition)

Change pore pressure in an uncoupled soil analysis.

NEWSV CHANGE STATE (Model Definition)CHANGE STATE (History Definition)

Change value of the state variable.

SEPFOR CONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)Table 3-3, “User Subroutines for Contact Problems”

Definition of force required for separation.

SEPFORBBC CONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)CONTACT TABLE

Definition of the separation force for beam-to-beam contact.

SEPSTR CONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)Table 3-3, “User Subroutines for Contact Problems”

Definition of stress required for separation.

UABLATE ABLATIONRECEDING SURFACE

Definition of Surface Recession Rate

Table 2-1 User-defined Loading, Boundary Conditions, State Variables User Subroutine Requirements (continued)


Purpose


UABLTNORM ABLATION Definition of direction of recession

UCAV CAVITY (Parameter)CAVITY (Model Definition)DIST LOADS (model definition and history definition)

Allows definition of the pressure load for internal cavities

UDAMAGE_INDICATOR UDAMAG Allows calculation of a damage indicator to be shown in postprocessing.

UFAH SURFACE ENERGY Allows application of a correction factor to the convection coefficient.

UFILM FILMSTABLE

Inputs nonuniform convective coefficients

UFLUXMEC ABLATIONRECEDING SURFACE

Determines the rate of ablation due to mechanical erosion from sources other than particle impact.

UFMEC ABLATIONRECEDING SURFACE

Definition of empirical correction factor for mechanical erosion by particles.

UFORMSN TYING Definition of user-defined constraint matrices.

UFOUND FOUNDATIONTABLE

Permits the introduction of nonlinear spring constants and input of nonlinear damping for dynamics or harmonics.

UFOUR FOURIER Definition of function giving nonuniform variation about the circumference in Fourier analysis.



Purpose


58

UFRIC CONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)Table 3-3, “User Subroutines for Contact Problems” UFRICTION

Definition of friction coefficient.

UFRICBBC CONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)UFRICTION

Definition of variable friction coefficients for beam-to-beam contact.

UFTHP SURFACE ENERGY Definition of empirical correction for the effect of surface temperature.

UGLAW SURFACE ENERGY Determines the empirical correlation g for flux calculation.

UGMEC ABLATIONRECEDING SURFACE

Determines the empirical correlation G for recession calculation

UGROWRIGID UMOTION Changes the size of a rigid body during the analysis

UHTCOE CONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)Table 3-3, “User Subroutines for Contact Problems” UHTCOEF

Definition of heat transfer coefficient to environment for coupled contact analysis.

UHTCON CONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)Table 3-3, “User Subroutines for Contact Problems” UHTCON

Definition of heat transfer coefficient between bodies in contact in coupled analysis.

UHTNRC CONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)COUPLEUHTCON

Definition of thermal near contact film coefficient.

UINSTR ISTRESS Definition of initial stress.



Purpose


UMDCOE CONTACTDIFFUSIONUHTCOEF

Definition of variable mass diffusion coefficients and sink pressure on free surfaces.

UMDCON CONTACTDIFFUSIONUHTCON

Definition of variable mass diffusion coefficients of surfaces that are in contact with other surfaces.

UMDNRC UHTCONCONTACTTHERMAL CONTACTCONTACT TABLE

Definition of mass diffusion coefficients between surfaces almost in contact.

UNORST CONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)Table 3-3, “User Subroutines for Contact Problems” USER

Definition of normal stress for user elements in contact.

UOBJFN DESIGN OPTIMIZATIONDESIGN OBJECTIVE

Allows definition of the objective function and its gradient for design optimization analysis using the current values of the design variables.

UPRFILM PRESS FILM Facilitates the inclusion of nonuniform pressure films in diffusion or soil analysis

UQVECT QVECT Defines the magnitude and direction of the thermal flux.

UREACB CONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)

Definition of reactive boundary coefficients in an Acoustic Harmonic Analysis

USDATA USDATA Definition of user-defined constants.

USINC INITIAL DISPINITIAL VELINITIAL TEMP

Definition of initial displacement, initial velocity, or temperature.



Purpose


60

USINKPT FILMS (model definition option) Changes the sink point temperatures as a function of time.

USSD DYNAMIC CHANGERESPONSE SPECTRUM

Definition of spectrum displacement density function.

UTIMESTEP AUTO STEP Definition of input for user-defined time step.

UTIMP SURFACE ENERGY Definition of thermal effects of particle impact.

UVELOC HEAT Definition of convective velocities.

UVTCOE JOULECONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)UHTCOEF

Definition of environment electrical film coefficient.

UVTCON JOULECONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)UHTCOEF

Definition of contact electrical film coefficient.

UVTNRC JOULECONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)UHTCON

Definition of electrical near contact film coefficient.

UWEAR RECEDING SURFACE Definition of the rate of mechanical wear on a surface.

UWELDFLUX HEAT or COUPLEWELD FLUX (Model /History Definition)WELD PATH (Model / History Definition Option)

Definition of distributed welding flux.

UWELDPATH HEAT or COUPLEWELD PATH (Model / History Definition)WELD FLUX (Model / History Definition)

Definition of weld path to be followed by a distributed welding flux.



Purpose


■ FORCEM

Input of Nonuniform Distributed Loads

Description

This user subroutine allows input of nonuniform distributed loads. This user subroutine can be used to specify the load magnitude as a function of coordinate position and/or time.

The FORCEM user subroutine is called during the calculation of the equivalent nodal loads, at each integration point needed to calculate the loads specified in the DIST LOADS option regardless of the use of the ALL POINTS or CENTROID parameters. When not using table driven input option, the use of this user subroutine is flagged by the appropriate load type in the DIST LOADS input option where the type chosen depends on the element type (see Marc Volume B: Element Library). When using table driven input format, directly specify if the user subroutine is invoked on the DIST LOADS option.

For three-dimensional magnetostatic analysis, this user subroutine allows surface or body currents to be specified as functions of time, potential, or position. The use of this user subroutine is flagged by the appropriate current type in the DIST CURRENT input option. For two-dimensional magnetostatic analysis, use the FLUX user subroutine.

Format

The definitions in FORCEM depend on the element dimensionality as follows:

For two-dimensional elements:SUBROUTINE FORCEM (P,X1,X2,NN,N)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

COMMON/LPRES3/PRNORM (3)DIMENSION N(10)

user coding

RETURNEND


62

where:

When using Nastran like CID loads, it is possible to specify the direction of the load though the prnorm array.

When using nonuniform volumetric load (IBODY=107), nonuniform force per unit length (IBODY=111) or nonuniform for per unit area (IBODY=113), the direction of the load should be defined in the prnorm array.

For three-dimensional elements and shell element types 22, 49, 72, 75, 138, 139, and 140, the required headers are:

SUBROUTINE FORCEM (P,X1,X2,NN,N)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION X1(3), X2(3), N(7)

where:

Input:

X1 is the first coordinate of the integration point.

X2 is the second coordinate of the integration point.


N(1) is the element number.

N(2) is the parameter identifying the type of load.

N(3) is the integration point number.

N(4) is not used.

N(5) is the distributed load index -not used if Table input format.

N(6) = 0 if conventional pressure.= 1 if user returns 2 or 3 components for pressure in global direction.

N(7) is the internal element number.

N(8) is not used.

N(9) is the general CID load flag.

N(10) is the boundary condition number if Table input format.

Required Output:

P is the magnitude of the distributed load to be defined by the user at the integration point being evaluated.

PRNORM is the direction cosine of the direction of the load with respect to the global system for a distributed load in a given direction.


Nontable Driven Input

Input:

X1(3) is the (x,y,z) position of the integration point.



N(2) is the parameter identifying the type of load.

N(3) is not used.

N(4) is not used.

N(5) is the distributed load index -not used if Table input format.

N(6) = 0 if conventional pressure.= 1 if user returns 2 or 3 components for pressure in global direction.


N(8) is not used.

N(9) is the general CID load flag.

N(10) is the boundary condition number if Table input format.

Required Output:

P is the magnitude of the distributed load at this point to be defined by the user. In cases where a direction is also needed (shell or beam elements).

X2(3) is the vector describing direction of load.

PRNORM is the direction cosine of the direction of the load with respect to the global system for a distributed load in a given direction.

Load Control User Supplies

AUTO LOADAUTO LOAD with FOLLOW FOR

INCREMENTAL PRESSUREPRESSURE END OF INCREMENT

AUTO STEPAUTO STEP with FOLLOW FOR

INCREMENTAL PRESSUREPRESSURE END OF INCREMENT

AUTO INCREMENT (include common block AUTOIN)AUTO INCREMENT with FOLLOW FOR (include common block AUTOIN)

PRESSURE END OF PERIOD

PRESSURE END OF PERIOD (KPPASS = 1)PRESSURE BEGINING of INCREMENT (KPPASS = 2)

COMPLEX HARMONIC ANALYSIS (include common block HARMON)

REAL COMPONENT OF PRESSURE (IHPASS =1)IMAGINARY COMPONENT OF PRESSURE (IHPASS = 2)


64

Table Driven Input

The FORCEM user subroutine is called twice per increment when AUTO INCREMENT and FOLLOW FOR are used together in the analysis. The value of KPPASS is available in the common block AUTOIN which must be included in all analysis using AUTO INCREMENT and the FORCEM user subroutine.

For harmonic analysis with complex damping, the FORCEM user subroutine is called two times per integration point for each harmonic sub-increment. The call number is identified by the variable IHPASS which is available in the common block HARMON. For IHPASS = 1, the real component of the pressure should be input while for IHPASS = 2, the imaginary component of the pressure should be input.

The reading of data is not recommended in FORCEM since this user subroutine is in the recycling loop for nonlinear analysis, and the user cannot know how many times per increment it is called.

Note: When FORCEM is used to specify the “incremental pressure” (see above table) in conjunction with a stepping procedure that supports cut-backs, it is necessary that the pressure be specified as a function of time using the variables CPTIM and/or TIMINC available in common block CREEPS. This ensures that correct loads are applied even if the time step is reduced within an increment due to cut-backs.

Examples

It is often useful to have the distributed load vary with time in a dynamic analysis. To obtain the current time and increment of time add:

include ’creeps’

where:

Load Control User Supplies

AUTO LOAD PRESSURE END OF INCREMENT

AUTO STEP PRESSURE END OF INCREMENT

AUTO INCREMENT (include common block AUTOIN)

PRESSURE END OF PERIOD (KPPASS = 1)PRESSURE BEGINING of INCREMENT (KPPASS = 2)

COMPLEX HARMONIC ANALYSIS (include common block HARMON)

REAL COMPONENT OF PRESSURE (IHPASS =1)IMAGINARY COMPONENT OF PRESSURE (IHPASS = 2)

CPTIM is the time at the beginning of the increment


are variables in this common block.

To obtain transient time corresponding to heat transfer analysis where temperatures are read in using the CHANGE STATE/AUTO THERM option, add:

include ’heattm’

where:

To obtain the increment number add:include ’concom’

where:

In the example shown below, a beam is given a linearly varying distributed load.

where is the length of the beam and is the load intensity at .

The resulting user subroutine is as follows:SUBROUTINE FORCEM (P,X1,X2,NN,N)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION N(10)REAL LEN,MAXMAX =LEN =P = X1* MAX/LENRETURNEND

TIMINC is the increment of time.

CUTIME is transient time at the beginning of the current increment from the heat transfer analysis.

DUTIME is the time increment during the current increment from the heat transfer analysis.

INC is the current increment number.

P X( ) X * MAXLEN--------------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞= 0 X LEN≤ ≤

LEN MAX X LEN=


66

■ FLUX

Input of Nonuniform Fluxes

Description

For heat transfer analysis, this user subroutine allows surface or body fluxes to be specified as functions of time, temperature, or position. When not using the table driven input format, the use of this user subroutine is flagged by the appropriate flux type in the DIST FLUXES input option where the type chosen depends on element type (see Marc Volume B: Element Library). When using table driven input format, directly specify if the user subroutine is invoked.

This user routine may be used for other Poisson type problems such as Joule heating (DIST CURRENT), diffusion (DIST MASSES), electrostatic (DIST CHARGES), magnetostatic (DIST CURRENT), or acoustic (DIST SOURCES).

Format

User subroutine FLUX is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE FLUX(F,TS,N,TIME)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION TS(6), N(10), F2

user coding

RETURNEND

where

F(1) is the surface or volumetric flux, to be defined at this integration point in this user subroutine.

F(2) Derivative of the flux with respect to temperature. This may improve convergence behavior. Not required.

TS(1) is the estimated temperature at the end of the increment.

TS(2) is the current values of the area under the volumetric flux

versus time curve, that is, . This total includes all

uniform and nonuniform volumetric fluxes.

TS(3) is the temperature at the beginning of the increment.

TS(4), TS(5), TS(6) are the integration point coordinates.

Qdtot∫


This user subroutine is called at each time step for each integration point and element listed with an appropriate flux type in the DIST FLUXES or similar input option.

The reading of data is not recommended in FLUX since this user subroutine is in the recycling loop, and the user cannot know how many times per increment it is called.


N(2) is the parameter identifying the type of flux.


N(4) is the flux index - not used if table input.

N(5) is not used.

N(6) 1 - heat transfer.2 - joule.3 - bearing.4 - electrostatic.5 - magnetostatic.6 - acoustic.8 - diffusion.


N(8) is the layer number for heat transfer shells elements and volume flux.

N(9) is not used.

N(10) is the boundary condition number if table input used.

TIME is the current time.


68

■ UWELDFLUX

Input of User Defined Welding Flux

Description

For heat transfer analysis, this user subroutine allows surface or body welding fluxes to be specified as functions of time, temperature, or position. The use of this user subroutine is flagged by the appropriate flux type in the WELD FLUX input option where the type chosen depends on element type (see Marc Volume B: Element Library).

Format

User subroutine UWELDFLUX is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UWELDFLUX(F,TEMFLU, MIBODY, WELDDIM,TIME)INCLUDE ’../COMMON/IMPLICIT’

DIMENSION MIBODY(*),TEMFLU(*),WELDDIM(*)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

TEMFLU(1) integration point coordinate in local X direction (along Weld Width Direction).

TEMFLU(2) integration point coordinate in local Y direction (along Weld Depth Direction).

TEMFLU(3) integration point coordinate in local Z direction (along Weld Path Direction).

TEMFLU(4) integration point coordinate in global X direction.

TEMFLU(5) integration point coordinate in global Y direction.

TEMFLU(6) integration point coordinate in global Z direction.

MIBODY(1) user element number.


This user subroutine is called at each time step for each integration point and element listed with an appropriate load type in the WELD FLUX model definition option. Since this user subroutine is in the recycling loop, the reading of data is not recommended in UWELDFLUX as the user does not know how many times per increment it is called.

The weld path to be followed by the heat source specified in this subroutine can be directly given in the input file or specified through the UWELDPATH user subroutine. This weld path is used to define the local coordinate system at the current position of the weld source. The global integration point coordinates TEMFLU(4 - 6) are then transformed to local integration point coordinates TEMFLU(1 - 3) using the direction cosines of the local coordinate system. Any path offsets in the local X and Y directions are also applied during this process. Both the global and local integration point coordinates are provided as input in the program.

The weld dimensions WELDDIM are optional input. They can be varied as a function of time or arc length using tables. The weld dimensions can be used for defining the weld pool size. The latter can be used for three purposes: for defining the weld flux F in this subroutine; for defining a filler element bounding box which can be used to identify filler elements that are in the weld pool (note that if separate bounding box dimensions are provided, they over-ride the weld pool dimensions); and for defining a moving adaptive box with the heat source that identifies which elements need to be adaptively subdivided.

MIBODY(2) distributed flux type.

MIBODY(3) integration point number.

MIBODY(4) weld flux index.

WELDDIM(1) weld width.

WELDDIM(2) weld depth.

WELDDIM(3) weld forward length.

WELDDIM(4) weld rear length.

TIME time at end of increment.

Required Output:

F is the surface or volumetric welding flux to be defined at this integration point in this user subroutine.


70

■ UWELDPATH

Input of User Defined Welding Path

Description

This user subroutine allows the specification of a weld path to be followed by a weld heating source. The use of this user subroutine is flagged by the appropriate weld path and arc orientation types (type 5) in the WELD PATH input option.

Format

User subroutine UWELDPATH is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UWELDPATH(NWELD, NPATH, NFILL,DISTWELD,STARTPOS, FINALPOS, WELDVEC, ARCVEC, CPTIM, TIMINC)INCLUDE ’../COMMON/IMPLICIT’

DIMENSION WELDVEC(*), ARCVEC(*), STARTPOS(*), FINALPOS(*), NWELD(*), NPATH(*), NFILL(*)

user coding

RETURNEND

where

Input:

NWELD(1) external weld flux ID.

NWELD(2) internal weld flux ID.

NPATH(1) external weld path ID.

NPATH(2) internal weld path ID.

NFILL(1) external weld filler ID.

NFILL(2) internal weld filler ID.

DISTWELD incremental distance travelled by weld heat source.

STARTPOS weld position vector at start of increment.

CPTIM time at start of increment.

TIMINC incremental time step.


This user subroutine is called once at the beginning of each increment or when the time step for the increment is changed due to a cut-back. The position of the weld source at the end of the increment and the corresponding path and orientation vectors are required to be specified by the user. This information is used to construct the local coordinate system at the end of increment position. Note that the specified ARCVEC vector should be perpendicular to the WELDVEC vector. Otherwise, Marc makes the ARCVEC vector perpendicular to the WELDVEC vector.

The UWELDPATH subroutine should be used in conjunction with a weld heat source that is either directly specified through the WELD FLUX model definition option or through the UWELDFLUX user subroutine. Note that when this subroutine is used to specify the weld path, the position of the associated weld source should be initialized on the WELD FLUX model definition option, else Marc terminates with exit 20. Also, note that when this subroutine is used to specify the weld path, it is the responsibility of the user to cater to any filler elements that may lie along the path. If the elements are initially deactivated, this can be done by calling the general activation UACTIVE user subroutine at the end of the increment.

Required Output:

FINALPOS weld position vector at end of increment.

WELDVEC weld path vector at end of increment position.

ARCVEC arc orientation vector at end of increment position.


72

■ CUPFLX

Coupling of Inelastic Energy and Internal Heat Generation

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to modify the default routine for the calculation of the internal heat generated due to inelastic energy dissipation. This user subroutine is only used if a coupled thermal-mechanical or thermal-Joule-mechanical analysis is being performed and a DIST FLUXES type 101 is chosen.

Format

User subroutine CUPFLX is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CUPFLX (F,TS,N,TIME,TIMINC,TOTPLE,DIFPLE,DEN, FCMECH)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION TS(1), N(1)

user coding

RETURNEND

where

Input:

TS(1) is the estimated temperature at the end of the increment.

TS(3) is the temperature at the beginning of the increment.

TS(4), TS(5), TS(6) are the integration point coordinates.


N(2) is 101.



TIME is the time at the beginning of increment.

TIMINC is the time increment.

TOTPLE is the total plastic strain energy.

DIFPLE is the incremental plastic strain energy.


DEN is the mass density.

FCMECH is the factor entered through the CONVERT model definition option.

Required Output:

F is the volumetric flux to be defined by the user.


74

■ UINSTR

Input of Initial State of Stresses

Description

This user subroutine is called in a loop over all the elements in the mesh when the ISTRESS parameter is used. Note that this user subroutine is called twice for each point. During the first call, the user-defined stress vector S is used to define the net nodal force. During the second call, the user-defined stress vector S is used to define the initial stress at each point. In a rigid-plastic analysis, this user subroutine is called at every increment; otherwise, only in increment zero.

Format

User subroutine UINSTR is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UINSTR (S,NDI,NSHEAR,N,NN,KCUS,XINTP,NCRD,+INC,TIME,TIMEINC) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION S(1), XINTP(NCRD), N(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

NDI is the number of direct stress components.

NSHEAR is the number of shear stress components.

N(1) is the user element number.



KCUS(1) is your layer number (always 1 for continuum elements).

KCUS(2) is the internal layer number (always 1 for continuum element).

XINTP is the array of integration point coordinates.

NCRD is the number of coordinates.

INC is the increment number.


TIME is the total time at beginning of increment.

TIMEINC is the incremental time.

Required Output:

S is the stress vector defined by the user.


76

■ UFOUR

Input of a User-defined Function F(Θ) for Fourier Analysis

Description

This user subroutine allows input of a function F(Θ) where it can be expressed analytically. The values of F(Θ) are then passed into a Marc routine that calculates the Fourier expansion coefficients.

Format

User subroutine UFOUR is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UFOUR (F,N,NS)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION F(1)

user coding

RETURNEND

where

Input:

N The number of stations around the circumference for which the function value F is specified. N is to be defined by the user.

NS The number of the Fourier series.

Required Output:

F The F-array should contain the N values of F (Θ) in sequential order starting at Θ = 0° and ending with Θ = 360°. The user specifies the N values of F(Θ) in degrees sequentially from 0 to 360° in positions N + 1 through 2N of the F-array.


Example

For example, suppose the following function is to be expanded in a Fourier series:

1 Θ = 135°, 315°F(Θ) = -1 Θ = 45°, 225°

0 elsewhere.

This might be accomplished through the following code for the UFOUR user subroutine which calculates F(Θ) for 25 values of Θ from 0° to 360° by 15°.

SUBROUTINE UFOUR (F,N,NS) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION F(1)

C DO 10 I=1,N F(I)=0 F(I+N) = (I-1)*15

10 CONTINUE F(4) = -1.0 F(10) = +1.0 F(16) = -1.0 F(22) = +1.0

C RETURN END

The UFOUR user subroutine is called by using the following model definition option:

FOURIER0,0,25,


78

■ FORCDT

Input of Time Dependent Nodal based Boundary Conditions

Stress Analysis

Description

Simple time dependent load or displacement histories can be input on data lines. However, in more general cases, when the load history is complex, it is often more convenient to input the history through a user subroutine. For distributed loads, this is achieved with the FORCEM user subroutine; for point loads, it is achieved via the FORCDT user subroutine.

When not using the table driven input format, this user subroutine is flagged by introducing a model definition set, FORCDT, listing the node numbers for which this user subroutine is called. Then, at each increment of the analysis, for each of the nodes on the list, the user subroutine is called. When using table driven input format, one explicitly activates this routine on the POINT LOADS or FIXED DISP options. In static analyses, displacement and load arrays are available and, for dynamics, velocity and acceleration analyses are also given. For nodes without kinematic boundary conditions, the user can define increments of point loads (thus overwriting any point load input at the same nodes in the POINT LOAD option). For nodes with kinematic boundary conditions (that is, listed in the FIXED DISP or DISP CHANGE options), the user can define increments of displacement.

Note: FORCDT cannot be used to modify Fourier type boundary conditions.

Format

User subroutine FORCDT is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE FORCDT (U,V,A,DP,DU,TIME,DTIME,NDEG,NODE, 1 UG,XORD,NCRD,IACFLG,INC, IPASS) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION U(NDEG),V(NDEG),A(NDEG),DP(NDEG),DU(NDEG),UG(1),XORD(1)

user coding

RETURN END


where

To obtain transient time corresponding to heat transfer analysis, where temperatures are read in using the CHANGE STATE/AUTO THERM option, add

include ’xxx/common/heattm’

where

U is the array of total displacements at this node.

V is the array of total velocities at this node (dynamics only).

A is the array of total accelerations at this node (dynamics only).non table driven input

Nontable Driven Input:

DP is the array of incremental point loads at this node – can be set by the user at degrees of freedom without kinematic boundary conditions.

DU is the array of incremental displacements at this node, is the array of total accelerations at this node, or is the array of total velocities, see IACFLG – can be set by the user for degrees of freedom listed as having kinematic boundary conditions.

Table Driven Input:

DP is the array of total force to be applied to the node

DU is the array of incremental displacements to be applied to the node If IACFLG = 0.is the array of total displacements to be applied to the node at the end of the increment if IACLFG = -1.

DTIME is the increment of time (only relevant for dynamics or creep).

TIME is the total time (only relevant for dynamics or creep) at the beginning of the increment.

NDEG is the number of degrees of freedom per node.

NODE is the global node number.

UG is the array of total displacements in the global system.

XORD is the array of original nodal coordinates.

NCRD is the number of coordinates per node.

IACFLG is set to 1 if accelerations are prescribed.is set to 2 if velocities are prescribed in dynamic analysis.is set to -1 if total displacements are applied with table driven input.


IPASS = 1 stress portion.


80

are variables in the common block heattm.

As an example, suppose a sinusoidal forcing is required at the third degree of freedom at a node.

The forcing function is

P = B sin ω t

so

dp = B(sin ω (t + dt) - sin ω t)

Hence, for non table driven input, we write the user subroutine as follows: SUBROUTINE FORCDT (U,V,A,DP,DU,TIME,DTIME,NDEG,NODE,1 UG,XORD,NCRD,IACFLG,INC, IPASS) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION U(1),V(1),A(1),DP(1),DU(1),UG(1),XORD(1) B = OMEGA = DP(3) = B*(SIN(OMEGA*(TIME+DTIME)) - SIN(OMEGA*TIME)) RETURN END

For table driven input, where total values are entered use the following: SUBROUTINE FORCDT (U,V,A,DP,DU,TIME,DTIME,NDEG,NODE,1 UG,XORD,NCRD,IACFLG,INC, IPASS) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION U(1),V(1),A(1),DP(1),DU(1),UG(1),XORD(1) B = OMEGA = DP(3) = B*SIN(OMEGA*(TIME+DTIME)) RETURN END

CUTIME is the time at the beginning of the current increment from heat transfer analysis.

DUTIME is the change in time during current increment from heat transfer analysis.


Heat Transfer Analysis

Description

Time dependent nodal fluxes or temperature boundary conditions can be input most conveniently through the use of user subroutine FORCDT. For distributed fluxes, the FLUX user subroutine should be used to input the value of the distributed flux as a function of time and position.

When not using the table driven input format, the FORCDT user subroutine is flagged by a model definition set, FORCDT, listing the node numbers. Then at each step in the analysis, for each of the nodes in the list, the user subroutine is called. The current, calculated temperature is provided at the nodes. For nodes not specified as having temperature boundary conditions, the user can give the point flux. For those nodes specified with temperature, boundary conditions (in FIXED TEMPERATURE or TEMP CHANGE) sets the temperature.

When using the table driven input, one explicitly activates this routine on the POINT FLUX or FIXED TEMPERATURE option.

Format

User subroutine FORCDT is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE FORCDT (X1,X2,X3,F,T,TIME,DTIME,NDEG,NODE,X4, 1 XORD,NCRD,IACFLG,INC,IPASS) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION F(NDEG),T(NDEG),XORD(NCRD)

user coding

RETURN END

where

X1,X2,X3 are not used.

F is the array of fluxes at the node – can be re-defined for nodes free of temperature boundary conditions.

T is the array of temperatures at the node – can be redefined for nodes having temperature boundary conditions.

TIME is the total time at the end of the current step.

DTIME is the current time increment.

NDEG is 1 unless heat transfer shell elements are used.


82

Joule Heating Analysis

Description

Time dependent nodal currents or voltage boundary conditions can be input most conveniently through the use of user subroutine FORCDT. For distributed current, the FLUX user subroutine should be used to input the value of the distributed current as a function of time and position.

When not using the table driven input format, the FORCDT user subroutine is flagged by a FORCDT model definition set, listing the node numbers. Then, at each step in the analysis, for each of the nodes in the list, the user subroutine is called. The calculated voltage is provided at the nodes. For nodes not specified as having voltage boundary conditions, the user can give the point current. For those nodes specified with voltage, boundary conditions (in VOLTAGE or VOLTAGE CHANGE) sets the voltage. When using table driven input format, one explicitly activates this routine on the POINT CURRENT or FIXED VOLTAGE option.

Format


user coding

RETURN END


X4 is not used.

XORD is the array of nodal coordinates.


IACFLG is not used.


IPASS = 2 heat transfer portion.


where

Diffusion Analysis

Description

Time dependent nodal mass flux or pressure boundary conditions can be input most conveniently through the use of the FORCDT user subroutine. For distributed mass flux, the FLUX user subroutine should be used to input the value of the distributed mass flux as a function of time and position.

When not using the table driven input format, the FORCDT user subroutine is flagged by a model definition set, FORCDT, listing the node numbers. Then at each step in the analysis, for each of the nodes in the list, the user subroutine is called. The current, calculated pressure is provided at the nodes. For nodes not specified as having pressure boundary conditions, the user can give the point mass flux. For those nodes specified with pressure, boundary conditions (in FIXED PRESSURE or PRESS CHANGE) sets the pressure.When using the table driven input format, one explicitly activates this routine on the POINT MASS or FIXED PRESSURE option.


F is the array of currents at the node – can be re-defined for nodes free of voltage boundary conditions.

T is the array of voltages at the node – can be redefined for nodes having voltage boundary conditions.





X4 is not used.



IACFLG is not used.


IPASS = 4 electrical pass in Joule heating analysis.


84

Format


user coding

RETURN END

where

Electrostatic Analysis

Description

Time dependent nodal charges or potential boundary conditions can be input most conveniently through the use of the FORCDT user subroutine. For distributed charges, the FLUX user subroutine should be used to input the value of the distributed charge as a function of time and position.


F is the array of mass fluxes at the node – can be re-defined for nodes free of pressure boundary conditions.

T is the array of pressure at the node – can be redefined for nodes having pressure boundary conditions.





X4 is not used.



IACFLG is not used.


IPASS = 5 diffusion pass.


When not using the table driven input format, the FORCDT user subroutine is flagged by a model definition set, FORCDT, listing the node numbers. Then at each step in the analysis, for each of the nodes in the list, the user subroutine is called. The current, calculated potential is provided at the nodes. For nodes not specified as having potential boundary conditions, the user can give the point charge. For those nodes specified with potential, boundary conditions (in FIXED POTENTIAL or POTENTIAL CHANGE) sets the potential. When using the table driven input, one explicitly activates this routine on the POINT CHARGE or the FIXED POTENTIAL option.

Format


user coding

RETURN END

where


F is the array of charges at the node – can be re-defined for nodes free of potential boundary conditions.

T is the array of potential at the node – can be redefined for nodes having potential boundary conditions.





X4 is not used.



IACFLG is not used.


IPASS = 6 for electrostatic pass.


86

Magnetostatic Analysis

Description

Time dependent nodal current or potential boundary conditions can be input most conveniently through the use of the FORCDT user subroutine. For distributed currents, the FLUX user subroutine should be used to input the value of the distributed current as a function of time and position.

When not using the table driven input format, the FORCDT user subroutine is flagged by a model definition set, FORCDT, listing the node numbers. Then at each step in the analysis, for each of the nodes in the list, the user subroutine is called. The calculated potential is provided at the nodes. For nodes not specified as having potential boundary conditions, the user can give the point current. For those nodes specified with potential, boundary conditions (in FIXED POTENTIAL or POTENTIAL CHANGE) sets the potential. When using the table driven input, one explicitly activates this routine on the POINT CURRENT or the FIXED POTENTIAL option.

Format


user coding

RETURN END

where


F is the array of currents at the node – can be re-defined for nodes free of potential boundary conditions.

T is the array of potentials at the node – can be redefined for nodes having potential boundary conditions.





X4 is not used.




IACFLG is not used.


IPASS = 7 for magnetostatic pass.


88

■ FORCDF

Input of Frequency Dependent Loads or Displacements in Harmonic Analysis

Stress Analysis

Description

Simple nodal load or displacement excitations can be input on data lines. However, in more general cases, when the load is nonhomogeneous, it is often more convenient to input the excitation through a user subroutine. In harmonic analysis, for distributed loads, this is achieved with the FORCEM user subroutine; for point loads or displacements, it is achieved via the FORCDF user subroutine.

When not using the table driven input format, this user subroutine is flagged by introducing a model definition option, FORCDT, listing the node numbers for which this user subroutine is called. Then, at each harmonic sub-increment of the analysis, for each of the nodes on the list, the user subroutine is called. For nodes without kinematic boundary conditions, the user can define increments of point loads (thus, overwriting any point load input at the same nodes in the POINT LOAD option). For nodes with kinematic boundary conditions (that is, listed in the FIXED DISP or DISP CHANGE options), the user can define increments of harmonic displacement. When using table driven input format, one explicitly activates this routine on the POINT LOAD or FIXED DISP option.

Format

User subroutine FORCDF is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE FORCDF (U,FR,FI,DUR,DUI,FREQ,DTIME,NDEG,NODE, 1 UG,XORD,NCRD,ICOMPL,INC,INCSUB) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION (NDEG),FR(NDEG),FI(NDEG),DUR(NDEG),DUI(NDEG), +UG(1),XORD(1)

user coding

RETURN END


where

Piezoelectric Analysis

Description

Simple nodal load, charge, displacement, or potential excitations can be input on data lines. However, in more general cases, when the load is nonhomogeneous, it is often more convenient to input the excitation through a user subroutine. For distributed loads, this is achieved with the FORCEM user subroutine; for distributed charge, this is achieved with the FLUX user subroutine; for point loads, point charge, displacements, or potential, this is achieved via the FORCDF user subroutine.

When not using the table driven input, this user subroutine is flagged by the FORCDT model definition option listing the node numbers for which this user subroutine is called. Then, at each harmonic subincrement of the analysis for each of the nodes on the list, the user subroutine is called. For nodes without kinematic boundary conditions, increments of point loads and increments of point charge can be defined (this overwrites any point load input at the same nodes in the POINT LOAD option or overwriting any point charge in the POINT CHARGE option). For

Input:

U is the array of total displacements at this node.

FREQ is the excitation frequency.

DTIME is not used.






ICOMPL is 0 if real analysis; 1 if complex analysis.


Required Output:

FR is the array of the real components of the harmonic point loads.

FI is the array of the imaginary components of the harmonic point loads.

DUR is the array of the real components of the harmonic displacements.

DUI is the array of the imaginary components of the harmonic displacements.


90

nodes with kinematic boundary conditions (that is, listed in the FIXED DISP, FIXED POTENTIAL, DISP CHANGE, or FIXED POTENTIAL options), the user can define increments of harmonic displacement and/or potential. When using the table driven input, one explicitly activates this routine on the POINT LOAD, POINT CHARGE, FIXED DISP, or FIXED POTENTIAL option.

Format

User subroutine FORCDF is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE FORCDF (U,FR,FI,DUR,DUI,FREQ,DTIME,NDEG,NODE,

1 UG,XORD,NCRD,ICOMPL,INC,INCSUB)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION U(NDEG),FR(NDEG),FI(NDEG),DUR(NDEG),DUI(NDEG),UG(1)

1 XORD(1)

user coding

RETURN

END

where

Input:

U is the array of total displacements and potential at this node.

FREQ is the excitation frequency.

DTIME is not used.






ICOMPL is 0 if real analysis; 1 if complex analysis.


Required Output:

FR is the array of the real components of the harmonic point loads and harmonic point charge.

FI is the array of the imaginary components of the harmonic point loads and harmonic point charge.


The first ndeg-1 elements of the arrays refer to the structural point loads or displacements.

The ndeg’th element of the arrays refers to the point charge or harmonic potential.

DUR is the array of the real components of the harmonic displacements and harmonic potential.

DUI is the array of the imaginary components of the harmonic displacements and harmonic potential.


92

■ FILM

Input of Nonuniform Film Coefficients

Description

In heat transfer analysis, it is often necessary to include nonuniform film coefficients and sink temperatures for the calculation of convection or radiation boundary conditions. The FILM user subroutine facilitates this. It is called at each time step for each integration point on each element surface given in the FILMS model definition set, and allows the user to modify the film coefficient and sink temperature that is input through the data lines. In coupled contact analyses, the UHTCOE, UHTNRC, and UHTCON user subroutines are preferred.

Format

User subroutine FILM is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE FILM (H,TINF,TS,N,TIME) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION H(2), N(7),TS(6)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

TS(1) is the estimated surface temperature at the end of the increment.

TS(2) is the surface temperature at the beginning of the increment.

TS(3) is not used.

TS(4) is the integration point 1st coordinate.

This user subroutine is used when the table input format is not used; otherwise, use the UFILM user subroutine.


Note that since H and TINF are defined as ratios, if the user does not re-define them in this user subroutine, the data set values are used. If the user wishes to give absolute values here, the corresponding values on the FILMS data set can be conveniently set to 1.

TS(5) is the integration point 2nd coordinate.

TS(6) is the integration point 3rd coordinate.


N(2) is the IBODY code.


N(4) is the film index.

N(5) is the sink temperature index.

N(6) is not used.



Required Output:

H(1) is the ratio of the desired film coefficient to that given on the FILMS data set for this element to be defined by the user (preset to 1).

TINF is the ratio of the desired sink temperature to that given on the FILMS data set for this element to be defined by the user (preset to 1).

Optional Output:

H(2) is the derivative of the ratio of the film coefficient to that given on the FILMS data set; this can be defined optionally and may improve the convergence behavior in a nonlinear heat transfer analysis.


94

■ FLOW

Input of Mass Flow Rate and Inlet Temperature

Description

In a heat transfer analysis involving fluid channel elements, user subroutine FLOW is available to the user for the modification of mass flow rate, inlet temperature, and film coefficient. Both the inlet temperature and mass flow rate can be dependent on time; the film coefficient can also be a function of streamline distance.

Format

User subroutine FLOW is written with the following header: SUBROUTINE FLOW (II,IFACE,N1,NBSURF,STOT,RATE,TINLET,SURFJ,+TSURJ,HJ,TFLUID,TIMINC,CPTIME) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION SURFJ(4),TSURJ(4),HJ(4)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

II is the channel number.

IFACE is the channel face identification, defining the flow direction.

N1 is the fluid channel element number.

NBSURF is the number of channel surfaces.

STOT is the total stream line distance.

SURFJ(I) is the channel surface area array.

TSURJ(I) is the channel surface temperature array.

TFLUID is the fluid element temperature.


CPTIME is the current total time.

Required Output:

RATE is the mass flow rate (redefined by the user in this user subroutine).


In two-dimensional analyses, SURFJ(1), SURFJ(2) are the lengths of the edges bordering the channel element. In three-dimensional analyses, SURFJ(1) through SURFJ(4) are the areas on adjacent faces. In a similar manner, TSURJ is the average temperature on adjacent edges (for 2-D) or adjacent faces (for 3-D).

TINLET is the inlet temperature (redefined by the user in this user subroutine).

HJ(I) is the film coefficient of the ith surface (redefined by the user in this user subroutine).


96

■ UFOUND

Input of Nonlinear Foundation Stiffness and Damping

Description

The UFOUND user subroutine permits the introduction of nonlinear spring constants for use with the FOUNDATION option, and input of nonlinear damping for dynamics or harmonics. The user coding must supply both of the spring stiffness and the total spring force. The data value of the stiffness/damping constant, total time, and the element or spring number are made available to the user subroutine. For harmonic analysis, the stiffness/damping constants can be a function of the frequency. The UFOUND user subroutine is activated by the FOUNDATION option.

Format

User subroutine UFOUND is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UFOUND(EFFK,EFORC,U,TIME,N,IHRESP)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION EFFK(*),U(*),TIME(*),N(*),EFORC(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

For Elastic Foundation

EFFK(1) foundation stiffness

EFFK(2) foundation damping (dynamics and/or harmonics)

For Statics or Dynamics

EFORC(1) foundation resistance force due to stiffness

This user subroutine is used when the table input format is used; otherwise, use the USPRNG user subroutine.


EFORC(2) foundation resistance force due to damping

U(1) total displacement

U(2) total velocity

TIME(1) time at beginning of increment

TIME(2) incremental time

For Harmonics

EFORC(1) real component of foundation resistance force

EFORC(2) imaginary component of foundation resistance force

U(1) real component of harmonic displacement

U(2) imaginary component of harmonic displacement

TIME(1) time

TIME(2) frequency

N(1) element number

N(2) face id (ibody)

N(3) integration point number

N(4) boundary condition id

N(5) boundary condition id

N(6) internal element id

IHRESP 0 statics or dynamics1 harmonics


98

■ UFILM

Input of Nonuniform Convective Coefficients

Description

In heat transfer analysis, it is often necessary to include nonuniform convective coefficients and sink temperatures for the calculation of convection or radiation boundary conditions. The UFILM user subroutine facilitates this. It is called at each time step for each integration point on each element surface given in the FILMS model definition set, and allows the user to modify the convective coefficient and sink temperature that is input through the data lines. In coupled contact analyses, the UHTCOE and UHTCON user subroutines are preferred

Format

User subroutine UFILM is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UFILM(UHFILM,UTSINK,UHNATUR,UEXPNAT,* UEFFVIEW,UEMISS,UQFLUX,TS,N,TIME,INC) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z) DIMENSION TS(*),N(*)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

UHFILM is the conventional convective heat transfer coefficient.

UTSINK is the sink temperature.

UHNATUR is the natural convection coefficient.

UEXPNAT is the natural convection exponent.

UEFFVIEW is the effective view factor.

This user subroutine is used when the table input format is used; otherwise, use the FILM user subroutine.


UEMISS is the emissivity.

UQFLUX is the applied flux.

TS(1) is the estimated surface temperature at the end of increment.

TS(2) is the surface temperature at the beginning of increment.

TS(3) is not used.

TS(4) is the integration point 1st coordinate.

TS(5) is the integration point 2nd coordinate.

TS(6) is the integration point 3rd coordinate.

TS(7) is the first component of direction cosine of surface normal.

TS(8) is the second component of direction cosine of surface normal.

TS(9) is the third component of direction cosine of surface normal.


N(2) is the ibody number.


N(4) is the boundary condition id.


N(6) is not used.


N(8) is the layer number if heat transfer shell.

N(9) is not used.


TIME is the time.



100

■ USINKPT

Input of Sink Point Temperatures

Description

The USINKPT user subroutine allows the user to change the sink point temperatures as a function of time. For every integration point associated with an element face defined in the FILMS model definition option, the closest sink point will be determined. This routine will be called for each one of these integration points.

Format

User subroutine USINKPT is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE USINKPT(M,NN,ISINK,TSINK,TIME,INC,XINT,XSINK,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION XINT(NCRD),XSINK(NCRD)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Updates Temperature of Sink Point

M element number.

NN integration point number.

ISINK sink id.

TSINK temperature of sink point - to be updated by the user.

TIME time at the end of the increment.

INC increment number.

XINT coordinates of surface integration point.

XSINK coordinates of sink point.

NCRD number of coordinates.


■ UQVECT

Directed Thermal Flux

Description

This user subroutine permits the definition of the magnitude of the thermal flux and the direction. The equivalent nodal flux is calculated based upon

Where

Note, by default, if the flux is a positive quantity, but the product is a negative quantity, than heat it extracted from the surface. The user can use the ISIDE value in the QVECT model definition option to control this behavior.

Format

The UQVECT user subroutine is written with the following header:SUBROUTINE UQVECT(M,NN,FLUX,QV,TSOURCE,ABSORP,NDIR,INC,

*CPTIM,TIMINC)

INCLUDE '../COMMON/IMPLICIT'

DIMENSION QV(NDIR)

USER CODING

RETURN

END

N is the shape functions.

is the absorption constant.

q is the user defined magnitude of the flux.

n is the outward normal to the surface of the element.

d is the user defined direction cosine vector.

Required Input

m is the element number.

nn is the integration point number.

NTαq n∗d–( ) Sd∫

α

n*d–( )


102

ndir is the number of directions; either 2 or 3.

inc is the increment number.

cptim is the time at beginning of increment.

timinc is the time increment.

Required Output

flux magnitude of thermal flux to be defined.

qv direction cosine of the flux.

tsource temperature of source (optional).

absorp absorption coefficient.


■ GAPT

Input of Thermal Contact (Conrad) Gap Temperature

Description

In a heat transfer analysis involving thermal contact (CONRAD) gap elements, the gap temperature is compared with a given gap closure temperature for the determination of gap open/closed condition. In Marc, the gap temperature is estimated from the average of gap nodal temperatures and the gap closure temperature is entered through the CONRAD GAP model definition option.

The GAPT user subroutine allows for the redefinition of gap temperature (TGAP) based on the nodal temperatures T1 and T2. If the gap temperature (TGAP) is greater than or equal to the gap closure temperature (TCLOSE), the gap is closed. Otherwise, the gap is open. This also influences the electrical contact in a coupled Joule heating analysis.

Format

User subroutine GAPT is written with the following header:SUBROUTINE GAPT(N,I1,I2,T1,T2,TCLOSE,TGAP,INC,TIME,TIMINC)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

N is the gap (tie) number.I1,I2 are the nodal numbers.T1,T2 are the nodal temperatures.TCLOSE is the gap closure temperature.INC is the increment number.TIME is the total transient time.TIMINC is the time increment.Required Output:

TGAP is the gap temperature (to be defined the user).

0.5∗ T1 T2+( )


104

■ UFORMSN

Definition of Constraint Conditions

Description

The UFORMSN user subroutine allows the definition of a constraint condition. Marc's capability for applying arbitrary homogeneous constraints between nodal displacements is used through this user subroutine. To distinguish user constraints from Marc's built-in constraints, those constraints formed by the user in UFORMSN must be of type less than zero (ISTYP in the user subroutine: first field of data block 3 of the TYING model definition option). The constraint conditions can be supplied by using the UFORMSN user subroutine. The conventions adopted for these constraints are:

1. A constraint is defined by:

where:

The vector of displacement at node a, referred to as the tied mode.

Vector of displacements at b, c, etc.; these nodes are referred to as the retained nodes.

nonhomogeneous part of tying equation.

2. In the matrix [S], a row of zeros indicates that particular degree of freedom at node a is not constrained. If you want to enforce a single point constraint for a particular degree of freedom i, the entire ith row of is set to zero and LM(i) is set to -1.

ua{ } S[ ]ub

uc

etc⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

Cnon{ }+=

ua{ }

ub

uc

etc⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

Cnon{ }

S[ ]


3. To apply a constraint between degrees of freedom at the same node, the node must appear on both sides of the equation, with rows of zeros in [S] corresponding to the degrees of freedom on the left-hand side, which are retained on the right-hand side, and columns of zeros in [S] corresponding to the tied nodes appearing on the left-hand side.

Note: By default, the matrix is specified in the local displacement systems. However, if IFLAG is set to 1, the matrix is specified in the global displacement system and the program converts it to the local systems.

Format

The user subroutine supplying the matrix must have the following headers:

SUBROUTINE UFORMSN(S,NDEG,LONGSM,ITI,NRETN,II,ISTYP1 CNON,LM,INTDATA,REALDATA,XORD,XORDU,2 NCRD,IFLAG) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION S(NDEG,LONGSM),ITI(*),CNON(NDEG), $ XORD(NCRD,*),XORDU(NDEG,*),LM(*) DIMENSION INTDATA(*),REALDATA(*)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:


LONGSM is NDEG*number of retained nodes.

ITI( ) iti(1) = tied node iditi(2)-iti(1+nretn)= retained nodes id’s

NRETN is the number of retained nodes.

II is the tying number.

ISTYP is the tying type.

S[ ]

S[ ]


106

Example

Suppose a change from a coarse to a fine mesh of two-dimensional isoparametric elements is required. For any node in the fine mesh which does not correspond to a node in the coarse mesh, a constraint is necessary. The displacement at these nodes can be expressed as a linear combination of the displacements of the two corner nodes of the coarse mesh since the displacement is linear between these nodes due to the element formulation.

INTDATA( ) 1increment number2cycle number3ipass1 = stress pass2= heat pass3= fluid pass4=Joule pass5=diffusion pass6=electrostatic pass7=magnetostatic pass8=electromagnetic pass

REALDATA( ) 1 time at start of increment2 time increment

XORD( ) are the original coordinates of nodes in ITI( ) in the global system.

XORDU( ) are the total displacements of nodes in ITI( ) in the global system at the start of the increment.

NCRD is the first dimension of XORD.

Required Output:

S( ) is the tying matrix. DDUtied = [S]. DDUretained + CNON.

CNON( ) is the nonhomogeneous part in the tying equation.

LM( ) is the flag to force single point constraint.Note: The ith degree of freedom of the tied node ITI(1) will be tied if one

of the entries in the ith row of S is nonzero. If all entries in the ith row of S are zero, the ith degree of freedom will not be tied unless LM(I) is set to -1 in which case DDU(I) of the tied node = CNON(I) which is equivalent to a single point constraint.

IFLAG 0 S and CON are specified in the local system (default).1 S and CON are specified in the global system.


In the coarse mesh:

where:

Thus, we supply the following user subroutine: SUBROUTINE UFORMSN(S,NDEG,LONGSM,ITI,NRETN,II1 ISTYP,CNON,LM,INTDATA,REALDATA,XORD,XORDU,2 NCRD,IFLAG) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION S(NDEG,LONGSM),ITI(*),CNON(NDEG), DIMENSION INTDATA(*),REALDATA(*),1 XORD(NCRD,LONGTM),2 XORDU(NDEG,LONGTM) J=1 I=2 L=3 XIJ = SQRT((XORD(1,I)-XORD(1,J))**2+(XORD(2,I)-

XORD(2,J))**2) XIL = SQRT((XORD(1,I)-XORD(1,L))**2+(XORD(2,I)-

XORD(2,L))**2) XLAMBD = XIJ/XIL S(1,1) = 1. -XLAMBD S(2,2) = 1. -XLAMBD S(1,3) = XLAMBD S(2,4) = XLAMBD

user coding

RETURN END

Assuming that nodes j and k are located between nodes I and L and nodes m, n are located between nodes L and P, the constraint is then imposed by specifying j, k, m, n, etc., on data lines as the tied nodes, and I, L; I, L; L, P; L, P; etc., as the corresponding pairs of retained nodes. The TYING option would then become:

uj

vj⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

1 λ– 0 λ 0

0 1 λ– 0 λ

ui

vi

ul

vl⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

=

λ xij xi l⁄=


108

TYING4,-1,j,2i,l,-1,k,2i,l,-1,m,2l,p,-1,n,2l,p,

Note that this coarse to fine mesh tying constraint is in Marc as default tying types 31 and 32 for planar elements and as tying type 33 and 34 for three-dimensional brick elements. See Marc Volume A: User Information for further details.

Figure 2-1 Coarse to Fine Mesh Example

p

n

m

l

k

j

i

xij

xil


■ CREDE

Input of Pre-specified State Variables

Description

The CREDE user subroutine is available to the user for the input of prespecified state variables. The simplest option allows the specification of temperature increments throughout the mesh. Through the use of the STATE VARS parameter, the number of state variables per point in the structure can be increased. For example, radiation fluxes (in reactor core problems) can be included. Marc always assumes temperature is the first state variable given at a particular point, since the first state variable is used in conjunction with the tables of temperature dependence input specified in the TEMPERATURE EFFECTS option, and the first state variable is used to compute thermal strains. All state variables are available to all constitutive routines.

The CREDE user subroutine is called once per element in a loop over the elements when the THERMAL LOADS option is used. Any data blocks required should appear immediately after data block 2 of the THERMAL LOADS option in the input data. If the first field of data block 2 in the THERMAL LOADS option is a 3, total state variable values must be provided at all points of all elements at which constitutive calculations are made. If the first field is a 2, the incremental values are defined. Depending on the inclusion of the CENTROID or ALL POINTS parameters, centroidal values or values at all numerical integration points of an element are expected. For shell elements, the values of state variable increments must be given for each layer through the thickness at every integration point. For beam elements, the values of state variable increments must be given at all points used to define the beam section (16 for default element type 14, 25, 76 or 78; user-defined for element type 13, 77, or 79).

Format

User subroutine CREDE is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CREDE (DTDL,M,NSTRES,NEQST,NSTATS)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION DTDL (NSTATS,NEQST,NSTRES)

user coding

RETURNEND


110

where:

For meshes with several element types, NEQST and NSTRES take on maximum values, but the DTDL array need only be filled as far as necessary for a particular element type.

Example

As an example, suppose a linear gradient through the thickness is to be imposed on a shell with NSTATS = 1. The same gradient is imposed throughout the structure.

The following coding will suffice:SUBROUTINE CREDE (DTDL,M,NSTRES,NEQST,NSTATS)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION DTDL (NSTATS,NEQST,NSTRES)TOUT=500.0

TIN=300.0 T=TIN DT=(TOUT-TIN)/FLOAT(NEQST-1) DO 2 I=1, NEQST DO 1 J=1, NSTRES1 DTDL (1,I,J)=T2 T=T+DT RETURN END

Input:

M is the user element number and must remain unchanged in CREDE. The internal element number is obtained asmint = ielint(m)

NSTRES is the maximum number of integration points per element, if ALL POINTS was included in the parameters, and is 1 if the CENTROID parameter is used.

NEQST is the maximum number of layers per element.

NSTATS is the number of state variables requested by the user in the STATE VARS parameter. (This number equals 1 if only temperature is required).

Required Output:

DTDL is the array of state variable increments or total values (to be defined here by the user).


■ INITSV

Initialize State Variable Values

Description

This user subroutine, allows the user to define initial values of state variables. When not using the table driven input format, it is called in a loop over all the elements in the mesh when the INITIAL STATE option appears in the model definition options with a 2 in the second field of the second data block of that option. When using the table driven input, it is called for those elements specified in the INITIAL STATE model definition option if a 7 is given in the second field of the second data block and the initial condition is activated by the LOADCASE model definition option.

Format

User subroutine INITSV is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE INITSV(SV,LAYERS,INTPTS,M,ID)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION SV(LAYERS,INTPTS)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

LAYERS is the number of layers through the thickness if this is a shell element, or the number of points in the cross-section if this is a beam element. It is 1 for a continuum element.

INTPTS is the number of integration points in this element if the ALL POINTS parameter is used. If the CENTROID parameter is used, INTPTS = 1.

M is the user element number. The internal element number is obtained asmint = ielint(m)

ID is the state variable number (from columns 1-5 of the second data block of the INITIAL STATE set).


112

Required Output:

SV is the array of values of this state variable; to be defined here for this element by the user.


■ NEWSV

Input New State Variable Values

Description

This user subroutine allows the new values of any state variable to be defined at the end of the current step. When not using the table driven input format, it is called in a loop over all the elements in the mesh when the CHANGE STATE option appears in the model definition or the history definition set with a 2 in the second field of the second data block of that option. When using the table driven input, it is called for those elements specified in the CHANGE STATE model definition option, if a 7 is given in the second field of the second data block and the boundary condition is activated by the LOADCASE option.

Format

User subroutine NEWSV is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE NEWSV(SV,LAYERS,INTPTS,M,ID)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION SV(LAYERS,INTPTS)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

LAYERS is the number of layers through the thickness if this is a shell element, of the number of points in the cross-section if this is a beam element. It is 1 for a continuum element.

INTPTS is the number of integration points in this element if the ALL POINTS parameter is used. If the CENTROID parameter is used, INTPTS=1.

M is the user element number. The internal element number is obtained asmint = ielint(m)

ID is the state variable number (from columns 1-5 of the second data block of the CHANGE STATE set [model definition or history definition]).


114

Note: If the user wants to define the state variable values as the function of time, the updated total time is available by adding the include statement in this subroutine. For example:

include ’path/common/creeps’

within ’creeps’:

Required Output:

SV is the array of new values of this state variable; to be defined here for this element by the user.

cptim is the total time at the end of the last step.

timinc is the time increment at the current step.


■ USSD

Input of Spectral Response Density

Description

The USSD user subroutine allows the user to input the spectral density function for the frequencies required in the spectrum response calculation. These frequencies are obtained by performing a modal analysis.

Format

User subroutine USSD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE USSD(SD,OMEG,I)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

OMEG is the frequency in cycles per time unit.

I is the degree of freedom.

Required Output:

SD is the spectral response density for the Ith degree of freedom to be defined by the user.


116

■ USINC

Input of Initial Conditions

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to input initial displacements, velocities, and accelerations for dynamic stress analysis, initial temperatures for heat transfer analysis or thermal stress analysis, temperature history for thermal stress analysis, or initial pressure. The user must supply the values for all degrees of freedom in vector F. This user subroutine is used with either the INITIAL DISP, INITIAL VEL, INITIAL TEMP, or INIT PRESSURE model definition options, or the POINT TEMP model and history definition options. It is called for every node in the structure if it is used.

Format

User subroutine USINC is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE USINC(F,N,NDEG,IFLAG)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION F(NDEG)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

F is the vector of initial conditions or point temperatures to be given by the user.

N is the node number.


IFLAG is the flag that indicates the type of data that must be supplied.= 1 initial displacement.= 2 initial velocities.= 3 initial temperatures. = 4 initial accelerations.= 5 point temperatures (only for thermal stress analysis).= 7 initial pressure (only for diffusion analysis).


■ USDATA

Input of Initial Data

Description

This user subroutine is a mechanism to allow the user to read data into a user-defined common block. This common block is stored on the restart file, and available in subsequent increments. The common block USDACM must be given the correct length in this user subroutine. This common block can also be used in any other user subroutine.

Format

User subroutine USDATA is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE USDATA(KIN,KOU,IC)COMMON/USDACM/MYDATAIMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Note that the maximum length of USDACM should be defined here. It should agree in length in real *4 words as with that given on the USDATA model definition option.

Input:

KIN is the unit number for input, usually 5.

IC is the reader flag.= 1 pre-reader.= 2 real reader.

Required Output:

KOU is unit number for output, usually 6.


118

■ UTIMESTEP

Input of User-defined Time Step

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to specify the time step when the AUTO STEP load stepping scheme is used

Format

User subroutine UTIMESTEP is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UTIMESTEP(TIMESTEP,TIMESTEPOLD,ICALL,$ TIME,TIMELOADCASE) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

This routine is called right after the time step has (possibly) been updated by the program at different stages in the analysis depending on the value of ICALL. It is allowed, but in general not recommended, to increase the time step during an increment (ICALL=2). Note that only the variable TIMESTEP should be modified in this routine.

Input:

TIMESTEP is the current time step as suggested by the program and which can be modified in this routine.

TIMESTEPOLD is the current time step before it was modified by the program.

ICALL is a flag for when the routine is called.= 1 for setting the initial time step during the reader phase.= 2 if this routine is called during an increment= 3 if this routine is called at the beginning of the increment

TIME time at the start of the current increment

TIMELOADCASE time period of the current load case

Required Output:

TIMESTEP is the current time step as suggested by the program and which can be modified in this routine.


■ UVELOC

Generation or Modification of Nodal Velocity Vectors

Description

In heat diffusion-convection, it is sometimes necessary to include a position dependent velocity field. The UVELOC user subroutine, which is called for each node, allows the user the specification or redefinition of previously specified nodal velocity vectors. The inclusion of convection is activated on the HEAT parameter. This user subroutine should not be used in a coupled fluid-thermal analysis, as the velocities are calculated by Marc.

Format

User subroutine UVELOC is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UVELOC (VELOC,COORD,NCRD,NODE) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION VELOC (NCRD),COORD(NCRD)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

COORD is the array of coordinates at this node.


NODE is the node number.

Required Output:

VELOC is the array of nodal velocity components to be defined.


120

■ MOTION (2-D)

Definition of Rigid Surface Motion for 2-D Contact

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of nonuniform rigid surface motions, in conjunction with the CONTACT option. Its call is triggered by the UMOTION model definition option. This user subroutine should only be used with velocity controlled rigid surfaces.

The MOTION user subroutine is called during the calculations at the beginning of each time increment and the user return the surface velocities for that increment. Imposed displacement increments at nodal points in contact with rigid surfaces are obtained from the velocity multiplied by the time increment. The surface path becomes an explicit forward integration of velocities. Therefore, caution should be taken when there are abrupt changes in surface path direction or abrupt changes in velocity by

CAUTION: Please note that if the coordinates of the center of rotation are defined unconditionally in this routine, they will be set to that same value for all increments of the analysis, causing the rigid surface to rotate around a fixed point in space. On the other hand, if the position of the center of rotation is defined only once in increment 0, as in

if(inc.eq.0) thenx(1)=...etc.

endif

the center of the rotation is updated internally as motion and deformation take place. Obviously, the results will be different for the two cases.

If, at the start of the analysis, a surface is placed apart from the body to be deformed, the MOTION user subroutine is also used in the approaching phase.

If two-dimensional elements are being used, the surfaces have rigid body motions in two dimensions. It is assumed that such motions can be defined by a translation of a point (the center of rotation), plus a rotation around that point.


Format

User subroutine MOTION is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE MOTION (X,F,V,TIME,DTIME,NSURF,INC)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION X(*),V(*),F(*)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

X(3) is the array of current die defining coordinates.X(1) = first coordinate of center of rotation.X(2) = second coordinate of center of rotation.X(3) = angle rotated around z-axis.

F(3) is the array of current surface loads.F(1) = first component of load.F(2) = second component of load.F(3) = moment.

TIME is the time at which data is requested.


NSURF is the surface number for which data is requested.


Required Output:

V(3) is the array of current surface velocities.V(1) = first component of the velocity at the center of rotation.V(2) = second component of the velocity at the center of rotation.V(3) = angular velocity.


122

Example

Assume that a rigid surface is identified as surface number 1, and is moving in the negative x-direction with a velocity of 1.0. The MOTION user subroutine can be written as follows:

SUBROUTINE MOTION(X,F,V,TIME,DTIME,NSURF,INC)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION X(*),V(*),F(*)IF(NSURF.EQ.1) THEN

V(1)=-1.V(2)=0.V(3)=0.

ENDIFRETURNEND


■ MOTION (3-D)

Definition of Rigid Surface Motion for 3-D Contact

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of nonuniform rigid surface motions in conjunction with the CONTACT option. Its call is triggered by the UMOTION model definition option. This user subroutine should only be used with velocity controlled rigid surfaces.

The MOTION user subroutine is called during the calculations at the beginning of each time increment and the user’s return surface velocities for that increment. Imposed displacement increments at nodal points in contact with rigid surfaces are obtained from the velocity multiplied by the time increment. The surface path becomes an explicit forward integration of velocities. Therefore, caution should be taken when there are abrupt changes in surface path direction or abrupt changes in velocity by making time increments as small as necessary.

CAUTION: Please note that if the coordinates of the center of rotation are defined unconditionally in this routine, they will be set to that same value for all increments of the analysis, causing the rigid surface to rotate around a fixed point in space. On the other hand, if the position of the center of rotation is defined only once in increment 0, as in

if(inc.eq.0) thenx(1)=...etc.

endif

the center of the rotation is updated internally as motion and deformation take place. Obviously, the results will be different for the two cases.

If, at the start of the analysis, a rigid surface is placed apart from the deformable body, the MOTION user subroutine is also used in the approaching phase.

If three-dimensional elements are used, the surfaces have rigid body motions in three dimensions. It is assumed that such motions can be defined by a translation of a point (the center of rotation), plus a rotation about the axis of rotation through that point.


124

Format

User subroutine MOTION is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE MOTION (X,F,V,TIME,DTIME,NSURF,INC)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION X(*),V(*),F(*)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

X(6) is the array of current die defining coordinates.X(1) = first coordinate of center of rotation.X(2) = second coordinate of center of rotation.X(3) = third coordinate of center of rotation.Axis for specifying angular velocity:X(4) = first component of direction cosine.X(5) = second component of direction cosine.X(6) = third component of direction cosine.

F(6) is the array of current surface loads.F(1) = first component of load.F(2) = second component of load.F(3) = third component of load.F(4) = first component of moment.F(5) = second component of moment.F(6) = third component of moment.



NSURF is the surface number for which data is requested.


Required Output:

V(4) is the array of current surface velocities.V(1) = first component of the velocity at the center of rotation.V(2) = second component of the velocity at the center of rotation.V(3) = third component of the velocity at the center of radiation.V(4) = angular velocity around axis defined above with X(4), X(5), and X(6).


Example

Assume that a rigid surface is identified as surface number 2 and is moving in the negative x-direction with a velocity of 1.0. The MOTION user subroutine can be written as follows:

SUBROUTINE MOTION(X,F,V,TIME,DTIME,NSURF,INC)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION X(*),V(*),F(*)IF(NSURF.NE.2) THEN

V(1)=-1.V(2)=0.V(3)=0.V(4)=0.0

ENDIFRETURNEND


126

■ UGROWRIGID

Changes the Size of a Rigid Body During the Analysis

Description

This user subroutine is called when the flag on the UMOTION model definition option is turned on. The user can define the size of the rigid body as a function of time.

Format

User subroutine UGROWRIGID is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UGROWRIGID(MD,RELX,RELY,RELZ,TIME)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

MD is the rigid body number.


Required Output:

RELX is the relative size defined by the user in the x-direction with respect to the original size.

RELY is the relative size defined by the user in the y-direction with respect to the original size.

RELZ is the relative size defined by the user in the z-direction with respect to the original size.

Note: (1) RELX, RELY, and RELZ must be equal to one another if a rotation is applied to the rigid body.

(2) At time = 0, RELX = RELY = RELZ = 1.0.


■ UFRIC

Definition of Friction Coefficients

Description

With this user subroutine, the user can define the variable friction coefficients or friction factors in conjunction with the CONTACT model definition option. Its call is triggered by the UFRICTION option.

For distributed based friction, the UFRIC user subroutine is called for every element containing nodes that are in contact with surfaces at the nodes. These calls are made every iteration both during the assembly phase and during the stress recovery phase.

In case of the variable IFRIC = 1, 3 or 7, a constant shear friction model is enacted and the user returns a friction factor m defined in the equation:

where:

In case the variable IFRIC = 2, 4, 5 or 6, a Coulomb friction model is enacted, and the user returns a friction coefficient μ defined in the equation:

where:

IFRIC is the friction type based upon the 4th field of the 2nd data block of the UFRICTION option.

ft is the shear friction force being applied.

m is the friction factor.

ky is the shear flow stress of the material being deformed.

t is the tangent unit vector in the direction of relative sliding velocity.

μ is the friction coefficient.

fn is the normal stress/force at the point of contact.

ft = -m ky t

ft = -μ fn t


128

Format

User subroutine UFRIC is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UFRIC (MIBODY,X,FN,VREL,TEMP,YIEL,FRIC,TIME,INC,NSURF)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION X(2),MIBODY(4),VREL(1),TEMP(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where

Input:

For distributed friction based on nodal stresses:

MIBODY(1) is the user element number.

MIBODY(2) is the side number.

MIBODY(3) is the surface integration point number.

MIBODY(4) is the internal element number.

For nodal friction based on nodal forces:

MIBODY(1) is the user node number.

MIBODY(2) is not used; enter 0.

MIBODY(3) is not used; enter 0.

MIBODY(4) is the internal node number.

X is the updated coordinates of contact point where friction is being calculated.

FN is the normal stress/force being applied at that point.

VREL is the relative sliding velocity at contact point.

TEMP(1) is the temperature of contact point.

TEMP(2) is the voltage of contact point (Joule heating).

YIEL is the flow stress of workpiece material at contact point.



NSURF is the surface being contacted by the side for which friction calculations are being made.

Required Output:

FRIC is the friction coefficient or friction factor to be provided by the user.


■ UFRICBBC

Definition of Friction Coefficients for Beam-to-Beam Contact

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to define variable friction coefficients for beam-to-beam contact, similar to the UFRIC user subroutine. Like the UFRIC user subroutine, UFRICBBC is used in conjunction with the CONTACT model definition option and its call is triggered by the UFRICTION model definition option . Unlike the UFRIC user subroutine, however, UFRICBBC is called for every beam or truss element that is in contact with another beam or truss element. These calls are made every iteration both during the assembly phase and during the stress recovery phase. If beam elements contact with other beam elements and some of the nodes of these beam elements contact with rigid surfaces or with the faces of continuum or shell elements, the UFRIC user subroutine is called for every node in contact and the UFRICBBC user subroutine is called for every beam element in contact.

Since only the Coulomb friction model is supported by the beam-to-beam contact option, the subroutine must return the friction coefficient defined by the equation:

where:

Also See

The UFRIC user subroutine.

ft is the friction force at the contact point on the touching element.

μ is the friction coefficient.

fn is the normal force at the contact point on the touching element.

t is -v/|v|, where v is the relative velocity of the contact point on the touching element with respect to the contact point on the touched element.

μ

ft = -μ fn t


130

Format

User subroutine UFRICBBC is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UFRICBBC(MIBODY1,DPOS1,X1,TEMP1,

MIBODY2,DPOS2,X2,TEMP2,

FN,VREL,TIME,TIMINC,INC,FRIC)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION MIBODY1(3),X1(3),MIBODY2(3),X2(3),VREL(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where

Input:

Touching point:MIBODY1(1) is the user number of the touching element.MIBODY1(2) is the internal number of the touching element.MIBODY1(3) is the number of the touching body.DPOS1 is the natural coordinate (between 0 and 1) of the touching point on the

touching element.X1 are the updated coordinates of the touching point.TEMP1 is the temperature of the touching point.Touched point:MIBODY2(1) is the user number of the touched element.MIBODY2(2) is the internal number of the touched element.MIBODY2(3) is the number of the touched body.DPOS2 is the natural coordinate (between 0 and 1) of the touched point on the

touched element.X2 are the updated coordinates of the touched point.TEMP2 is the temperature of the touched point.Other input:FN is the normal force being applied at that point.VREL is the relative sliding velocity of the touching point with respect to the

touched point.TIME is the time at the beginning of the increment.TIMINC is the current time increment.INC is the increment number.FRIC is the friction coefficient.Required Output:

FRIC is the friction coefficient.


■ DIGEOM

Definition of 3-D Rigid Surface Patch

Description

In three-dimensional problems in which complicated rigid surfaces need to be entered, it might be easier to define them with other software aids, such as a CAD system or an FEA preprocessor. In such cases, this user subroutine lets the user enter the geometry directly. This user subroutine is used in conjunction with the CONTACT option for three-dimensional problems only.

Rigid surfaces are normally entered by means of several geometrical entities. If the discrete representation is used these are internally subdivided into 4-point patches. This user subroutine allows the user to directly enter the coordinates associated with each patch.

The DIGEOM user subroutine is called for every geometrical entity of type 7 (patch) for which the Fortran logical unit from where data is read is declared as -1.

Format

User subroutine DIGEOM is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE DIGEOM (IPATCH,NDIE,XYZ,NPATCH)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XYZ(3,4)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

IPATCH is the current patch number of this entity.

NDIE is the surface (body) number.

NPATCH is the total number of patches defining this entity.

Required Output:

XYZ are the three (x, y, z) coordinates of the four points of the patch to be entered by the user.


132

■ SEPFOR

Definition of Separation Force

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of the separation force in conjunction with the CONTACT model definition option. The separation forces, FNORM and FTANG, are either calculated by Marc or entered through the CONTACT option, and then passed into this user subroutine. The user decides whether these values at the current increment are appropriate to determine whether separation occurs.

FNORM is the normal reaction force above which a node in contact separates from a surface. Any compressive or negative value indicates real contact while a positive reaction force indicates a tendency to separate. The default is taken as the maximum value of the residual force in the structure for the current increment. This value can be reset by the user through the input format. Defining a too small value can result in an increased number of iterations. Defining a very large value eliminates the possibility of separation. FTANG is the tangential force used to determine whether a nodal point positioned at a convex corner of surface should be sliding from patch to patch or remaining on its current patch. The default value is half of FNORM. These two default reaction forces vary from increment to increment.

Format

User subroutine SEPFOR is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE SEPFOR (FNORM,FTANG,IBODY,NNODE,INC)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

IBODY is the current body number the node touched.

NNODE is the current touched external node number.



Example

If the user desires the default separation force for surface 2, and does not want any separation of nodes from surface 3, the user subroutine is written as follows:

SUBROUTINE SEPFOR (FNORM,FTANG,IBODY,NNODE,INC) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) IF(IBODY.NE.3)GO TO 999 C RESET FNORM TO A VERY LARGE VALUE TO ELIMINATE C POSSIBILITY OF SEPARATION

FNORM=2.E7C WRITE(6,101) IBODY,FNORM,NNODE,INC 101 FORMAT(‘THE SEPARATION FORCE OF BODY ‘,15, *HAS BEEN RESET TO BE ‘,E15.5, *FOR NODE ‘,15,’ AT INCREMENT ‘,15) 999 CONTINUE RETURN END

Required Output:

FNORM is the normal separation force to be supplied by the user.

FTANG is the tangential separation force to be supplied by the user.


134

■ SEPFORBBC

Definition of Separation Force for Beam-to-Beam Contact

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of the separation force for beam-to-beam contact, similar to the SEPFOR user subroutine. Like SEPFOR, SEPFORBBC is used in conjunction with the CONTACT model definition option. Unlike the SEPFOR user subroutine, however, SEPFORBBC is called for every beam or truss element that is in contact with another beam or truss element. If beam elements contact with other beam elements and some of the nodes of these beam elements contact with rigid surfaces or with the faces of continuum or shell elements, then the SEPFOR user subroutine is called for every node in contact and the SEPFORBBC user subroutine is called for every beam element in contact.

The FSEP separation force is either calculated by Marc or entered through the CONTACT or CONTACT TABLE option, and then passed into this user subroutine. It is the normal reaction force above which a beam element in contact separates from another beam element. Any compressive or negative value indicates real contact while a positive force indicates a tendency to separate. The user decides whether these values at the current increment are appropriate to determine whether separation occurs. The default separation force calculated by Marc is the maximum value of the residual force in the structure for the current increment.

Also See

The SEPFOR user subroutine.

Format

User subroutine SEPFORBBC is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE SEPFORBBC(MIBODY1,MIBODY2,TIME,TIMINC,INC,FSEP)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

DIMENSION MIBODY1(3),MIBODY2(3)

user coding

RETURNEND


where:

Input:

Touching element:

MIBODY1(1) is the user number of the touching element.

MIBODY1(2) is the internal number of the touching element.

MIBODY1(3) is the number of the touching body.

Touched element:

MIBODY2(1) is the user number of the touched element.

MIBODY2(2) is the internal number of the touched element.

MIBODY2(3) is the number of the touched body.

Other input:

TIME is the time at the beginning of the increment.

TIMINC is the current time increment.


FSEP is the separation force.

Required Output:

FSEP is the separation force.


136

■ SEPSTR

Definition of Separation Stress

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of the separation stress in conjunction with the CONTACT model definition option. The separation stresses, SNORM and STANG, are either calculated by Marc or entered through the CONTACT option, and then passed into this user subroutine. The user decides whether these values at the current increment are appropriate to determine whether separation occurs.

SNORM is the stress normal to the surface above which a node in contact separates from another body. Any compressive or negative value indicates real contact while a positive stress indicates a tendency to separate. The default is taken as the maximum value of the residual force in the structure for the current increment divided by an effective area. This value can be reset by the user through the input format. Defining a too small value can result in an increased number of iterations. Defining a very large value eliminates the possibility of separation. STANG is the tangential stress used to determine whether a nodal point positioned at a convex corner of surface should be sliding from patch to patch or remaining on its current patch. The default value is half of SNORM. These two default values vary from increment to increment.

Format

User subroutine SEPSTR is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE SEPSTR (SNORM,STANG,IBODY,NNODE,INC)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

IBODY is the current body number the node touched.

NNODE is the current touched external node number.



Required Output:

SNORM is the normal separation stress to be supplied by the user.

STANG is the tangential separation stress to be supplied by the user.


138

■ UHTCOE

Definition of Environment Film Coefficient

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of variable film coefficients and sink temperatures on free surfaces, in conjunction with the CONTACT option and the COUPLE parameter. Its call is triggered by the UHTCOEF option.

The UHTCOE user subroutine is called at every element surface containing nodes that are on a free body boundary and for each surface at the trapezoidal rule integration points (that is, the nodes). These calls are made every iteration both during the assembly phase and the recovery phase of the heat transfer pass of a coupled analysis.

A distributed heat flux is being calculated according to the equation:

where:

By modifying H and TS, the user can model varying heat transfer conditions along the boundary. Special attention has been given to provide the user the capability of simulating radiation heat transfer, by making available the location and temperatures of all the surfaces in the environment.

The user can either specify H and TS or specify the flux q directly which is treated strictly as such.

q is the heat flux entering the surface.

T is the surface temperature.

TS is the sink temperature.

H is the film coefficient.

q = H(T - TS)


Format

User subroutine UHTCOE is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UHTCOE(MIBODY,XP,TEMP,IBODY,ICONNO,XORD,XT,DXT,

+ TMPALL,TMPALO,TOTINC,TIMINC,INC,NCRD,+ NDEGS,NDEGH,NCRDMX,NDEGMX,NBCD,NBCN,TSINK,+ HTCOEF,IFLAG) IMPLICIT REAL *8(A-H,O-Z) DIMENSION MIBODY(*),XP(*),ICONNO(*),XORD(*),XT(*),DXT(*),+ TEMP(*),TMPALL(*),NBCD(*),,TSINK(*),TMPALO(*)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

MIBODY(1) is the element number where the surface flux is being calculated.

MIBODY(2) is the side of the element.

MIBODY(3) is the integration point of said side.


XP(NCRD) are the coordinates of point where calculation is being made; it is updated to end of increment.

TEMP(2) is the current temperature of said point.

TEMP(4) is the current voltage of said point.

TEMP(5) is the pressure of said point.

IBODY is the flexible surface to which point belongs.

ICONNO(*) are the nodal points that make up the boundary of the deformable surfaces declared in the CONTACT option.

NBCN is the upper bound to the number of nodes on a flexible surface boundary.

NBCD(*) is the array of actual number of boundary nodes on flexible surfaces.

XORD(*) is the array of original nodal point coordinates.

XT(*) is the array of nodal point displacements.

DXT(*) is the array of nodal displacement increments.

TMPALL(*) is the array of nodal temperatures (current estimate at end of increment).

TMPALO(*) is the array of nodal temperatures (at beginning of increment).

TOTINC is the current accumulated time.


140




NDEGS is the number of degrees of freedom per node for the stress part of the analysis.

NDEGH is the number of degrees of freedom per node for the thermal part of the analysis (usually 1).

NCRDMX is the maximum number of coordinates per node for the whole model (can be different from NCRD if different element types are used).

NDEGMX is the maximum number of degrees of freedom per node for the whole model (can be different from NDEG if different element types are used).

TSINK(4) is the sink voltage declared in the CONTACT option for this flexible surface.

TSINK(5) is the sink pressure declared in CONTACT option for this flexible surface.

Required Output:

IFLAG =0 HTCOEF is a heat transfer coefficient =1 HTCOEF is a flux.

HTCOEF is the heat transfer coefficient between surface and environment, such that the heat flux per unit area that leaves the surface is:

Q = HTCOEF (TEMP - TSINK)orthe heat flux per unit area that leaves the surface.

TSINK(2) is the sink temperature declared in the CONTACT option for this flexible surface.


■ UHTCON

Definition of Contact Film Coefficient

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of variable film coefficients of surfaces that are in contact with other surfaces in conjunction with the CONTACT option and COUPLE parameter. Its call is triggered by the UHTCON option.

The UHTCON user subroutine is called at every element surface containing nodes that are on a body boundary that is in contact, and for each surface at the trapezoidal rule integration points (that is, the nodes). These calls are made every iteration during both the assembly phase and the stress recovery phase of the heat transfer pass of a coupled analysis.

A distributed heat flux is being calculated according to the equation

q = HD(T - TD)

where:

By modifying HD, the user can model varying heat transfer conditions along the contact regions.

Format

User subroutine UHTCON is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UHTCON(MIBODY,XP,TEMP,IBODY,IOBODY,FN,TOTINC,+TIMINC,INC,NCRD,NDEG,TSINK,HTCOEF) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION MIBODY(4),XP(*),TMEP(*),TSINK(*)

user coding

RETURN END



TD is an interpolated temperature of the body being contacted.

HD is the film coefficient.


142

where:

Input:

MIBODY(1) is the element where the surface flux is being calculated.

MIBODY(2) is the side of said element.



XP(NCRD) is the coordinates of point where calculation is being made; it is updated to end of increment.

TEMP(2) is the temperature of said pointer.

TEMP(4) is the voltage of said point.



IOBODY is the surface being contacted.

FN is the contact pressure between contacting surfaces.



INC is the current increment.



TSINK(2) is the temperature of surface being contacted.

TSINK(4) is the voltage of surface being contacted.

TSINK(5) is the pressure of surface being contacted.

Required Output:

HTCOEF is the heat transfer coefficient between surfaces in contact, such that the heat flux per unit area that leaves the surface is:

Q = HTCOEF (TEMP(2) - TSINK(2)).


■ UDAMAGE_INDICATOR

Indicator of Material Damage

Description

Different from UDAMAG, this user subroutine allows you to calculate a damage indicator to show in postprocessing. The indicator does not affect material properties but can be used to remove elements to show crack propagation. It is used only with Cockroft-Latham, Oyane and Principal damage criteria.

Format

User subroutine UDAMAG_INDICATOR is written with the following header lines:

SUBROUTINE UDAMAGE_INDICATOR(DAMDAT,DAMFAC,S,SRATE,ESTRS,NDI,NSHEAR,M,NN,KCUS,DTIME,DAMFLAG,IFLAG)

INCLUDE '../COMMON/IMPLICIT'C* * * * * *C USER DEFINED DAMAGE INDICATORC FOR MODELS USING COCKROFT,OYANE OR PRINCIPAL DAMAGE CRITERIAC NOTE:C IF OTHER STATE VARIABLES ARE NEEDED, USEC ELMVAR.F

DIMENSION DAMDAT(*),S(*),KCUS(*) IFLAG=1USER CODINGRETURNEND

where:

Input:

DAMDAT is the damage model input data

S is the stress array

SRATE is the equivalent plastic strain rate

ESTRS is the equivalent effective stress

M is the element number


144

NN is the integration point number



NDI is the number of direct stress components

NSHEAR is the number of shear stress components

DTIME is the time increment

Required Output:

IFLAG is the flag to indicate the user subroutine is used= 0 not used= 1 used

DAMDAT(8) is the crack threshold from input (or user entered value)

DAMFLAG is the damage flag for display (post code 80)

DAMFAC is the computed damage value


■ UHTNRC

Definition of Thermal Near Contact Film Coefficient

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of variable film coefficients of surfaces that are almost in contact with other surfaces in conjuction with the CONTACT option and COUPLE parameter. Its call is triggered by the UHTCON option.

The UHTNRC user subroutine is called at every element surface containing nodes that are on a body boundary that is almost in contact, and for each surface at the trapezoidal rule integration points (that is, the nodes). These calls are made every iteration both during the assembly phase and the recovery phase of the heat transfer pass of a coupled analysis.


where:



TD is the interpolated temperature of the body being contacted.

HD is the heat transfer coefficient between surfaces.

HDN is the heat transfer coefficient of natural convection between surfaces.

HEX is the exponent associated with natural convection between surfaces.

EMS is the emissivity for radiation calculation between surfaces.

HDC is the upper bound in distance dependent heat transfer coefficient.

HDD is the lower bound in distance dependent heat transfer coefficient.

is the distance between the surfaces.

is the upper limit of the near contact distance.

q HD T TD–( ) HDN T TD–( )HEXEMS T

4TD

4–( )

HDC HDC HDD–( ) ddnear-------------–⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ T TD–( )

+ +=

d

dnear


146

By modifying HD, HDN, HEX, EMS, HDC, and HDD, the user can model varying heat transfer conditions along the boundary, which are dependent of the distance between the contacting surfaces.

Format

User subroutine UHTNRC is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UHTNRC(MIBODY,XP,TEMP,IBODY,IOBODY,FN,TOTINC,

+ TIMINC,INC,NCRD,NDEG,TSINK,HTCOEF,

+ HTNAT,EXPNAT,EMIS,HDD,HC,D)

IMPLICIT REAL*8(A-H, O-Z)

DIMENSION MIBODY(4),XP(*),TEMP(*),TSINK(*)

RETURN

END

where:

Input:





TEMP(2) is the temperature of said point.















D is the distance between the surfaces.

Required Output:

HTCOEF is the heat transfer coefficient between surfaces almost in contact.

HTNAT is the heat transfer coefficient of natural convection between surfaces almost in contact.

EXPNAT is the exponent associated with natural convection between surfaces almost in contact.

EMIS is the emissivity for radiation calculation between surfaces almost in contact.

HDD is the lower bound of the distance dependent heat transfer coefficient.

HC is the upper bound of the distance dependent heat transfer coefficient, such that the heat flux per unit area that leaves the surface is

Q = HTCOEF (TEMP(2) - TSINK(2) ) +HTNAT * (TEMP(2) - TSINK(2)) ** EXPNAT +SIGMA * EMIS * (TEMP(2) ** 4 - TSINK(2) ** 4) +(HC - (HC - HDD) * d/dnear) * (TEMP(2) - TSINK(2))


148

■ UVTCOE

Definition of Environment Electrical Film Coefficient

Description

This subroutine allows the definition of variable electrical film coefficients and sink voltage of free surfaces, in conjunction with the CONTACT option and JOULE parameter. Its call is triggered by the UHTCOEF option.

The UVTCOE user subroutine is called at every element surface containing nodes that are on a free body boundary and for each surface at the trapezoidal rule integration points (that is, the nodes). These calls are made every iteration both during the assembly phase and the recovery phase of the electrical pass of a coupled structural-Joule heating analysis.

A distributed electrical heat flux is being calculated according to the equation:

where:

By modifying H and VS, the user can model varying electrical transfer conditions along the boundary. Special attention has been given to provide the user the capability of simulating complex behavior, by making available the location and temperatures of all the surfaces in the environment.

The user can either specify H or VS or specify the flux q directly which is treated strictly as such.

q is the electrical flux entering the surface.

V is the surface voltage.

VS is the sink voltage.


q H V VS–( )=


Format

User subroutine UVTCOE is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UVTCOE(MIBODY,XP,TEMP,IBODY,ICONNO,XORD,XT,DXT,

+ TMPALL,TMPALO,TOTINC,TIMINC,INC,NCRD,

+ NDEGS,NDEGH,NCRDMX,NDEGMX,NBCD,NBCN,TSINK,

+ ETCOEF,IFLAG)

IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

DIMENSION MIBODY(*),XP(*),ICONNO(*),XORD(*),XT(*),DXT(*),

+ TEMP(*),TMPALL(*),NBCD(*),TSINK(*)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:










ICONNO(*) are the nodal points that make the boundary of deformable surfaces declared in option contact.

NBCN is the upper bound to the number on nodes on a flexible surface boundary.

NBCD(*) is the array of actual number of boundary nodes on flexible surfaces.

XORD(*) is the array of original nodal point coordinates.

XT(*) is the array of nodal point displacements.

DXT(*) is the array of nodal displacement increments.

TMPALL(*) is the array of nodal voltage (current estimate at end of increment).

TMPALO(*) is the array of nodal voltage (at beginning of increment).


150





NDEGS is the number of degrees of freedom per node for the stress part of the analysis.

NDEGH is the number of degrees of freedom per node for voltage (usually 1).

NCRDMX is the maximum number of coordinates per node for the whole model (can be different from NCRD if different element types are used).

NDEGMX is the maximum number of degrees of freedom per node for the whole model (can be different from NDEG if different element types are used).

TSINK(2) is the sink temperature declared in CONTACT option for this flexible surface.

TSINK(4) is the sink voltage declared in CONTACT option for this flexible surface.

TSINK(5) is the sink pressure declared in CONTACT option for this flexible surface.

Required Output:

IFLAG = 0 ETCOEF is a electrical transfer coefficient.= 1 ETCOEF is a flux.

ETCOEF is the electrical transfer coefficient between surface and environment, such that the heat flux per unit area that leaves the surface is:q = ETCOEF (VOLT - VSINK)orthe electrical flux per unit area that leaves the surface.


■ UVTCON

Definition of Electrical Film Coefficient

Description

This subroutine allows the definition of variable electrical film coefficients of surfaces that are in contact with other surfaces in conjunction with the CONTACT option and the JOULE parameter. Its call is triggered by the UHTCON option.

The UVTCON user subroutine is called at every element surface containing nodes that are on a body boundary that is in contact, and for each surface at the trapezoidal rule integration points (that is, the nodes). These calls are made every iteration during both the assembly phase and the recovery phase of the electrical pass of a coupled structural-Joule heating analysis.


where:

By modifying HD and VD, the user can model varying electrical transfer conditions along the boundary.

Format

User subroutine UVTCON is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UVTCON(MIBODY,XP,TEMP,IBODY,IOBODY,FN,TOTINC,+ TIMINC,INC,NCRD,NDEG,TSINK,ETCOEF) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION MIBODY(4),XP(*),TEMP(*),TSINK(*)

RETURN END



VD is the interpolated voltage of the body being contacted.

HD is the film coefficient.

q HD V VD–( )=


152

where:

Input:




XP(NCRD) are the coordinates of point where calculation is being made; it is updated to end of increment.















ETCOEF is the electrical transfer coefficient between surfaces in contact, such that the electrical flux per unit area that leaves the surface is




Required Output:

ETCOEF is the electrical transfer coefficient between surfaces in contact, such that the electrical flux per unit area that leaves the surface is:

Q = ETCOEF (TEMP(4) - TSINK(4))


■ UVTNRC

Definition of Electrical Near Contact Film Coefficient

Description

This subroutine allows the definition of variable electrical film coefficients of surfaces that are almost in contact with other surfaces in conjuction with the CONTACT option and the JOULE parameter. Its call is triggered by the UHTCON option.

The UVTNRC user subroutine is called at every element surface containing nodes that are on a body boundary that is almost in contact, and for each surface at the trapezoidal rule integration points (that is, the nodes). These calls are made every iteration both during the assembly phase and the recovery phase of the electrical pass of a coupled structural-Joule heating analysis.

A distributed electrical flux is being calculated according to the equation:

where:

By modifying ET, ETC and EDD, the user can model varying electrical transfer conditions along the boundary, which are dependent of the distance between the contacting surfaces.



VD is the interpolated voltage of the body being contacted.

ET is the electrical transfer coefficient between surfaces.

ETC is the upper bound in distance dependent electrical transfer coefficient.

EDD is the lower bound in distance dependent electrical transfer coefficient.

is the distance between the surfaces.

is the upper limit of the near contact distance.

q ET V VD–( ) ETC ETC EDD–( ) ddnear-------------–⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ V VD–( )+=

d

dnear


154

Format

User subroutine UVTNRC is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UVTNRC(MIBODY,XP,TEMP,IBODY,IOBODY,FN,TOTINC,

+ TIMINC,INC,NCRD,NDEG,TEMPO,ETCOEF,ETDD,ETC,D)

IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)

DIMENSION MIBODY(4),XP(*),TEMP(*),TEMPO(*)

RETURN

END

where:

Input:
















TEMPO(2) is the temperature of surface being contacted.

TEMPO(4) is the voltage of surface being contacted.

TEMPO(5) is the pressure of surface being contacted.

D is the distance between the surfaces.


Required Output:

ETCOEF is the electrical transfer coefficient between surfaces in contact.

ETDD is the lower bound of the distance dependent electrical transfer coefficient.

ETC is the upper bound of the distance dependent electrical transfer coefficient, such that the electrical flux per unit area that leaves the surface is

Q = ETCOEF (TEMP(4) - TEMPO(4)) +(ETC - (ETC - ETDD) * d/dnear) * (TEMP(4) - TEMPO(4))


156

■ UMDCOE

Definition of Environment Mass Diffusion Coefficient

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of variable mass diffusion coefficients and sink pressure on free surfaces, in conjunction with the CONTACT option and DIFFUSION or PYROLYSIS parameter. Its call is triggered by the UHTCOEF option.

The UMDCOE user subroutine is called at every element surface containing nodes that are on a free body boundary and for each surface at the trapezoidal rule integration points (that is, the nodes). These calls are made every iteration both during the assembly phase and the recovery phase of the mass diffusion pass of an analysis.

A distributed mass flux is being calculated according to the equation:

where:

By modifying H and PS, the user can model varying mass diffusion conditions along the boundary.

The user can either specify H and PS or specify the flux q directly which is treated strictly as such.

Format

User subroutine UMDCOE is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UMDCOE(MIBODY,XP,TEMP,IBODY,NF,XORD,XT,DXT,+PRSALL,PRSALO,TOTINC,TIMINC,INC,NCRD,NDEGS,NDEGH,NCRDMX,+NDEGMX,NBCD,NBCN,TSINK,PRCOEF,IFLAG)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

DIMENSION MIBODY(4),XP(1),NF(NBCN,1),XORD(NCRDMX,*),+XT(NDEGMX,*),DXT(NDEGMX,*),TMPALL(1),NBCD(1),PRSPALO(1),+TEMP(*),TSINK(*)

q is the mass flux entering the surface.

P is the surface pressure.

PS is the sink pressure.


q = H(P - PS)


user coding

RETURN END

where:





XP(NCRD) are the coordinates of point where calculation is being made, updated to end of increment.





NF(NBCN,1) are the nodal points that make the boundary of deformable surfaces declared in the CONTACT option.

NBCN is the upper bound to the number of nodes on a flexible surface boundary.

NBCD(1) is the array of actual number of boundary nodes on flexible surfaces.

XORD(1) is the array of original nodal point coordinates.

XT(1) is the array of nodal point displacements.

DXT(1) is the array of nodal displacement increments.

PRSALL(1) is the array of nodal pressure (current estimate at end of increment).

PRSALO(1) is the array of nodal pressure (at beginning of increment).




NCRD is the number of coordinates per node of this element.

NDEGS is the number of degrees of freedom per node for structural (stress) part of the analysis.

NDEGH is the number of heat transfer degrees of freedom.

NCRDMX is the maximum number of coordinate per node in this model.

NDEGMX is the maximum number of structural degrees of freedom per node in this model.

TSINK(2) is the sink temperature declared in contact option for this flexible surface.


158

TSINK(4) is the sink voltage declared in contact option for this flexible surface.

TSINK(5) is the sink pressure declared in contact option for this flexible surface.

IFLAG =0 PRCOEF is a heat transfer coefficient =1 PRCOEF is a flux.

PRCOEF is the mass diffusion coefficient between surface and environment, such that the mass flux per unit area that leaves the surface is:Q = PRCOEF (TEMP(5) - TSINK(5))orthe mass flux per unit area that leaves the surface.PRCOEF is to be defined here.


■ UMDCON

Definition of Contact Mass Diffusion Coefficient

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of variable mass diffusion coefficients of surfaces that are in contact with other surfaces in conjunction with the CONTACT option and DIFFUSION or PYROLYSIS parameter. Its call is triggered by the UHTCON option.

The UMDCON user subroutine is called at every element surface containing nodes that are on a body boundary that is in contact, and for each surface at the trapezoidal rule integration points (that is, the nodes). These calls are made every iteration both during the assembly phase and the stress recovery phase of the mass diffusion pass of an analysis.

A distributed mass flux is being calculated according to the equation:

where:

By modifying HPD, the user can model varying heat transfer conditions along the contact regions.

Format

User subroutine UMDCON is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UMDCON(MIBODY,XP,TEMP,IBODY,IOBODY,FN,TOTINC,TIMINC,+INC,NCRD,NDEG,TSINK,PC) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION MIBODY(4),XP(1),TEMP(*),TSINK(*)

user coding

RETURN END

q is the mass flux entering the surface.P is the surface pressure.PD is an interpolated pressure of the body being contactedPC is the film coefficient.

q = PC(P - PD)


160

where:





XP(NCRD) are the coordinates of point where calculation is being made, updated to end of increment.















PC is the heat transfer coefficient between surface in contact, such that the heat flux per unit area that leaves the surface is:Q = PC (P-PD)


■ UMDNRC

Definition of Mass Diffusion Coefficients between Surfaces almost in Contact

Description

The UMDNRC user subroutine allows the definition of the convection between surfaces that are nearly in contact. If the surfaces are not close to one another, the convective coefficients defined by the UMDCOE user subroutine will be used. If the surfaces are in contact, then the values from UHTCON will be used. The CONTACT option and UHTCON option must be included.

The UMDNRC user subroutine is called at every element surface containing nodes that are on the boundary that are also close to contact. These calls are made every iteration during both the assembly phase and the recovery phase of the mass diffusion pass of an analysis.

A distributed heat flux is being calculated according to the equation

where:

PRCOEF are provided by the user.

P2, P1 are the pressure on the contacted surface and contacting surface respectively.

is the normal distance between the current point and the closest surface.

is the distance at which bodies are considered to be near one another, defined by user in the CONTACT TABLE option.

Q PRCOEF * P2 P1–( ) PRDD * P2 P1–( )+=

PRDD PRC PRC PRDD–( ) * DN

DQNEAR---------------------------–=

DN

DQNEAR


162

Format

User subroutine UMDNRC is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UMDNRC(MIBODY,XP,TEMP,IBODY,IOBODY,FN,TOTINC,* TIMINC,INC,NCRD,NDEG,TEMPO,PRCOEF,PRDD,PRC,DN) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z) DIMENSION MIBODY(4),XP(*),TEMP(*),TEMPO(*)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:















TEMPO(2) is the temperature of surface being contacted.

TEMPO(4) is the voltage of surface being contacted.

TEMPO(5) is the pressure of surface being contacted.

DN is the distance to the contact surface.

Required Output:

PRCOEF is the mass diffusion coefficient between surfaces almost in contact

PRDD is the lower bound on the distance dependent mass diffusion coefficient

PRC is the upper bound on the distance dependent mass diffusion coefficient, usually equal to the contact mass diffusion coefficient


■ UNORST

Definition of Normal Stress, Flow Stress and Temperature at Contact Node

Description

With this user subroutine, The user can define the normal stress at each node in contact instead of using the extrapolated value from the integration points. It is only called for user-defined elements and is used in the calculation of Coulomb friction for contact analysis. The magnitude of the user-defined normal stress must be in the local system of the patch to which the nodal point is in contact with.

Format

User subroutine UNORST is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UNORST(STRINT,USTR,TRANS,NODE,IBODY,KCUS,

+ NDIE,NODCLS,LMM,NOD,M,N,TIMINC,NDIM,NDEG,NSTRMX,NNODE,INTEL)

IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

CDIMENSION STRINT(8,INTEL),USTR(NDIM,1)DIMENSION LMM(1),NODCLS(1),TRANS(3,3),KCUS(2)

user coding C C

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

STRINT (1-NSTRMX,INTEL) are the stresses at all integration points.

STRINT (NSTRMX+1,INTEL) is the temperature at all integration points.

STRINT (NSTRMX+2,INTEL) is the flow stress at all integration points.

USTR (2,NODE) is the current sliding velocity in the first local direction.

USTR(NSTRMX+1, NNODE) is the temperature at node.

USTR(NSTRMX+2, NNODE) is the flow stress at node.


164

USTR(NSTRMX+3, NNODE) is the previous sliding velocity 1.

USTR(NSTRMX+4, NNODE) is the previous sliding velocity 2.

USTR (2,NODE) is the current sliding velocity in the first local direction.

USTR (3,NODE) (in 3-D contact) current sliding velocity in the second local direction.

TRANS local transformation matrix at the node.

For 3-D contact:

TRANS(1-3,1) three components of local x-direction.

TRANS(1-3,2) three components of local y-direction.

TRANS(1-3,3) three components of local z-direction.

For 2-D contact:

TRANS(1,1) and TRANS(2,2)

is the directional cosine.

TRANS(1,2) -sine, TRANS(2,1) is the directional cosine.TRANS(3,3) = 1.

NODE is the current local node number belonging to the element face (it is neither a Marc internal node number nor an external user node number).

IBODY the element side or face number that the node belongs to.



NDIE is the die number that the current node touches.

NODCLS is the node array to indicate if the nodes on the IBODY are currently in contact. Zero value indicates no contact and nonzero value is the die number it currently touches.


LMM is the connectivity array for current element side or face (local node number).for 2-D contact it contains IBODY and IBODY+1 for 3-D contact it stores 1,2,3,4, for 3-D shell element:IBODY=1 it stores 1,2,3,4, and 9,10,11,12 if

20-node element.IBODY=2 it stores 6,5,8,7, and 13,14,15,16 if





20-node element.

NOD is the external user node number.

M is the element number.

N is the elsto buffer number.


NDIM is the NSTRMX+4 for 3-D contact.

NDIM is the NSTRMX+3 for 2-D contact.


NSTRMX is the maximum number of stress components.

NNODE is the maximum number of nodes per element.

INTEL is the number of integration points at which stresses are stored.

Required Output:

USTR (NSTRMX1,NODE) is the normal stress at current node.

USTR (NSTRMX+1,NODE) is the temperature at current node.

USTR (NSTRMX+2,NODE) is the flow stress at current node.


166

Example

SUBROUTINE UNORST(STRINT,USTR,TRANS,NODE,IBODY,KCUS,+ NDIE,NODCLS,LMM,NOD,M,N,TIMINC,NDIM,NDEG,NSTRMX,NNODE,

INTEL) INCLUDE ’../COMMON/IMPLICITDIMENSION STRNOD(NDIM,NNODE),STRINT(8,INTEL),USTR(NDIM,1)DIMENSION LMM(1),NODCLS(1),TRANS(3,3),KCUS(2)

RETURNEND


■ INITPL

Initialize Equivalent Plastic Strain Values

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to define initial values of equivalent plastic strain. It is often necessary to enter the amount of previously accumulated plastic strain. This initial value is only used in the work (strain) hardening calculation when not using table driven input format it is called in a loop over all the elements in the mesh when the INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN option appears in the model definition options with a two in the second field of the second data block of that option. When using the table driven input, it is called for those elements specified in the INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN model definition option, if a 7 is given in the second field of the second data block and the initial condition is activated by the LOADCASE model definition option.

Format

User subroutine INITPL is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE INITPL(SV,LAYERS,INTPTS,M) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION SV(LAYERS,INTPTS)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

LAYERS is the number of layers through the thickness if this is a shell element, or the number of points in the cross section if this is a beam element. It is 1 for a continuum element.

INTPTS is the number of integration points in this element. It is 1 if the CENTROID parameter is used.


Required Output:

SV is the array of equivalent plastic strains, to be defined here for this element by the user.


168

■ INITPO

Initialize Pore Pressure in an Uncoupled Fluid-Soil Analysis

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to prescribe the initial pore pressure in an uncoupled fluid-soil analysis. This user subroutine can only be used if an uncoupled analysis is chosen on the PORE parameter, and the user subroutine is activated using the INITIAL PORE model definition option.

Format

User subroutine INITPO is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE INITPO(POREP,INTPTS,M) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION POREP(INTPTS)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

INTPTS is the number of integration points associated with this element.


Required Output:

POREP is the array of pore pressures to be defined for this element.


■ NEWPO

Modify Pore Pressure in an Uncoupled Fluid-Soil Analysis

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to modify the pore pressure in an uncoupled fluid-soil analysis. This user subroutine can only be used if a coupled analysis is chosen on the PORE parameter, and the user subroutine is activated using the CHANGE PORE model definition option.

Format

User subroutine NEWPO is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE NEWPO(POREP,INTPTS,M) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION POREP(INTPTS)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

INTPTS is the number of integration points associated with this element.


Required Output:

POREP is the array of pore pressures to be defined for this element.


170

■ UREACB

Definition of Reactive Boundary Coefficients in an Acoustic Harmonic Analysis

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to redefine the reactive boundary coefficients as a function of the frequency in a harmonic acoustic analysis. This data is normally entered through the CONTACT (2-D) or (3-D) model definition option.

Format

User subroutine UREACB is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UREACB(OXK1,OC1,FREQC,IBODYT,IBODYR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Note that the complex admittance is defined as , with the

frequency in radians per time and the complex impedance.

Input:

FREQC is the frequency in cycles per time.

IBODYT is the number of the acoustic body.

IBODYR is the number of the boundary body.

Required Output:

OXK1 = 1./k1 where k1 is the coefficient of reactive boundary.

OC1 = 1./c1 where c1 is the coefficient reactive boundary.

1Z ω( )------------- 1

Z ω( )------------- 1

c1----- iω

k1------+= ω

Z ω( )


■ UCAV

Input of Volume-Dependant Pressure Load for Cavities

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to define the pressure load for internal cavities. It is called in every load increment of the analysis for every element in every cavity in the model, allowing flexibility in the specification of new relations for cavity pressure loads. This routine is only called if icavity-type = 9. See the DIST LOAD model definition or Cavity Pressure Loading in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.

Format

User subroutine UCAV is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UCAV(ICAV,INC,NCYCLE,M,IBODY,VOL,VOLP,AMBPRES,

& GAMGAS,RPRESS,RTEMP,RDENS,CMASS,CTEMP,

PRESS)


User coding

RETURN

END

Note: AMBPRES, GAMGAS, RPRESS, RTEMP, and RDENS are from the CAVITY model definition option.

where:

Input:

ICAV is the cavity id.


NCYCLE is the cycle number.


IBODY is the load type.

VOL is the cavity volume at the beginning of the increment.

VOLP is the cavity volume at beginning of previous increment.


172

AMBPRES is the ambient pressure.

GAMGAS is the Polytropic process exponent.

RPRESS is the gas reference pressure.

RTEMP is the gas reference temperature.

RDENS is the gas reference density.

CMASS is the gas mass at the beginning of the increment.

CTEMP is the gas temperature at the beginning of the increment.

PRESS is the cavity pressure as based upon input data.

Required Output:

PRESS is the total pressure to be applied in this increment.

Optional Output:

CMASS is the current gas mass (for post processing only).

CTEMP is the current gas temperature (for post processing only).


■ UOBJFN

Definition of Objective Function and its Gradient

Description

This user subroutine allows The user to define the objective function and its gradient for design optimization analysis using the current values of the design variables.

Format

User subroutine UOBJFN is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UOBJFN(OBJFN,DVVECT,GRADOF) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z) DIMENSION DVVECT(*),GRADOF(*)

User coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

DVVECT is the array of current values of design variables.

Required Output:

OBJFN is the objective function.

GRADOF is the gradient vector of the objective function with respect to the design variables.


174

Example

SUBROUTINE UOBJFN(OBJFN,DVVECT,GRADOF) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z) DIMENSION DVVECT(*),GRADOF(*)C OBJFN=2.5D00*DVVECT(1)+0.3D00*DVVECT(2)/DVVECT(3) GRADOF(1)=2.5D00 GRADOF(2)=0.3D00/DVVECT(3) GRADOF(3)=-0.3D00*DVVECT(2)/DVVECT(3)**2C RETURN END


■ UPRFILM

Input of Nonuniform Pressure Film Coefficients

Description

In diffusion or soil analysis, it is often necessary to include nonuniform pressure films. The UPRFILM user subroutine facilitates this. It is called at each time step for each integration point on each element surface given in the PRESS FILM model definition set, and allows the user to modify the pressure film coefficient and ambient temperature that is input through the data lines.

Format

User subroutine UPRFILM is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UPRFILM(UPFILM,PA,TS,N,TIME,INC) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z) DIMENSION TS(*),N(*)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

TS(1) estimated surface pressure at the end of increment.

TS(2) surface pressure at the beginning of increment.

TS(3) not used.

TS(4) integration point 1st coordinate.

TS(5) integration point 2nd coordinate.

TS(6) integration point 3rd coordinate.

This user subroutine is used when the table input format is used; otherwise, use the USPRNG user subroutine.


176

TS(7) first component of direction cosine of surface normal.

TS(8) second component of direction cosine of surface normal.

TS(9) third component of direction cosine of surface normal.

N(1) element number.

N(2) ibody number.

N(3) integration point number.

N(4) boundary condition id.

N(5) boundary condition id.

N(6) not used.

N(7) internal element number.

TIME time.


Required Output:

UPFILM pressure film coefficient.

PA Ambient pressure.


■ UFAH

Define Correction Factor for Convection Coefficient αH

Description

This subroutine allows the user to apply a correction factor to the convection coefficient. This routine is used in conjunction with the SURFACE ENERGY option.

The flux is calculated as ,

where:

Format

User subroutine UFAH is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UFAH(M,NN,ISFENID,INC,NCRD,COORD,TEMP,DTEMP,* TIME,DTIME,LINRIZE,KUPSTRM,ALPHAH0,ALPHAM0,BPRIMEC,* TRANSH,RHOCURI,FAHN,FAHN1) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,0-Z)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

is the heat transfer coefficient.

is the correction factor, entered here.

is the specific recovery of the external flow.

is the specific enthalpy of the external flow, calculated for the frozen chemical composition existing at the edge of the boundary layer, but evaluated at the surface temperature

Input:

M is the element ID.


ISFENID is the surface energy ID.

INC is the increment number

q αH fc Hrec He;TS

–⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞⋅=

αH

fc

Hrec

He;TS

Ts fe


178

NCRD is the number of coordinates

COORD is the integration point coordinates

TEMP is the temperature at beginning of increment

DTEMP is the increment of temperature

TIME is the time at the beginning of the increment

DTIME is the increment of time

LINRIZE is the flag to indicate linearization: 1 if linear, 2 if constant.if LINRIZE = 2, then BPRIMEC = TBPRIMECif LINRIZE = 1, then BPRIMEC = CBPRIMEC

KUPSTRM = 1 for upstream data (z < z_throat)= 2 for downstream data (z > z_throat)

ALPHAH0 is the convection coefficient (without correction)

ALPHAM0 is the diffusion coefficient (without correction)

BPRIMEC is the mass flow rate of solid due to ablation by gases

TRANSH is the transpiration factor for alphaH (convection)transh=0.5 for laminar flowtransh=0.4 for turbulent flow

RHOCURI is the mass density at the current point

FAHN is the correction factor of alphaH - at beginning of increment

Required Output:

FAHN1 is the correction factor of alphaH - at end of increment


■ UFLUXMEC

Determine the Rate of Ablation due to Mechanical Erosion from Sources other than Particle Impact

Description

This subroutine allows the user to add an additional term to the rate of recession which is not due to particle impact. This allows recession to occur based upon phenomena which cannot be readily expressed. This option is used in conjunction with the ABLATION parameter and the RECEDING SURFACE option.

Format

User subroutine UFLUXMEC is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UFLUXMEC(M,NN,IREG,ISFENID,INC,NCRD,COORD,TEMP,* DTEMP,TIME,DTIME,FLUXMEC) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

M is the element ID.NN is the integration point number.IREG is the receding surface input ID.ISFENID is the surface energy ID.INC is the increment number.NCRD is the number of coordinates.COORD is the integration point coordinates.TEMP is the temperature at beginning of increment.DTEMP is the increment of temperature.TIME is the time at the beginning of the increment.DTIME is the increment of time.

Required Output:

FLUXMEC is the rate of recession due to mechanical erosion


180

■ UFTHP

Define Empirical Correction for the Effect of Surface Temperature

Description

This option allows the user to include a correction effect when calculating the flux due to ablation by liquid particles.

is defined in this routine.

For each family of liquid particles:

surface mass flow rate of particles for the ’j’ family .

empirical law for thermochemical ablation by impacting particles (without unit).

specific enthalpy of reaction for the interaction between the surface material and the

’j’ family of particles .

empirical correction for the effect of surface temperature (without unit).

This UFTHP subroutine is used in conjunction with the SURFACE ENERGY option.

q fth p, Σ Gth p j, , Vp j, , Dp j, , αp t,( ) m· p j, ΔHr p j, ,⋅ ⋅⋅=

fth p,

m· p j, m· p j, x t,( )=

k gm2–s

1( )[ ]( )

Gth p j, , Gth p j, , Vp j, x t,( ) , Dp j, , αp j, x t,( ) , ...( )=

ΔHr p j, , ΔHr p j, , Ts j,( )=

Jkg1–[ ]( )

fth p, fth p, Ts( )=


Format

User subroutine UFTHP is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UFTHP(M,NN,ISFENID,INC,NCRD,COORD,TEMP,DTEMP,* TIME,DTIME,TEMP1,TEMP2,FTHP) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:






COORD is the integration point coordinates.

TEMP is the temperature at beginning of increment.

DTEMP is the increment of temperature.


DTIME is the increment of time.

TEMP1 is the first temperature for empirical correction for thermochemical ablation by impacting particles.

TEMP2 is the second temperature for empirical correction for thermochemical ablation by impacting particles.

Required Output:

FTHP is the correction factor for thermochemical ablation by impacting particles.


182

■ UGLAW

Determine the Empirical Correlation G for Flux Calculation

Description

This subroutine allows the user to define the correlation factor between the liquid particle velocity, diameter, and angle of incidence with the resultant flux due to the thermochemical ablation by liquid particles. This subroutine is used in conjunction with the SURFACE ENERGY option. See also UFTHP.

Format

User subroutine UGLAW is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UGLAW(ILP,M,NN,ISFENID,INC,NCRD,COORD,TEMP,* DTEMP,TIME,DTIME,TVLP,TDIAMLP,TANGLP,TGLP) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

ILP is the liquid particle family ID.

M is the element id.










TVLP is the velocity of liquid particles.

TDIAMLP is the diameter of liquid particles


TANGLP is the angle of impact of liquid particles

Required Output:

TGLP correlation factor between momentum of particles and flux


184

■ UTIMP

Define Thermal Effects of Particle Impact

Description

This routine allows the user to define an additional flux due to impacting particles. This option is used in conjunction with the SURFACE ENERGY option.

Format

User subroutine UTIMP is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UTIMP(NLP,M,NN,ISFENID,INC,NCRD,COORD,TEMP,* DTEMP,TIME,DTIME,LINRIZE,MDOTLP,IDMDOTLP,VLP,IDVLP,* DIAMLP,IDDIAMLP,ANGLP,IDANGLP,FLUXIMP,AMSTHP) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z) REAL*8 MDOTLP(*) DIMENSION IDMDOTLP(*),VLP(NCRD,*),IDVLP(NCRD,*),ANGLP(*),* IDANGLP(*),DIAMLP(*), IDDIAMLP(*)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

NLP is the number of liquid particle families.











LINRIZE is the flag to indicate linearization: 1 if linear, 2 if constant.


MDOTLP is the rate of change of mass of liquid particles.

IDMDOTLP is the table ID for rate of change of mass of liquid particles.

VLP is the velocity of liquid particles.

IDVLP is the table ID for velocity of liquid particles.

DIAMLP is the diameter of liquid particles.

IDDIAMLP is the table ID for diameter of liquid particles.

ANGLP is the angle of impact of liquid particles.

IDANGLP is the table ID for angle of impact of liquid particles.

Required Output:

FLUXIMP is the flux added due to thermal effects of impacting particles.

AMSTHP is the mass flow rate of the surface material ablated by impacting particles.


186

■ UFMEC

Define Empirical Correction Factor for Mechanical Erosion by Particles

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to include a correction factor when calculating the recession rate by liquid particles.

is defined in this subroutine.

may be defined in the UGMEC user subroutine.

This subroutine is used in conjunction with the ABLATION parameter and the RECEDING SURFACE option.

Format

User subroutine UFMEC is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UFMEC(M,NN,IREG,ISFENID,INC,NCRD,COORD,TEMP,* DTEMP,TIME,DTIME,TEMP1,TEMP2,FMEC) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:



IREG is the receding surface input ID.




r· fm p, ΣGm p j, , Vp j, Dp j, αp j,, ,( ) m· p j,⋅⋅=

fm p,

Gm p j, ,







TEMP1 is the first temperature for empirical model A.

TEMP2 is the second temperature for empirical model A.

Required Output:

FMEC is the factor correction for erosion by impacting particles.


188

■ UGMEC

Determine the Empirical Correlation G for Recession Calculation

Description

This subroutine allows the user to define the correlation factor between the liquid particle velocity, diameter and angle of incidence with the rate of recession. This subroutine is used in conjunction with the ABLATION parameter and the RECEDING SURFACE option. Also see the UFMEC user subroutine

Format

User subroutine UGMEC is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UGMEC(ILP,M,NN,IREG,ISFENID,INC,NCRD,COORD,* TEMP,DTEMP,TIME,DTIME,LINRIZE,VLP,IDVLP,DIAMLP,IDDIAMLP,* ANGLP,IDANGLP,TGMEC) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

ILP is the liquid particle family ID.













LINRIZE is the flag to indicate linearization: 1 if linear, 2 if constant.

VLP is the velocity of liquid particles.

IDVLP is the table ID for velocity of liquid particles.

DIAMLP is the diameter of liquid particles

IDDIAMLP is the table ID for diameter of liquid particles.

ANGLP is the angle of impact of liquid particles.

IDANGLP is the table ID for angle of impact of liquid particles.

Required Output:

TGMEC is the correlation factor between momentum of particles and flux.


190

■ UABLATE

Definition of Surface Recession Rate

Description

This subroutine allows the user to define the surface recession rate. This user routine is only active if it is requested through the RECEDING SURFACE option.

Format

User subroutine UABLATE is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UABLATE(M,N,NN,IREG,INC,TEMP,DTEMP,AMDOTP,ARCL,*CPTIM,TIMINC,XORD,NCRD,RHOCURI,RECRATE) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION ARCL(2), XORD(NCRD)

user coding

RETURN END

where

Input:

If recession calculated at surface integration points, see the ABLATION parameter


N is the elsto number.

NN is the surface integration point number.

If recession calculated at surface nodal points, see the ABLATION parameter

M is the internal node number.

N is the user node number.

NN is not used = 0.



TEMP is the temperature at the beginning of the increment.

DTEMP is the incremental temperature.

AMDOTP is the mass flow rate if pyrolysis calculation.

ARCL(1) is the arc length.


ARCL(2) is the normalized arc length.

CPTIM is the time at the beginning of the increment.


XORD is the integration point coordinate.


RHOCURI is the effective material density.

Required Output:

RECRATE is the recession rate.


192

■ UABLTNORM

Definition of Direction of Recession

Description

This subroutine allows the user to redefine the direction of recession/ablation. The default direction is prescribed by the ABLATION parameter. This routine is often used at the corners of the model to give the user additional control.

Format

User subroutine UABLTNORM is written with the following header: SUBROUTINE UABLTNORM(N,UNORM,NCRD) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION UNORM(NCRD)

user coding

RETURN END

where

Input:

N is the user node number.

NCRD is the number of directions (2 or 3).

Required Output:

UNORM is the normal - enters as Marc defined normal may be redefined by user.This is the direction of the recession that is pointing into the material.


■ UWEAR

Define the Rate of Mechanical Wear on a Surface

Description

This user subroutine is used to control the amount of mechanical wear that occurs at a surface as an alternative to the Archard model. The wear may be used as an indicator to determine the failure of the part or may be applied to the nodal coordinates of the surface nodes. This capability is activated through the RECEDING SURFACE option.

Format

User subroutine UWEAR is written with the following header:SUBROUTINE UWEAR(WRND,N,NUSER,IREG,MATS,INC,

* TIME,TIMINC,COORD,I2OR3,DIRCOS,COFORND,FRFORND,

* COSTRS,FRSTRS,IDIERE,WEARCF,TEMPI,RELVELND,ET,YD,

* COEF)INTEGER N,NUSER,IREG,MATS,INC,I2OR3,IDIERE

REAL*8 WRND,TIME,TIMINC,COORD,DIRCOS,COFORND,

* FRFORND,COSTRS,FRSTRS,WEARCF,TEMPI,RELVELND,

* ET,YD,COEF

DIMENSION DIRCOS(I2OR3)

user coding

RETURN END

where

Input:

N is the internal node id.

NUSER is the user node id.

IREG is the recession id.

MATS is the material id.


TIME is the time at begining of increment.


194

TIMINC is the incremental time.

COORD is the coordinate position of the node.

I2OR3 is 2 or 3 based upon dimension.

DIRCOS is the direction cosine of the surface at this point.

COFORND is the contact force.

FRFORND is the friction force.

COSTRS is the contact stress.

FRSTRS is the friction stress.

IDIERE is the body number to which this node belongs.

WEARCF is the wear coefficient including any table effects.

TEMPI is the temperature.

RELVELND is the relative velocity at the node.

ET is the Young's modulus.

YD is the yield stress including temperature effects;note this is not current flow stress, no plasticity is included.

COEF is the coefficient of friction.

Required Output:

WRND is the rate of wear (wear divided by time).

Chapter 3 User-defined Anisotropy and Constitutive Relations User Subroutines List


ANELAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205ANEXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230ANKOND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232ANPLAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

CRPLAW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

GAPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310GENSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

HOOKLW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218HYPELA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

ORIENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

3 User-defined Anisotropy and Constitutive Relations User Subroutines List


196


TENSOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

UACOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323UARRBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320UBEAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301UCOHESIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304UCOKSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328UCOMPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308UCRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261UCRPLW (Viscoplastic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244UCURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240UDAMAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273UELASTOMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294UELDAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283UENERG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279UEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234UFAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223UFINITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291UGASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312UGENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321UGRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271UMOONY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278UMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235UNEWTN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317UOGDEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281UPERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277UPHI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306UPOWDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275UPROGFAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225UPYROLEFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332UPYROLSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326URPFLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318USELEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313USHRET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265USHRINKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242USIGMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237USPCHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

197CHAPTER 3User-defined Anisotropy and Constitutive Relations User Subroutines List


USPCHTAB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335USPRNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257USSUBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324UVOID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266UVOIDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267UVOIDRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269UWATERSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

VSWELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

WKSLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254


198

Chapter 3 User-defined Anisotropy and Constitutive Relations User Subroutines

3 User-defined Anisotropy and Constitutive Relations User Subroutines


200

This chapter describes the user subroutines available to allow you to provide material data to standard Marc constitutive relations, or for the user to create his own model. The routines in this chapter cover the spectrum of anisotropic elasticity and plasticity, creep, plasticity, rate independent nonlinear elasticity, cracking, electrical, and magnetic materials among others. These routines are, in general, called for each integration point for each element they have been invoked. This provides a powerful method to provide nonhomogeneous, nonlinear material behavior. Table 3-1 summarizes these routines and indicates what parameters or model definition options are required to invoke the user subroutine.

201CHAPTER 3User-defined Anisotropy and Constitutive Relations User Subroutines

Table 3-1 User-defined Anisotropy and Constitutive Relations User Subroutine Requirements

User Subroutine

Required Parameters or Model Definition Options

Purpose

ANELAS ORTHOTROPIC orANISOTROPIC

Definition of factors to scale elastic stress strain law.

ANEXP ORTHOTROPIC orANISOTROPIC

Definition of thermal strain increment.

ANKOND ORTHOTROPIC orANISOTROPIC

Definition of thermal conductivity or electrical resistance in Joule heating.

ANPLAS ORTHOTROPIC orANISOTROPIC

Definition of parameters for Hill yield criteria

CRPLAW CREEP Definition of function to describe creep strain rate.

GAPU GAP DATA Definition of contact gap closure distance

GENSTR SHELL SECT Definition of generalized stress-strain law for shells.

HOOKLW ORTHOTROPIC orANISOTROPIC

Definition of elastic stress-strain or compliance relation.

HYPELA2 HYPOELASTIC Definition of nonlinear stress-strain relationship.

ORIENT ORIENTATION Definition of preferred material orientation for orthotropic or anisotropic behavior.

TENSOF ISOTROPICCRACK DATA

Definition of tension softening modulus.

UACOUS ACOUSTICCONTACT (2-D)CONTACT (3-D)

Definition of material properties for an acoustic medium.

UARRBO ARRUDBOYCE Definition of constants in strain energy function.

UBEAM HYPOELASTIC Definition of nonlinear generalized stress-strain law for element types 52 or 98.

UCOHESIVE COHESIVE Definition of material behavior for interface modeling using element types 186, 188, 190 or 192.

UCOKSL PYROLYSISTHERMO-PORE

Definition of mass fraction of carbon in pyrolysis gas

UCOMPL HARMONIC Definition of stress-strain rate relationship for harmonic analysis.

UCRACK ISOTROPICCRACK DATA

Definition of ultimate stress for cracking analysis.

UCRPLW CREEP Definition of complex relationships for the factors in the power law expression for the creep strain rate.


202

UCURE CURINGCURE RATE

Definition of the cure kinetics models and calculation of the degree of cure.

UDAMAG DAMAGE Definition of the Kachanov damage factor to be applied to the material properties

UELASTOMER LARGE STRAINFOAM orMOONEY orARRUDBOYCE orGENT orOGDEN

Allows definition of the user’s own hyperelastic models.

UELDAM OGDENDAMAGE

Definition of damage parameters for Ogden rubber model.

UENERG MOONEY Definition of strain energy function.

UEPS ELECTRO orEL-MAORTHOTROPIC

Definition of anisotropic electrical permittivity.

UFAIL FAIL DATA Definition of composite failure criteria.

UPROGFAIL Definition of the stiffness reduction factors for a progressive failure analysis

UFINITE LARGE STRAIN Definition of finite deformation isotropic material models.

UGASKET GASKET Definition of initial gasket gap distance.

UGENT ARRUDBOYCE Definition of constants in strain energy function.

UGRAIN GRAIN SIZE Definition of typical grain size calculation based upon the state of material

UMOONY MOONEY Definition of temperature dependent Mooney-Rivlin constants.

UMU MAGNETO orEL-MAORTHOTROPIC

Definition of anisotropic magnetic permeability.

UNEWTN R-P FLOW orFLUID

Definition of material viscosity.

UOGDEN OGDEN Definition of Ogden material parameters.

UPERM PORE Definition of soil permeability.


User Subroutine


Purpose


UPHI HARMONICMOONEYPHI-COEFFICIENTS

Definition of phi coefficients for rubber-viscoelastic harmonic analysis.

UPOWDR POWDER Definition of powder material data.

UPYROLEFF THERMO-PORE Definition of effective conductivity.

UPYROLSL THERMO-PORE Definition of the rate of decomposition along a streamline.

URPFLO R-P FLOW Definition of yield surface for rigid plastic flow.

USELEM USER Definition of consistent nodal loads, mass matrix, stiffness matrix, and residuals for user-defined element.

USHRET ISOTROPICCRACK DATA

Definition of shear retention factor for elements that have cracks.

USHRINKAGE CURINGCURE RATECURE SHRINKAGE

Definition of the volumetric cure shrinkage models and calculates the degree of cure shrinkage, the volumetric cure shrinkage strain, and the directional Cure Shrinkage Coefficient matrix (CSC)

USIGMA EL-MA Definition of anisotropic electrical conductivity.

USPCHT HEAT orCOUPLE orFLUID

Definition of specific heat.

USPCHTAB THERMO-PORE Definition of specific heat for simplified pyrolysis model.

USPRNG SPRINGS orFOUNDATION

Definition of nonlinear spring or foundation stiffness.

USSUBS SUPERSUPERINPUT

Definition of superelements not generated by Marc.

UWATERSL THERMO-PORE Definition of rate of water evaporation.

UVOID DAMAGE Definition of initial void fraction for Gurson damage model.

UVOIDN DAMAGE Definition of void nucleation for Gurson damage model.

UVOIDRT TABLEINITIAL VOID RATIOINITIAL POROSITY

Definition of the Initial Void Ratio or Initial Porosity

VSWELL CREEP Definition of volumetric swelling.


User Subroutine


Purpose


204

WKSLP ISOTROPIC orORTHOTROPIC orANISOTROPICWORK HARD

Definition of work hardening or strain hardening data.


User Subroutine


Purpose


■ ANELAS

Elastic Anisotropy

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to define the anisotropic elastic law. In the most generally allowed case, the isothermal stress-strain law in the preferred orientation is:

The arrangement of the {σ},{ε} vectors is defined for each element type in Marc Volume B: Element Library. Dij are the incremental elastic stress-strain relation calculated by Marc based on material data given through input data. The rij are supplied by the user in the ANELAS user subroutine. It is often easier to directly specify the stress-strain for compliance relationship in the HOOKLW user subroutine.

This routine is only available for the additive elastic-plastic formulation or small strain incompressible elasticity. It is not available for the FeFp formulation.

σ11

σ22

σ33

τ12

τ23

τ31⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

r11 D11 r12 D12 r13 D13 0 0 0

r22 D22 r23 D23 0 0 0

r33 D33 0 0 0

r44 D44 0 0

r55 D55 0

r66 D66

ε11

ε22

ε33

γ12

γ23

γ31⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

=Symmetric


206

Format

User subroutine ANELAS is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE ANELAS (N,NN,KCUS,R,IRDIM,NDI,NSHEAR,MATUS,DT,+DTDL,D,RPROPS,IPROPS) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION R (IRDIM,IRDIM),DT(1),DTDL(1),D(IRDIM,IRDIM),+N(2),RPROPS(1),IPROPS(1),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

N(1) is your element number.


NN is integration point number.



IRDIM is the dimension of the R array for the current element.

NDI is the number of direct components.

NSHEAR is the number of shear components.

MATUS(1) is the user material id.

MATUS(2) is the internal material id.

DT is the array of state variables.

DTDL is the array of increments of state variables.

D is the stress-strain law as calculated by Marc using input data. To modify this matrix directly, use user subroutine HOOKLW instead of ANELAS.

RPROPS is the array of real properties, see introduction.

IPROPS is the array of integer properties, see introduction.

Required Output:

R is the r to be defined by you; the number of allowable r being given in Table 3-2.


Table 3-2 Allowable Anisotropy

Library ElementNumber

Allowable Transformations to Preferred Operation

Size of R. Matrix(IRDIM) forIRDIM=1 No Anisotropy

Possible

Number of Direct Stresses

(NDI)

Number of Shear

Stresses (NSHEAR)

1 None 1 2 1

2 Orthogonal in z-r plane 4 3 1

3 Orthogonal in x-y plane 3 2 1

4 Any in θ1 - θ2 surface 3 2 1

5 None 1 1 0


7 Orthogonal in (x,y,z) space 6 3 3


9 None 1 1 0



12 None 1 0 0

13 None 1 1 0

14 None 1 1 1

15 None 1 2 0

16 None 1 1 0

17 None 1 2 0

18 Any in surface 3 2 1





23 None 1 1 0


208


25 None 1 1 1






31 Not available — — —





36, 37, 38,39, 40, 41,42, 43, 44

Use the ANKOND user subroutine to supply anisotropic conductivity

— — —

45 None 1 1 1

46, 47, 48 None — — —

49 Any in V1 - V2 3 2 1

50 Use the ANKOND user subroutine to supply anisotropic conductivity

— — —

51 None 1 1 0

52 None 1 1 0



Table 3-2 Allowable Anisotropy (continued)




Possible


(NDI)

Number of Shear

Stresses (NSHEAR)











64 None 1 1 0

65 None 1 0 0



68 None 1 0 1


— — —


— — —


— — —

72 Orthogonal in V1 - V2 3 2 1







Possible


(NDI)

Number of Shear

Stresses (NSHEAR)


210

75 Orthogonal in V1 - V2 5 2 3

76 None 1 1 1

77 None 1 1 0

78 None 1 1 1

79 None 1 1 0







— — —


— — —


— — —


— — —

89 None 1 2 1

90 None 1 2 3








Possible


(NDI)

Number of Shear

Stresses (NSHEAR)





97 None 1 0 0

98 None 1 1 2

99 None — — —

100 None — — —


— — —


— — —


— — —


— — —


— — —


— — —


108 Orthogonal in (x, y, z) space 6 3 3

109 Use the UMU user subroutine — — —





Possible


(NDI)

Number of Shear

Stresses (NSHEAR)


212


111 Use the UEPS, UMU, USIGMA user subroutines

— — —


— — —


— — —




117 Orthogonal in x,y,z space 6 3 3




121 Use the ANKOND user subroutine

— — —


— — —


— — —











Possible


(NDI)

Number of Shear

Stresses (NSHEAR)


130 Orthogonal in x,y,z, space 6 3 3


— — —


— — —


— — —



— — —

138 Orthogonal in V1-V2 3 2 1



141 None — 1 0

142 None — 1 0

143 None — 1 0

144 None — 1 0

145 None — 1 0

146 None — 1 0

147 None — 1 0

148 None — 1 0









Possible


(NDI)

Number of Shear

Stresses (NSHEAR)


214






158 None — — —

159 None — — —




163 Orthogonal in x-y-z space 6 3 3

164 Orthogonal in x-y-z space 6 3 3

165 None 1 1 0

166 None 1 1 0

167 None 1 1 0

168 None 1 1 0

169 None 1 1 0

170 None 1 1 0

171 None 1 0 0

172 None 1 0 0

173 None 1 0 0

174 None 1 0 0


— — —





Possible


(NDI)

Number of Shear

Stresses (NSHEAR)



— — —


— — —


— — —


— — —


— — —



183 None — — —

184 Orthogonal in x-y-z plane 6 3 3

185 Orthogonal in x-y-z plane 6 3 3

186 Use the UCOHESIVE user subroutine

2 1 1


2 1 1


3 1 2


3 1 2


2 1 1


2 1 1





Possible


(NDI)

Number of Shear

Stresses (NSHEAR)


216

All parameters except the R array are defined by Marc. R must be defined by the user in this user subroutine.


3 1 2


3 1 2

194 None — — —

195 None — — —


— — —


— — —


— — —


— — —



202 Orthogonal in x, y, z space 6 3 3


— — —








Possible


(NDI)

Number of Shear

Stresses (NSHEAR)


Note that the R and D matrices have the dimension appropriate for the number of stress components associated with the particular element (see Table 3-2). Thus, for example, in elements 3 or 18, the R matrix would be of size 3 by 3, and the stress strain law would take the form:

To define an anisotropic stress-strain relation for the Herrmann incompressible elements in Marc, the ANELAS user subroutine is used in a slightly different manner. The compliance strain-stress relation is given directly in the fourth argument R and is not used in the last argument D. For example, in the most generally allowed case, the compliance relation in the preferred orientation is:

Note: This user subroutine should not be used if you desire that the material constants should be design variables. Use the ORTHOTROPIC option instead.

σ1

σ2

σ12⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

r11 D11 r12 D12 0

r22 D22 0

r33 D33

ε11

ε22

γ12⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

=

Symmetric

ε11

ε22

ε33

γ12

γ23

γ31⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

R11 R12 R13 0 0 0

R22 R23 0 0 0

R33 0 0 0

R44 0 0

R55 0

R66

σ11

σ22

σ33

τ12

τ23

τ31⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

=


218

■ HOOKLW

Anisotropic Elastic Law

Description

The HOOKLW user subroutine is an alternative mechanism to the ANELAS user subroutine. In this user subroutine, the elastic stress-strain law is supplied by the user. A maximum of 21 terms are necessary for a three-dimensional body. This law is given in terms of the coordinate system defined in the ORIENTATION option. The user should insure that the stress-strain law is symmetric. Note that this user subroutine is called for each integration point of those elements that have anisotropic properties. The user can define either the stress-strain relation or the compliance strain-stress relation. The returned value of argument IMOD must be set accordingly. For example, if IMOD=1, the stress-strain law is given and the user returns to the array B such that:

The arrangement of {s}, {ε} vectors are defined for each element type in Marc Volume B: Element Library.

This routine is only available for the additive elastic-plastic formulation or small

strain incompressible elasticity. It is not available for the FeFp formulation.

σ11

σ22

σ33

τ12

τ23

τ31⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16

B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26

B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 B36

B41 B42 B43 B44 B45 B46

B51 B52 B53 B54 B55 B56

B61 B62 B63 B64 B65 B66

ε11

ε22

ε33

γ12

γ23

γ31⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

=


Format

User subroutine HOOKLW is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE HOOKLW(M,NN,KCUS,B,NGENS,DT,DTDL,E,PR,NDI,+NSHEAR,IMOD,RPROPS,IPROPS) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION B(NGENS,NGENS),DT(1),DTDL(1),RPROPS(1),IPROPS(1),+M(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

M(1) is the user element number.

M(2) is the internal element number.




NGENS is the number of stresses and strain components.

DT is the state variables at the beginning of the increment (temperature first).

DTDL is the increment of state variables.

E is the Young’s modulus including temperature effects.

PR is the Poisson’s ratio including temperature effects.

NDI number of direct components of stress.

NSHEAR number of shear components of stress.

RPROPS array of real properties; see Chapter 1 Introduction.

IPROPS array of integer properties; see Chapter 1 Introduction.

Required Output:

B is the user-defined stress-strain law if IMOD=1; or the user-defined compliance relation if IMOD=2 to be defined here.

IMOD Set to 0 if the ANELAS user subroutine is used.Set to 1 to indicate that the stress-strain law has been given. Set to 2 to indicate that the compliance strain-stress, relation has been given.


220

Note that for temperature dependent properties, this user subroutine is called twice for each integration point. The first time to evaluate the stress-strain law at the beginning of the increment; the second time at the end of the increment.

Note: This user subroutine should not be used if the user desires that the material constants should be design variables. Use the ORTHOTROPIC option instead.


■ ANPLAS

Anisotropic Yield Surface and Creep Potential

Description

The anisotropic yield function and stress potential are assumed as:

(R. Hill - Mathematical Theory of Plasticity, Oxford, 1950)

where: is the equivalent tensile yield stress for isotropic behavior:

and, for Mohr-Coulomb behavior: ;

The user defines ratios of actual to isotropic yield (in the preferred orientation) in the array YRDIR for direct tension yielding, and YRSHR for yield in shear (ratio of

actual shear yield to = isotropic shear yield). Then the a1 above are derived as (Hill):

a1 σy σz–( )2a2 σz σx–( )2

a3 σx σy–( )23a4τyz

2 3a6τxy2+ +++ 2σ

2=

σ σ σ εP T,( )=

σ σ J1( )= J1

σx σy σz+ +

3---------------------------------=

σ 3⁄

a11

YRDIR 2( )2------------------------------- 1

YRDIR 3( )2------------------------------- 1

YRDIR 2( )2-------------------------------–+=

a21

YRDIR 3( )2------------------------------- 1

YRDIR 1( )2------------------------------- 1

YRDIR 2( )2-------------------------------–+=

a31

YRDIR 1( )2------------------------------- 1

YRDIR 2( )2-------------------------------

YRDIR 3( )2-------------------------------–+=

a42

YRSHR 3( )2---------------------------------=

a52

YRSHR 2( )2---------------------------------=

a62

YRSHR 1( )2---------------------------------=


222

Note that YRDIR and YRSHR should be given in the order appropriate for the element (see Library Element description).

On the output, the von Mises intensity is not affected by these material parameters.

Format

User subroutine ANPLAS is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE ANPLAS(N,NN,KCUS,NDI,NSHEAR,MATUS,YRDIR,YRSHR)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION YRDIR (1),YRSHR(1),N(2),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

All parameters except YRDIR and YRSHR are defined by Marc. YRDIR and YRSHR are defined by the user in this user subroutine.

Input:






NDI is the number of direct stresses.

NSHEAR is the number of shear stresses.


MATUS(2) is the internal material id

Required Output:

YRDIR is the array of tensile yield ratios to be defined here.

YRSHR is the array of shear yield ratios to be defined here.


■ UFAIL

User-defined Failure Criterion

Description

The UFAIL user subroutine is provided to allow the user to calculate his own scalar failure criterion. To call the UFAIL user subroutine, the user must specify failure criterion type UFAIL in the FAIL DATA model definition option. UFAIL is then called for every integration point associated with the material id specified in the FAIL DATA option.

This routine may be used with all elastic-plastic materials. Progressive cracking is only available with the additive elastic-plastic model.

Format

User subroutine UFAIL is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UFAIL (N,NN,KCUS,MATUS,1 STRESS,STRAIN,NDI,NSHEAR,FAILCR) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION STRESS(1),STRAIN(1),N(2),MATUS(2),KCUS(2),FAILCR(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:






MATUS(1) is the user material identifier.

MATUS(2) is the internal material identifier.

STRESS is the current total stress state.

STRAIN is the current total strain.



224

NSHEAR is the number of shear stresses.

Required Output:

FAILCR (1) is user-defined failure criteria.

FAILCR (2) is user-defined strength ratio (allowable stress/actual stress)


■ UPROGFAIL

Definition of Material Stiffness Reduction Factors for Progressive Failure Analysis

C-44 Description

This user subroutine allows users to define the stiffness reduction factors for a progressive failure analysis.

The routine is called for an element integration point whenever failure occurs. The failure criteria can be defined on the FAIL DATA option, or via the UFAIL user subroutine.

Format

User subroutine UPROGFAIL is written with the following header lines:SUBROUTINE UPROGFAIL(NELEM,NINT,KCUS,MATUS,STRESS,STRAIN,

& ICRIT,FI,REDFAC0,REDFAC,IDEACT,DT,DTDL,& TIME,TIMEINC)

IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H, O-Z)REAL*8 FI,REDFAC0,REDFAC,TIME,TIMEINCINTEGER KCUS, MATUS, N, NELEM, NINT, ICRIT,IDEACTREAL*8 STRAIN, STRESS,DT,DTDLDIMENSION STRESS(*),STRAIN(*),N(2),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)DIMENSION FI(*),REDFAC0(6),REDFAC(6),DT(*),DTDL(*)

USER CODING RETURN END

where:

Input:

NELEM is the user element number

NINT is the integration point number

KCUS is the layer numberkcus(1) – user layer numberkcus(2) – internal layer number


226

The six components of redfac will be used for scaling the material moduli of an orthotropic material according to

MATUS is the material idmatus(1) – user material idmatus(2) – internal material id

STRESS is the current total stresses in preferred system,in full tensor format ( , , , , , )

STRAIN is the current total strains in preferred system,in full tensor format ( , , , , , )

ICRIT is the current failure criterion:1 – maximum stress2 – maximum strain3 – Tsai-Wu4 – Hoffman5 – Hill6 – not used7 – user8 – Hashin9 – Hashin Fabric

10 – not used11 – not used12 – Hashin Tape13 – puck

FI is the array of current failure indices

REDFAC0 is the array of current reduction factors

REDFAC is the array of reduction factors to be updated.upon entry it contains the values calculated by the program.

IDEACT is the deactivation flag. Set to 1 to flag that the element should be deactivated. If all integration points of the element have this flag set, it is deactivated at the end of the current increment. Upon entry, it contains the value calculated by the program.

DT is the array of state variables at the beginning of the current increment; dt(1) is the temperature

DTDL is the array of increment of state variables;dtdl(1) is the incremental temperature.

TIME is the time at the beginning of the current increment

TIMEINC is the time increment

σ11 σ22 σ33 σ12 σ23 σ13

ε11 ε22 ε33 ε12 ε23 ε13

E11new redfac 1( ) E11

orig×=


The Poisson’s ratios are scaled the same way as the corresponding shear modulus.

For an isotropic material, the Young’s modulus is scaled with the smallest of the components of redfac and the shear modulus is calculated using the updated Young’s modulus and the Poisson’s ratio.

The case of general anisotropy is not supported.


orig×=


orig×=

G12new redfac 4( ) G12

orig×=


orig×=


orig×=


228

■ ORIENT

Specification of Preferred Orientation

Description

The ORIENT user subroutine is used to supply a preferred orientation so that ANELAS, HOOKLW, ANKOND, and ANPLAS can supply anisotropic material constants in this orientation. This user subroutine can be activated by anisotropic material definition options, and/or the ORIENTATION option and/or the HYPOELASTIC option.

Format

User subroutine ORIENT is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE ORIENT (N,NN,KCUS,G)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION G(3,3),N(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

N(1) is the user element number.N(2) is the internal element number.NN is the integration point number.KCUS(1) is your layer number (always 1 for continuum elements).KCUS(2) is the internal layer number (always 1 for continuum element).Required Output:G is the transformation matrix to be defined here.


All parameters except G are passed in by Marc – the user must supply the G matrix. G is the transformation to the preferred orientation from the usual Marc orientation:

where:

For curvilinear systems (for example, element types 4, 8, and 24), G is defined by

G(I,J) = . For planar transformations, G(3,I) = G(I,3) = 0; G(3,3) = 1.0; I = 1,2

must be given.

Note: This user subroutine should not be used if the user desires that the material orientation be a design variable. Use the COMPOSITE option instead.

v is the vector in the Marc system.

v' is the vector in the preferred system.

v'1v'2v'3

⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

G11 G12 G13

G21 G22 G23

G31 G32 G33

v1

v2

v3⎩ ⎭⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎨ ⎬⎪ ⎪⎪ ⎪⎧ ⎫

=

gji


230

■ ANEXP

Anisotropic Thermal Expansion

Description

The ANEXP user subroutine is used to specify anisotropic thermal strain increments in the orientation defined by the ORIENTATION option. The user is given the temperature at the beginning of the increment, the temperature increment, and the base value of the thermal expansion coefficients given on the ISOTROPIC or ORTHOTROPIC options. The user must supply the incremental thermal strain vector

( for doubly curved shell elements 4, 8, and 24) in the user subroutine.

Any components of the incremental thermal strain vector not defined in the user subroutine assume their default program calculated values.

The ANEXP user subroutine is called for all elements at all integration points if the temperature is nonzero for all material models.

If the HYPELA2 user subroutine is used, enter 1 to activate ANEXP in the second field of the third data block of the HYPOELASTIC model definition option.

Format

User subroutine ANEXP is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE ANEXP (N,NN,KCUS,T,TINC,COED,NDI,NSHEAR,EQEXP) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION EQEXP(1),TINC(1),T(1),COED(NDI),N(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:






Δεi jth Δε th

ij


T(1) is the total temperature at the beginning of the increment.

T(2) is the total values of other state variables at the beginning of the increment.

TINC(1) is the temperature increment.

TINC(2) etc.

are the increments of other state variables.

COED(I) is the base value of the Ith coefficient of thermal expansion as given through the input data. There are NDI coefficients for each element.

NDI is the number of direct components of strain at this point.

NSHEAR is the number of shear components of strain at this point.

Required Output:

EQEXP is the thermal strain increment vector, to be defined by the user in this user subroutine.

Note: For the curvilinear coordinate elements (doubly curved shell elements 4,

8, 24) the mixed strain tensor shear components, ε12, ε2

1, are stored.

Otherwise, shear components are engineering shear strain.


232

■ ANKOND

Input of Anisotropic Thermal Conductivity Matrix

Description

For anisotropic heat transfer analysis, this user subroutine allows the user to define an anisotropic conductivity matrix at each integration point in each element. The anisotropic conductivity matrix is defined with respect to the preferred orientation specified in the ORIENTATION option. This user subroutine is also used for anisotropic electrical resistance in a Joule heating analysis.

Format

User subroutine ANKOND is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE ANKOND (COND,CANISO,N,NN,KCUS,MATUS,ID,T,DT,TIME,* DELTME,JOULHT) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION COND(ID,ID),CANISO(3),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

CANISO are the anisotropic conductivities kij (T) established by the user via data blocks.

N is the element number.






IDis the size of the COND matrix; that is, the number of derivatives.

T is the temperature at the beginning of the time increment.

∂T∂xj--------


DT is the estimated temperature increment.

TIME is the transient time at the beginning of the increment.

DELTME is the increment of time.

JOULHT = 0 return thermal conductivity.= 1 return electrical conductivity.

Required Output:

COND is the conductivity matrix, kij:

This is to be re-defined as necessary by the user.This matrix is passed in as set-up for anisotropic conductivity. If the user does not re-define it, it remains anisotropic according to kij (T) given on the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, and TEMPERATURE EFFECTS or TABLE options.

qi kij=∂T∂xj--------


234

■ UEPS

Input of Anisotropic Permittivity Matrix

Description

For anisotropic electrostatic or electromagnetic analysis, this user subroutine allows the user to define an anisotropic permittivity matrix at each integration point in each element. The anisotropic permittivity matrix is defined with respect to the preferred orientation specified in the ORIENTATION option.

Format

User subroutine UEPS is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UEPS (EPS,M,NN,MATUS,ID)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION EPS(ID,ID),M(2),MATUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:






ID is the size of the matrix.

Required Output:

EPS is the permittivity matrix, [ε] (D = [ε]E).This is to be re-defined as necessary by the user. This matrix is passed in as set-up for anisotropic permittivity. If the user does not redefine it, it remains as given through the ISOTROPIC or ORTHOTROPIC options.


■ UMU

Input of Anisotropic Permeability Matrix

Description

For anisotropic magnetostatic or electromagnetic analysis, this user subroutine allows the user to define an anisotropic permeability matrix at each integration point in each element. The anisotropic permeability matrix is defined with respect to the preferred orientation specified in the ORIENTATION option.

The permeability μ is used in the relation:

B=μH + Br

where:

Format

User subroutine UMU is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UMU (XMU,M,NN,MATUS,ID,CPTIM,DTIME,B)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XMU(ID,ID),B(3),M(2),MATUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

B is the magnetic induction.

H is the magnetic field intensity.

μ is the permeability.

Br is the remanence.

Note: B is complex in a harmonic analysis.

Input:

M(1) is your element number.




236

ID is the size of the matrix.

CPTIM is the frequency in a harmonic analysis.


B is the magnetic flux density in a transient analysis, or is zero in a harmonic analysis.

Required Output:

XMU is the reluctivity matrix .

This is to be re-defined as necessary by the user. This matrix is passed in as set-up for anisotropic permeability. If the user does not re-define it, it remains anisotropic according to μ (T) given on the ISOTROPIC or ORTHOTROPIC options.

1μ--- H

1μ--- B Br–( )=⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞


■ USIGMA

Input of Anisotropic Electric Conductivity Matrix

Description

For anisotropic electromagnetic analysis, this user subroutine allows the user to define an anisotropic conductivity matrix at each integration point in each element. The anisotropic permittivity matrix is defined with respect to the preferred orientation specified in the ORIENTATION option.

Format

User subroutine USIGMA is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE USIGMA (SIGMA,M,NN,MATUS,ID,CPTIM,DTIME)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION SIGMA(3,3),M(2),MATUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

M(1) is the user element number.M(2) is the internal element number.NN is the integration point number.MATUS(1) is the user material identifier.MATUS(2) is the internal material identifier.CPTIM is the transient time at the beginning of the increment; in a harmonic

analysis, it is the frequency.DTIME is the increment of time.ID is the size of the matrix.

Required Output:

SIGMA is the electric conductivity matrix, [σ] (J = [σ]E).This is to be re-defined as necessary by the user. This matrix is passed in as set-up for anisotropic conductivity. If the user does not re-define it, it remains as given through the ISOTROPIC or ORTHOTROPIC options.


238

■ USPCHT

Definition of Specific Heat

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to define the specific heat in a heat transfer or coupled analysis. This is an alternative to the use of the ISOTROPIC or ORTHOTROPIC and TEMPERATURE EFFECTS or TABLE options. This user subroutine is called at each increment for every element in the mesh, hence, allowing the user to specify a nonlinear relationship. This is often useful in welding or casting analyses.

Format

User subroutine USPCHT is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE USPCHT (SPHEAT,M,NN,KCUS,INC,NCYCLE,MATUS,+NSTATS,DT,DTDL,CPTIM,TIMINC) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION M(2),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:










NSTATS is the number of state variables.


DT is the temperature at the start of the increment.

DTDL is the estimated increment of temperature.


TIMINC is the increment of time.

Required Output:

SPHEAT is the specific heat per unit mass. This is to be defined by the user.


240

■ UCURE

Define the Cure Kinetics

Description

This subroutine allows you to define the cure kinetics models and calculation of the degree of cure. This subroutine is activated if the cure kinetics model number is given as –1 in the first field of the second data block under the CURE RATE model definition option. This subroutine can be used for heat transfer or the cure-thermal-mechanical coupled analysis of resin or composite that has resin inside. For details of the usage of cure rate, refer to the CURING parameter and the CURE RATE model definition option.

Format

User subroutine UCURE is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UCURE(M,N,NN,KCUS,MATUS,DT,AK,DENSITY,VOLUMI,*CUREDAT,TEMPBEG,TEMPEND,DELTIME,TIME,CURERATE) INCLUDE '../COMMON/IMPLICIT' INCLUDE '../COMMON/MRCPARM' DIMENSION CUREDAT(*),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

M is the element number.N is the elsto number.NN is the integration point number.KCUS(1) is your layer number (always 1 for continuum elements).KCUS(2) is the internal layer number (always 1 for continuum element).MATUS(1) is the user material identifier.MATUS(2) is the internal material identifier.DT is the degree of cure at the beginning of the increment.AK is the degree of cure at the end of the increment.DENSITY is the density of the material at the initial point.


Notes: UNVGAS is the universal gas constant used by Marc. The default value of UNVGAS is (except when input by you):

UNVGAS = 8.134 (J/mol/K) with SI-m unit (N, m, S, C);UNVGAS = 8314. (J/mol/K) with SI-mm unit (N, mm, S, C);UNVGAS = 1.986 (Btu/lbMol/R) with US (British) unit (lbf, inch, S, F)UNVGAS is already defined by Marc and saved in common block mrcparm. You do not need to define UNVGAS.

VOLUMI is the volume at the initial point.If the material has both fiber and resin, then volumi should be multiplied by vsfact (0 vsfact 1) which is the volume fraction of resin in the element which is equivalent to the porosity vsfact = void/(1 + void) where void is the void ratio.

CUREDAT is the material data.curedat (9) is the total reaction heat of the cure.

TEMPBEG is the temperature at the beginning of the increment.TEMPEND is the temperature at the end of the increment.TIME is the time at the beginning of the increment.DELTIME is the incremental time.

Required Output:

AK is the degree of cure at the end of the increment. CUREDAT(9) is the total resin reaction heat of curing.CURERATE is the cure rate.VOLUMI is used if the resin volume fraction is smaller than 1 (optional).


242

■ USHRINKAGE

Define Volumetric Cure Shrinkage

Description

This user subroutine allows you to define the volumetric cure shrinkage models and calculates the degree of cure shrinkage, the volumetric cure shrinkage strain, and the directional Cure Shrinkage Coefficient matrix (CSC). This subroutine is activated if the cure shrinkage model number is given as –1 in the first field of first data block under the CURE SHRINKAGE model definition option. This subroutine can be used for heat transfer or the cure-thermal-mechanical coupled analysis of resin or composite that includes resin. For details of the usage of cure shrinkage, refer to the CURING parameter and the CURE RATE and CURE SHRINKAGE model definition options.

Format

User subroutine UCURE is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE USHRINKAGE(M,N,NN,KCUS,MATUS,AK,AKCBEG,*AKCDEG,VOLFACT,SHRKDAT(1),TEMPBEG,*TEMPEND,TIME,DELTIME,AKINC,VLMSTR) INCLUDE '../COMMON/IMPLICIT' DIMENSION SHRKDAT(*),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

M is the element number.N is the elsto number.NN is the integration point number.KCUS(1) is your layer number (always 1 for continuum elements).KCUS(2) is the internal layer number (always 1 for continuum element).MATUS(1) is the user material identifier.MATUS(2) is the internal material identifier.AK is the degree of cure at the end of the increment.


AKCBEG is the degree of cure shrinkage at the beginning of the increment.TEMPBEG is the temperature at the beginning of the increment.TEMPEND is the temperature at the end of the increment.TIME is the time at the beginning of the increment.DELTIME is the incremental time.

Required Output:

VLMSTR is the volume shrinkage strain increment.AKCDEG is the degree of cure shrinkage at the end of the increment. AKINC is the increment of the degree of cure of shrinkage for the

current increment.SHRKDAT(1) is the maximum volumetric shrinkage.SHRKDAT(5-10) are the directional Cure Shrinkage Coefficients of material (CSC)

that you should define at this time:shrkdat (5) CSC 11shrkdat (6) CSC 22shrkdat (7) CSC 33shrkdat (8) CSC 12shrkdat (9) CSC 23shrkdat (10) CSC 31


244

■ UCRPLW (Viscoplastic)

Input of Creep Factors for Power Law Implicit Creep

Description

The UCRPLW user subroutine can be used for defining complex relationships for the factors in the power law expression for the creep strain rate. This user subroutine is called automatically when the implicit creep option is used in Marc. Note that the latter is implemented for isotropic materials exhibiting power law creep. For more complex implicit creep behavior, use the UVSCPL user subroutine.

Format

UCRPLW is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UCRPLW(CPA,CFT,CFE,CFTI,CFSTRE,CPTIM,TIMINC,

* EQCP,DT,DTDL,MDUM,NN,KCUS,MATUS)

C CREEP STRAIN RATE = CPA*CFT*CFE*CFTI*(STRESS**CFSTRE)


DIMENSION MDUM(*),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN

END

where:

Input:

CPTIM time at the beginning of the increment.TIMINC time Increment.EQCP creep strain at the beginning of the increment.DT temperature at the beginning of the increment.DTDL incremental temperature.MDUM(1) user element number.MDUM(2) internal element number.NN integration point number.KCUS(1) is your layer number (always 1 for continuum elements).


KCUS(2) is the internal layer number (always 1 for continuum element).MAT material number.

Required Output:

CPA is the creep constant.CFT is the temperature factor.CFE is the creep strain factor.CFTI is the time factor.CFSTRE is the stress exponent.


246

■ CRPLAW

Input of Special Creep Law

Description

The CRPLAW user subroutine allows the user to specify the increment of creep strain.

The use of such a user subroutine is flagged by setting the fifth field of the second block in the CREEP model definition option to zero. This user subroutine is called as required during the analysis because of possible re-cycling due to nonconvergence. The number of times the user subroutine is called in each increment is not fixed.

Marc allows the user to input his own creep law through the CRPLAW user subroutine.

The assumed form of the law is:

where:

is the equivalent creep strain rate, in uniaxial tension.

is the current equivalent (J) stress, normalized for uniaxial tension.

T is the current total temperature.

t is the current total time.

is the current total equivalent creep strain, normalized for uniaxial tension.

p is the hydrostatic stress.

are the state variables. Marc requires the user to program his creep law so that an equivalent creep strain increment is defined.

ε· c f σ T t εc p α1 α2 etc, , , , , , ,( )=

ε· c

σ

εc

α1 α2 etc., ,


Format

User subroutine CRPLAW is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE CRPLAW(EQCP,EQCPNC,STR,CRPE,T,DT,TIMINC,CPTIM,M,+NN,KCUS,MATUS,NDI,NSHEAR) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION T(3),DT(1),STR(1),CRPE(1),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

EQCP Passed in as total equivalent creep strain.

or, for ORNL Constitutive Theory, equivalent total creep strain,

to be re-defined as equivalent primary creep strain increment.STR is the stress array.CRPE is the incremental creep strain array. If you want to define a creep

strain law not following the normality condition, the creep strain increment can be defined here.

T(1) is the current total equivalent (J2) stress.

T(2) is the current total hydrostatic stress.T(3) is the current total swelling strain (from the VSWELL

user subroutine).DT(1) is the current total temperature.DT(2),DT(3) are the additional state variables read in the CREDE

user subroutine. TIMINC is the current time increment.CPTIM is the current total time.M is the current element number.NN is the integration point number.KCUS(1) is your layer number (always 1 for continuum elements).KCUS(2) is the internal layer number (always 1 for continuum element).

εc Σ 23---Δεc

i jΔεci j⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ 1 2⁄=

εc 23---ΣΔεc

i jΣΔεci j⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ 1 2⁄=


248

The simplest way to define a creep strain increment from a given rate law

is to multiply by Δt, the time increment:

As an example, suppose we wish to use the creep law (where A and B are constants):

This would be programmed as follows: SUBROUTINE CRPLAW(EQCP,EQCPNC,STR,CRPE,T,DT,TIMINC, +CPTIM,M,NN,KCUS,MATUS,NDI,NSHEAR) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION T(1),DT(1),STR(1),CRPE(1),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)C DEFINE A AND B A = CONSTANT1 B = CONSTANT2 C OBTAIN SINH (T/B) S = T(1) IF (S.EQ.0.) GO TO 1 SINHT = .5*(EXP(S/B)-EXP(-S/B)) GO TO 2 1 SINHT = 0. 2 CONTINUE C NON DEFINE EQCPNC EQCPNC = TIMINC*A*SINHT RETURN END

MATUS(1) is the user material id.MATUS(2) is the internal material identifier.NDI is the number of direct components of strain.NSHEAR is the number of shear components of strain.

Required Output:

EQCPNC is the equivalent creep strain increment; to be defined by the user in this user subroutine. For ORNL Constitutive Theory, passed in as equivalent total primary creep strain. Otherwise undefined when passed in.Must be redefined by the user as equivalent creep strain increment.

ε· c f σ etc,( )=

Δεc Δt f σ etc,( )⋅=

ε· c AσB----⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞sinh=


The ORNL recommendations include the use of a strain hardening creep formulation. The following example of the CRPLAW user subroutine shows a simple technique of numerical solution for a strain hardening formulation based on equivalent total creep strain. The example is based on a Blackburn formulation with a single primary term, but the technique is general and can be used for more complex formulations. The numerical inversion of the total creep equation for equivalent time is achieved by Newton’s method:

tn is the solution for equivalent time at the nth iteration.

Δt is the correction to t at the nth iteration, and the total creep equation is

with

A tolerance of 10-6 has been placed on .

Practical experience shows this needs about four or five iterations for the creep law in the example. The listing of CRPLAW follows:

SUBROUTINE CRPLAW(EQCP,EQCPNC,STR,CRPE,T,DT,TIMINC, +CPTIM,M,NN,DC,MATUS,NDI,NSHEAR) IMPILCIT *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION T(1),DT(1),STR(1),CRPE(1),MATUS(2)C THIS ROUTINE FORMULATES THE STRAIN HARDENING FORMULATION OF C THE BLACKBURN CREEP LAW. C EPSILON C DOT=1/TIME SUB CAP T * (EPSILON SUR T - EPSILON SUSUPER T) C + EPSILON DOT SUB M C THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION APPLIES TO THE FUNCTION CODED BELOW C A IS LN(A) C B IS ALPHA*SIGMA C E IS N

tn 1+ tn Δ t+=

tεc– f T σ tn, ,( )+

f ′– T σ tn, ,( )-------------------------------------------=

εc f T σ t, ,( )=

f ′ ∂f∂ t-----=

Δ ttn-----


250

C C IS Q C C IS T C EPSILON SUB T, T, SUB T AND EPSILON SUB M DOT ARE GIVEN BY A CURVE C FUN + A*SINH TO N OF ALPHA SIGMA TIMES E TO Q/T EXP C IHARD=0 USES STRAIN HARDENING C STRAIN NOW DIMENSIONAL C TEMPERATURE IN FAHRENHEIT C STRESS IN PSI C TIME IN HOURS FTN(A,B,C,D,E)=EXP(A)*(.5*(EXP(B)-EXP(-B))**)E*EXP(C/D)) IHARD=0 IHARD=1 EQCPNC=0 IF(T(1).LT.25.)GO TO 1 TRANK=DT(1)+459.67 ET=FTN(2.76,1.976E-3*T(1),-1,03E4,TRANK,.08778) TT=FTN(-21.38,.09546E-3*T(1),4.54E4,TRANK,-2.31) EDOT=FTN(57.2,.02345E-3*T(1),-9.98E4,TRANK,6.933) C THE FOLLOWING IS A NEWTON METHOD TO EXPRESS T IN TERMS OF KNOWN C QUANTITIES. INITIAL GUESS IS T= (F SUB C- ET) / E DOT M IF(IHARD.EQ.1) GO TO 10 TIME=CPTIM GO TO 2 10 CONTINUE TIME=(100.*EQCP-ET)/EDOT FT=ET/TT IF(EQCP.EQ.0.) GO TO 4 2 EFT=EXP (-TIME/TT) FT=FT*EFT/TT 4 ST=EDOT EQCPNC=(FT+ST)*TININC*0.01 1 RETURN END


■ VSWELL

Input of Special Swelling Law

Description

The VSWELL user subroutine allows the user to include pure swelling (dilatational) creep in Marc.

Format

User subroutine VSWELL is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE VSWELL(SWELL,SIG,TEMP,N,NN,KCUS,CPTIM,TIMINC,

+MATUS,DTEMP) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION SIG(3),TEMP(1),DTEMP(1),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

SIG(1) is the uniaxial equivalent of J2 stress.

SIG(2) is the hydrostatic stress.

SIG(3) is the current total swelling strain (accumulated from this user subroutine).

Note: This is a uniaxial component; that is,

TEMP(1) is the temperature.

TEMP(2),TEMP(3), etc. are the additional state variables read in through the CREDE user subroutine.





CPTIM is the total creep time.

13--- DV

V---------


252

The user defines the increment of dilatational creep by this user subroutine, which is called at each integration point where constitutive calculations are being performed by Marc. It is called automatically when any CREEP incremental option is used (AUTO CREEP, CREEP INCREMENT, etc.) and can be used alone or in combination with a Mises type creep law (CRPLAW user subroutine). This user subroutine is called as required during the analysis, so that, because of possible re-cycling due to nonconvergence, the number of times the user subroutine is called in each increment is not fixed.

Example

The following is a typical irradiation swelling formulation:

where:

a, b0, b1, b2, c are numerical constants, q is flux, t is time and T is temperature.

Differentiating with respect to time,

TIMINC is the current time increment.



DTEMP(1) is the temperature increment.

DTEMP(2), etc. are the increments of additional state variables.

Required Output:

SWELL is the user-defined increment of volumetric swelling

.DVV

---------=⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞

DVV

---------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ c q t⋅( )aexp b0

b1

T1------

b2

T2------+ +⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞=

ddt----- DV

V---------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ acqata 1– exp b0

b1

T1------

b2

T2------+ +⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞=


so that user subroutine VSWELL becomes:SUBROUTINE VSWELL(SWELL,SIG,TEMP,N,NN,KCUS,CPTIM,TIMINC,

+MATUS,DTEMP)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION SIG(3),TEMP(1),DTEMP(1),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)C=Q=TEMP(2)A=B0=B1=B2=SWELL=A*C*Q**A*CPTIM**(A-1.)SWELL=SWELL*EXP(B0+B1/TEMP+B2/TEMP**2)SWELL=SWELL*TIMINCRETURNEND

This assumes flux increments q are entered into the second state variable using CREDE.


254

■ WKSLP

Work-hardening Slope Definition

Description

This user subroutine makes it possible for the user to program the yield stress and the corresponding work-hardening slope directly as a function of equivalent plastic strain and temperature. See the WORK HARD model definition option. The user needs to define the value of the slope of the equivalent stress vs. equivalent plastic strain. The current yield stress can be defined also. The specification of the latter is optional. If the value of the current yield is not given here, Marc calculates it from the initial yield value and the work-hardening slopes defined in this user subroutine.

In order to use this user subroutine instead of the slope-break point data, the user should set the number of work-hardening slopes equal to -1. No work-hardening slope break point data blocks should be included. The user subroutine is called as required by Marc during the elastic-plastic calculations. The number of times it is called per increment depends on the number of points going plastic, on the nonlinearity of the work-hardening curve, and on temperature dependence.

Format

User subroutine WKSLP is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE WKSLP(M,NN,KCUS,MATUS,SLOPE,EBARP,ERAT,STRYT,DT,

+IFIRST)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

M is the current user element number.




The time increment, Δt, is given by variable TIMINC in common block CREEPS. The user must take care to provide rate of change of stress with respect to plastic strain, not total strain. The second term in the SLOPE expression allows the user to include strain-rate effect if desired. The user must define SLOPE and STRYT in this user subroutine. EBARP, DT, and IFIRST should not be changed.




EBARP is the current total equivalent plastic strain,

ERAT is the equivalent plastic strain rate,

DT is the current total temperature.

IFIRST is passed in as 1 for initial yield curve; is passed in as 2 for the tenth cycle yield curve when ORNL constitutive theory is flagged.

Required Output:

SLOPE is the work-hardening slope to be defined by the user as:

= equivalent tensile stress =

STRYTis the current yield stress .

Note: is not the slope of the tensile stress-strain curve, which is with:

εp

εp Σdεp=

dερ 23---dεi j

p dεi jp=

ε· p

dσ

dεp

--------σ ε

pε· p

,( ) εp

0,( )–

ε· p

Δt-----------------------------------------------+

σ 32---SijSij

Sij σi j13---δi jσkk–=

σ

dσdεP--------- dσ

dε-------

dε dεe dεp+=


256

Note: If the UPDATE or LARGE STRAIN parameter is used, the stresses are Cauchy (true) stress and the strains are logarithmic strains.

Example

Let us assume that yield surface can be expressed as:

then,

the user subroutine would look like:SUBROUTINE WKSLP(M,NN,KCUS,MATUS,SLOPE,EBARP,ERAT,STRYT,DT,

+IFIRST)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION MATUS(2),KCUS(2)A=N=N1=n-1SLOPE=n*A*(1.+EBARP)**N1STRYT=A*(1.+EBARP)**NRETURNEND

σy A 1 εp+( )n=

∂σy

∂εp--------- nA 1 εp+( )n 1–=


■ USPRNG

Input of Nonlinear Spring, Dashpot and Foundation Stiffness

Description

The USPRNG user subroutine permits the introduction of further modification of nonlinear spring constants for use with the SPRINGS and/or FOUNDATION options and input of nonlinear damping. For linear springs, your coding must supply both the ratio of the current value of spring stiffness to the reference data input value and the total spring force. For dynamic analysis, the ratio of damping coefficient can also be provided. For nonlinear springs that have already been defined using the TABLE option in the data input, your coding must supply both the ratio of the user-defined spring stiffness to the current tabular stiffness and the spring force. The value of the spring/dashpot constant, total time, and the element or spring number are made available to the user subroutine. For harmonic analysis, the spring/dashpot constants can be a function of the frequency. The USPRNG user subroutine is accessible whenever either the SPRINGS or the FOUNDATION option is used. USPRNG can also be used for defining spring stiffnesses in thermal analysis (regular heat transfer analysis or thermal part of a thermo-mechanical coupled analysis), and in Joule heating analysis.

Format

User subroutine USPRNG is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE USPRNG(RATK,F,DATAK,U,TIME,N,NN,NSPRNG)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION RATK(*),DATAK(*),U(*),TIME(*),N(*),F(*),NSPRNG(*)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:


258

Input:

DATAK(1) is the data value of spring constant (or foundation stiffness) as defined by the user in SPRINGS/FOUNDATION options data input. For previously defined nonlinear springs, it is the current nonlinear data value calculated from input tables. This is input to the program. (a) For springs: DATAK(1) = mechanical stiffness(b) For thermal links: DATAK(1) = thermal conduction(c) For electrical links: DATAK(1) = electrical conduction

DATAK(2) is the data value of the damping constant as defined by you in the SPRINGS option data input. For previously defined nonlinear dashpots, it is the current nonlinear data value calculated from input tables. It is only used for transient mechanical analysis. This is input to the program.

For Elastic Foundation (Only Static Contribution):

U(1) For elastic foundation: U(1) = Un.

(positive in the direction specified by face identification given in the FOUNDATION option).

U(2)-U(4) not used

For Springs/Dashpots (Static and/or Dynamic Contribution):

U(1)For mechanical springs: .

For thermal links:

For electrical links:

U(2)For dynamic spring/dashpot .

U(3)

U(4)

For mechanical springs in coupled analysis and for electrical links in Joule heating analysis: = Average Temperature of Spring or it is not used.

Not used

For springs/dashpots (harmonic analysis):

U(1) static predeformation

U(2) not used

U(3) real part of harmonic deformation.

U(4) imaginary part of harmonic deformation

TIME(1) is the total time (for dynamic or creep analysis).

U 1( ) U2 U1–=

U 1( ) T2 T1–=

U 1( ) V2 V1–=

U 2( ) U· 2 U· 1–=

U 3( )

U 1( ) U2 U1–=

U 3( ) U2 U1–=

U 4( ) U2 U1–=


If the user subroutine is called for an elastic foundation point, NSPRNG(1) and NSPRNG(2) are zero.

If the user subroutine is called for a spring, NN is zero.

Note that if the user prefers to give the absolute value of the spring constant rather than a ratio, the corresponding value in the SPRINGS or FOUNDATION option should be set to 1. The same applies for a damping constant.

Note that for fixed degrees of freedom springs, U(1), U(2), U(3), and U(4) are positive if the motion of the degrees of freedom associated with node 2 is greater than the motion of the degrees of freedom associated with node 1. So, to ensure

TIME(2) is the frequency (for harmonic analysis with spring/dashpot).

N(1) is the element number (for elastic foundation).is the first user-node number (for spring)

N(2) is the face number (for elastic foundation).is the second user-node number (for spring)

NN is the integration point number (only for elastic foundation).

NSPRNG(1)

NSPRNG(2)

NSPRING(3)

is the spring number, the position of the spring in the input data list (only for springs).= 1mechanical analysis or stress part of coupled analysis (only for springs)= 2heat transfer analysis or thermal part of coupled analysis (only for springs)= 4electrical analysis (only for springs)is the spring ID given on the SPRINGS model definition option.

Required Output:

RATK(1) is the ratio of the present value of spring stiffness to the data value given in the option input; to be defined by the user.

RATK(2) is the ratio of the present value of the damping coefficient to the data value given in the input; to be defined by the user. This applies to SPRINGS in dynamic analysis only.

F(1) is the force to be defined by the user (only needed for mechanical analysis).(a) For springs: F(1) = spring force.(b) For elastic foundation: F(1) = pressure per unit area.(c) For harmonics: F(1) = real part of harmonic force.

F(2) is the force to be defined by the user (only needed for mechanical analysis).(a) For springs: F(2) = the damping force.(b) For harmonics: F(2) = imaginary part of harmonic force.


260

physically consistent forces, care should be exercised on defining node 1 and node 2 correctly. For true direction springs, U(1), U(2), U(3), and U(4) are positive if the spring is in tension and negative if the spring is in compression.

During a heat transfer run or electrical run (NSPRNG(2) = 2 or 4), springs simply act as links. Only the user-input conduction DATAK(1) comes into the routine and the user needs to return the modified ratio RATK(1). The dashpot is not active. The spring force F the gradient across the spring, U, is not needed and does not need to be defined.


■ UCRACK

Input of Ultimate Stress for Cracking Analysis

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to input a constant or a temperature dependent ultimate stress at each integration point of an element for cracking analysis. In addition, the user can define the strain softening modulus and the crushing strain.

Format

User subroutine UCRACK is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UCRACK (SCRACK,ESOFT,ECRUSH,ECP,DT,DTDL,N,NN,1 KCUS, INC, NDI, NSHEAR, SHRFAC) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION ECP(1), DT(1), DTDL(1),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

ECP is the array of crack strains.

DT is the array of state variables, temperature first.

DTDL is the array of incremental state variables, temperature first.








SHRFAC is the user-defined shear retention factor.


262

Let us assume that the ultimate stress looks like

The user subroutine would look like SUBROUTINE UCRACK(SCRACK,ESOFT,ECRUSH,ECP,DT,DTDL,N,NN, 1 KCUS,INC,NDI,NSHEAR, SHRFAC) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION ECP(1),DT(1),DTDL(1),KCUS(2) A= R= TT=DT(1)+DTDL(1)+473.0 SCRACK=A*(1.0D0-EXP(-R*TT)) RETURN END

Required Output:

SCRACK is the user-defined ultimate cracking stress.

ESOFT is the user-defined strain softening moduli.

ECRUSH is the user-defined strain at which crushing occurs.

σCR A 1 e RT––( )=


■ TENSOF

Input of Tension Softening Modulus for Cracking Analysis

Description

The tension softening modulus defines the post-failure behavior at an integration point. By default in Marc, the reduction of the cracking stress to zero is a linear function of the crack strain. This user subroutine allows the user to define for instance a nonlinear behavior. The user subroutine is automatically called for every crack in the analysis.

Format

User subroutine TENSOF is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE TENSOF (D,SP,GFP,DEP,ECP,SCRACK,SOSTR,ETSNEW,

ETSOFT,XH,SPECLN,JSOFT)

where:

Input:

GFP is the change in stress due to incremental crack growth.

DEP is the current strain increment.

ECP is the crack strain at end of increment.

SCRACK is the critical cracking stress given in input.

SOSTR is the current cracking stress based on previous softening.

ETSNEW is the current value of temperature dependent Young’s modulus.

ESOFT is the tension softening modulus given in input.

XH is the characteristic element length.

SPECLN is the test specimen length.

Required Output:

D is the stiffness in the crack direction term to be defined by you.

SP is the stress at end of increment as function of crack strain to be defined by the user.

JSOFT is the status indicator for softening. Used for plotting only.= 1 inside softening range.= 2 outside softening range.


264

Note that the definition of the stiffness D does not need to be exact. The correct definition of the stiffness only determines the speed of the convergence. In fact, in the above user subroutine, a large negative value of the stiffness term should never be used as this would result in convergence problems. The stress definition, however, must be exact; otherwise, the wrong solution is obtained.


■ USHRET

Input of Shear Retention Factor for Cracking Analysis

Description

The shear retention factor is used to define the residual shear stiffness for a cracked integration point in a cracking analysis. The shear retention factor is defined as the factor with which the initial shear stiffness is multiplied. With this user subroutine, the user can define the shear retention factor to be, for instance, a function of the crack strain. The user subroutine is automatically called for each existing crack.

Format

User subroutine USHRET is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE USHRET (FACTOR,ECRA1,ECRA2,ECRA12)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

ECRA1 is the crack strain in the first crack direction.

ECRA2 is the crack strain in the second crack direction.

ECRA12 is the shear strain over the crack.

Required Output:

FACTOR is a user-defined shear retention factor to be defined here.


266

■ UVOID

Definition of the Initial Void Volume Fraction

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of the initial void fraction in an elastic plastic material when the damage model is being used. This user subroutine is automatically called if the Gurson damage model is specified for a specific material.

Format

User subroutine UVOID is written with the following header:SUBROUTINE UVOID(VOIDFI,M,NN,KCUS,MATUS,X)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION M(2),X(1),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:








X is the coordinate position of integration point.

Required Output:

VOIDFI is the initial void fraction to be defined here.


■ UVOIDN

Definition of the Void Nucleation Rate

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of the void nucleation rate in a material using the Gurson model. This user subroutine is called if the void nucleation method under the DAMAGE model definition option is set to 3.

In this model, the yield surface is given as:

where:

Format

User subroutine UVOIDN is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UVOIDN(A,B,M,NN,KCUS,MATUS,EPL,EPLAS,S,NDI,+NSHEAR,DT,DTDL) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION M(2),DT(1),DTDL(1),EPL(1),MATUS(2),KCUS(2) user coding RETURN END

where:

σe is the effective stress.

σm is the equivalent tensile stress.

f is the void ratio.

Input:



Fσe

2

σm2

-------- 2q1fq2σKK

2σm-----------------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞cosh 1 q1f( )2

+[ ]–+ 0= =


268

In this user subroutine, the following type of stress controlled nucleation rate can be specified:

where is the von Mises equivalent stress rate, and is the hydrostatic stress rate.






EPL is the plastic strain components.

EPLAS is the equivalent plastic strain.

S is the stress array.




DTDL is the array of increment of state variables.

Required Output:

A is the multiplier as shown below.

B is the multiplier as shown below.

f· Aσ·

Bσ· kk

3---------+=

σ·

σ· kk


■ UVOIDRT

Definition of the Initial Void Ratio or Initial Porosity

Description

The UVOIDRT user subroutine allows the user to define either the initial void ratio or the initial porosity in a soil analysis or a mass diffusion analysis. It may also be used to define a nonhomogeneous distribution of these variables, which in turn are used as independent variables to define other variables through the TABLE option. Whether the void ratio or the porosity is defined is based upon whether the INITIAL VOID RATIO or INITIAL POROSITY option.

Format

User subroutine UVOIDRT is written with the following header: SUBROUTINE UVOIDRT(M,N,NN,KCUS,MATS,COORD,NCRD,INC,CPTIM,*TIMINC,VALUE,IFLAG) INCLUDE '../COMMON/IMPLICIT' DIMENSION MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where

Input:

M element number.

N elsto number.




MATUS(1) user material id.

MATUS(2) internal material id.

COORD coordinate of integration point.




270

CPTIM time at the beginning of the increment.

TIMINC time increment.

VALUE if iflag = 1 define void ratio.if iflag = 2 define porosity.

IFLAG 1 or 2.


■ UGRAIN

Calculation of Grain Size

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to calculate the typical grain size based upon the state of material. The UGRAIN user subroutine is used in conjunction with the GRAIN SIZE option where the initial grain size is prescribed. This user subroutine is called at each integration point.

The calculation of grain size may be performed with all constitutive models.

Format

User subroutine UGRAIN is written with the following header lines:SUBROUTINE UGRAIN(M,N,NN,KCUS,MATUS,EPLAS,ERATE,DT,DTDl,

* IGNMOD,GRNDAT,GRNSIZ,TIME,DELTIME)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION DT(*),GRNDAT(*),MATUS(2),KCUS(2) user codingRETURNEND

where:

Input:

M is the element number

N is the elsto number






EPLAS is the equivalent plastic strain

ERATE is the equivalent plastic strain rate

DT is the state variables at beginning of increment

DTDL is the incremental state variables


272

GRNDAT is the material data, GRNDAT (1) is the initial grain size

TIME is the time - beginning of increment

DELTIME is the incremental time

IGNMOD is the input mode for different model (-1 for user-defined)

Required Output:

GRNSIZ is the current grain size


■ UDAMAG

Prediction of Material Damage

Description

This user subroutine provides the user with the mechanism for providing a Kachanov damage factor to be applied to the material properties. The UDAMAG user subroutine is used in conjunction with the DAMAGE model definition option. The user defines the damage factor (df). 0 ≤ df ≤ 1 where df = 0 implies a fully damaged material. If model 9 is used, then:

If model 10 is used, then:

This model is only applied to elastic-plastic materials using the additive procedure; it does not work with the FeFp procedure.

Format

User subroutine UDAMAG is written with the following header lines:

SUBROUTINE UDAMAG(M,N,NN,KCUS,MATUS,EPLAS,ERATE,DT,DTDL,*DAMDAT,DAMFAC,TIME,DELTIME) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z) DIMENSION DT (*),DAMDAT(*),DTDL(*),MATUS(2),KCUS(2) user coding RETURN END

where:

Input:

M is the user element number.

N is the internal element number.


σy σy εp

ε· p

T, ,( )* 1.0 df–( )=

σy σy εp

ε· p

T, ,( )* 1.0 df–( ) and E = E T( )* 1.0 df–( )=


274






ERATE is the equivalent plastic strain rate.

DT is the state variables at beginning of increment.

DTDL is the state variables increment.

DAMDAT is the material data, DAMDAT (1) is the initial damage factor.

TIME is the time at the beginning of increment.

DELTIME is the time increment.

Required Output:

DAMFAC is the current damage factor.


■ UPOWDR

Definition of Material Data for Powder Metallurgy Model

Description

Material properties of powder metals which are used in Hot Isostatic Pressing (HIP) are typically dependent upon both the temperature and the relative density of the material. This user subroutine provides an alternative mechanism to enter this data. This user subroutine is called for all elements for which the POWDER option is used. The elastic, plastic, and thermal properties can be defined in this user subroutine. In this model, the yield function, F, is defined as:

where:

The equivalent inelastic strain rate, , is defined as:

where:

γ and β are material parameters to be entered here.

S is the deviatoric stress.

P is the hydrostatic stress.

σy is the equivalent tensile stress.

is the viscosity.

F1γ---

32---Si jSij

P2

β2------+⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ 1 2⁄σy–=

ε·

ε· 1μ---

Fσy------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞=

μ


276

Format

User subroutine UPOWDR is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UPOWDR(E,G,POISS,GAMMA,BETA,VISC,SIGY,AMB,COMPF,+REDENS,DT,DTDL,DET,IHEAT,IHCPS) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION POWDAT(32)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

In the stress pass, you should define E, G, POISS, GAMMA, VISC, and SIGY.

In the heat transfer pass, the user should define AMB and COMPF.

The values of E, G, POISS, GAMMA, BETA, VISC, AMB, COMPF upon entrance are the values calculated by Marc based upon user input.

Input:

E is the Young’s moduli.

G is the shear moduli.

POISS is the Poisson’s ratio.

REDENS is the relative density.


DTDT is the array of increment of state variables.

DET is the determinant which gives the change in volume.

IHEAT is the indicates if this is the heat transfer calculation in a coupled analysis.= 0 stress pass.= 1 heat pass.

Required Output:

GAMMA is the parameter γ in the yield function.

BETA is the parameter β in the yield function.

VISC is the viscosity μ.SIGY is the temperature-dependent equivalent tensile stress σy

AMB is the conductivity in a coupled analysis.

COMPF is the specific heat in a coupled analysis.


■ UPERM

Definition of Permeability

Description

In a diffusion or soil analysis, it might be necessary to define the permeability as a function of the porosity or other variables. This user subroutine allows the user to enter a general nonlinear relationship. It is called during any coupled diffusion analysis or fluid-soil analysis.

Format

User subroutine UPERM is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UPERM(PERMEA,M,NN,DT,POROP,POROS,X,+K,STRESS,NGENS)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION PERMEA(K,K),X(1),STRESS (*)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:



DT is the temperature.

POREP is the pore pressure.

POROS is the porosity.

X is the array of integration point coordinates.

K is the dimension of the permeability matrix

STRESS is the effective stress matrix. (in a soil analysis. In a pure diffusion analysis, stress is not used.)

NGENS is the number of stress components.

Required Output:

PERMEA is the permeability matrix.


278

■ UMOONY

Mooney-Rivlin Material

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to redefine the constants used in the strain energy function. This data is normally entered through the MOONEY model definition option.

The form of the strain energy function is:

Format

User subroutine UMOONY is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UMOONY(C10,C01,C11,C20,C30,T,N,NN,MATUS)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION N(2),MATUS(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

T is the temperature.






Required Output:

C10,C01,C11,C20,C30 are the values used in the strain energy function to be defined by the user.

W C10 I1 3–( ) C01 I2 3–( ) C11 I1 3–( ) I2 3–( ) C20 I1 3–( )2 C30 I1 3–( )3+ + + +=


■ UENERG

Strain Energy Function

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to define his own elastic strain energy function for incompressible materials. Normally, the five constant second-order model is entered using the MOONEY model definition option. This option must still be used to invoke this user subroutine. This user subroutine can be used when either the total Lagrange or updated Lagrange procedure is used. The five material parameters, C10, C01, C11, C20, and C30 must be correctly defined with the MOONEY option for energy calculation.

Format

User subroutine UENERG is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UENERG(W,W1,W2,W11,W12,W22,WI1,WI2,

$ C10,C01,C11,C20,C30,N,NN) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION N(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

WI1 is , with the first deviatoric invariant of the

right Cauchy-Green deformation tensor.

WI2 is , with the second deviatoric invariant of

the right Cauchy-Green deformation tensor.

C10, C01, C11, C20, C30 are the five material parameters of the Mooney formulation.




I1 3– I1

I2 3– I2


280

Required Output:

W is the strain energy density.

W1 is .

W2 is .

W11 is .

W12 is .

W22 is .

∂W ∂I1⁄

∂W ∂I2⁄

∂2W ∂I1

2⁄

∂2W ∂I1∂I2⁄

∂2W ∂I2

2⁄


■ UOGDEN

Definition of Ogden Material Parameters

Description

This user subroutine allows the definition of the Ogden material parameters. Additionally, any temperature dependence of these properties can be entered here. The OGDEN option must be used to indicate that the element uses this material law, and the number of terms in the series must be entered through the model definition option. When the Ogden model is used in the updated Lagrange formulation, this user subroutine is called twice per integration point. The first time for the bulk modulus; the second time for the μ and λ coefficients.

The strain energy function for this material is written as:

Format

User subroutine UOGDEN is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UOGDEN(MATUS,NSER,M,NN,KCUS,INC,CPTIM,TIMINC,+XMTDAT,BULK,DT,DTDT) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION XMTDAT(2,NSER),M(2),DT(1),DTDL(1),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:



NSER is the number of terms in the series.

Wμi

αi----- λ1

αi λ2αi λ3

αi 3–+ +( )i 1=

n

∑ 4.5K J1 3/ 1–( )2+=


282








TIMINC is the time step.


DTDT is the array of increments of state variables.

Required Output:

XMTDAT(1,i) is the value of μi.

XMTDAT(2,i) is the value of αi.

BULK is the bulk modulus.


■ UELDAM

Definition of Damage Parameters in Ogden Model

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to define the damage parameters for the Ogden model. There are two types of damage: one is associated with the deviatoric (shear) behavior, and one is associated with the dilatational (volumetric) behavior (additional details can be found in Marc Volume A: User Information). This user subroutine is, therefore, called twice per integration point, once for deviatoric behavior and once for volumetric behavior. This user subroutine is called only if the damage type is set to 6 through the DAMAGE model definition option.

Format

User subroutine UELDAM is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UELDAM(M,N,NN,KCUS,INC,LOVL,MATUS,TIMINC,CPTIM,2 TOTEN,DEVEN,TOTEND,TOTENV,SURFC,SURFD,DT,3 DTDL,DAMD,DDAMD) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION DT(1),DTDL(1),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:


N is the internal element/elsto number.





LOVL is 4 for assembly phase.is 6 for stress recovery phase.



284




TOTEN is the total instantaneous strain energy at the end of the current step excluding damage.

DEVEN is the deviatoric part of the instantaneous strain energy at the end of the current step excluding damage.

TOTEND is the stored deviatoric energy at previous step (including damage).

TOTENV is the stored volumetric energy at previous step (including damage).

SURFC is the current radius of continuous damage surface.

SURFD is the current radius of discontinuous damage surface.

DT is the temperature.

DTDL is the incremental temperature.

Required Output:

DAMD is the value of Kachanov deviatoric damage parameter.

DDAMD is the derivative of the damage parameter with respect to the maximum total strain energy.


■ HYPELA2

User-defined Material Behavior

Description

This user subroutine gives the user the ability to implement arbitrary material models in conjunction with the HYPOELASTIC model definition option (see Marc Volume C: Program Input). Marc supplies the user with the total displacement, incremental displacement, total mechanical strain (mechanical strain = total strain – thermal strain), the increment of mechanical strain, and other information. Stress, total strain, and state variable arrays at the beginning of the increment ( ) are passed to HYPELA2. The user is expected to calculate stresses S, tangent stiffness D, and state variables (if present) that correspond to the current strain at the end of the increment ( ).

Format

User subroutine HYPELA2 is written with the following headers SUBROUTINE HYPELA2(D,G,E,DE,S,T,DT,NGENS,N,NN,KCUS,MATUS, 2 NDI,NSHEAR,DISP,DISPT,COORD,FFN,FROTN,STRECHN,EIGVN,FFN1,3 FROTN1,STRECHN1,EIGVN1,NCRD,ITEL,NDEG,NDM,NNODE,4 JTYPE,LCLASS,IFR,IFU) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION E(1),DE(1),T(1),DT(1),G(1),D(NGENS,NGENS),S(1)

DIMENSION N(2),COORD(NCRD,NNODE),DISP(NDEG,NNODE),2 DISPT(NDEG,NNODE),FFN(ITEL,ITEL),FROTN(ITEL,ITEL)3 STRECHN(ITEL),EIGVN(ITEL,ITEL),FFN1(ITEL,ITEL)4 FROTN1(ITEL,ITEL),STRECHN1(ITEL),EIGVN1(ITEL,ITEL)

DIMENSION MATUS(2),KCUS(2),LCLASS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

E is the total elastic mechanical strain.DE is the increment of mechanical strain.

t n=

t n 1+=


286

T is the state variables (comes in at t = n; must be updated to have state variables at t = n +1).

DT is the increment of state variables.NGENS is the size of the stress-strain law.N is the element number.NN is the integration point number.KCUS(1) is your layer number (always 1 for continuum elements).KCUS(2) is the internal layer number (always 1 for continuum element).MATUS(1) is the user material identifier.MATUS(2) is the internal material identifier.NDI is the number of direct components.NSHEAR is the number of shear components.DISP is the incremental displacements.DISPT is the displacements at t = n (at assembly lovl = 4) and the

displacements at t = n +1 (at stress recovery lovl = 6).COORD is the coordinates.NCRD Is the number of coordinates.NDEG is the number of degrees of freedom.ITEL is the dimension of F and R; 2 for plane-stress and 3 for the rest of

the cases.NNODE is the number of nodes per element.JTYPE is the element type.LCLASS(1) is the element class.LCLASS(2) is 0 for displacement element.

is 1 for lower-order Herrmann element.is 2 for higher-order Herrmann element.

IFR is set to 1 if R has been calculated.IFU is set to 1 if STRECH has been calculated.

At t = n (or the beginning of the increment):

FFN is the deformation gradient.FROTN is the rotation tensor.STRECHN is the square of principal stretch ratios, lambda (i).EIGVN (I,J) I principal direction components for J eigenvalues.

At t = n +1 (or the current time step):

FFN1 is the deformation gradient.FROTN1 is the rotation tensor.STRECHN1 is the square of principal stretch ratios, lambda (i).EIGVN1(I,J) is the I principal direction components for J eigenvalues.


Parameter

Without a specific parameter, engineering strain and stress are passed.

With the LARGE DISP parameter, Green-Lagrange strains and second Piola-Kirchhott stresses are passed.

With LARGE STRAIN parameter, logarithmic strains and Cauchy stresses are passed.

For large strain rubber elasticity, the UELASTOMER user subroutine is recommended.

For large strain inelasticity, the LARGE STRAIN parameter must be used. With the parameter, strain and stress components are rotated by Marc to account for rigid-body motion before HYPELA2 is called; so, the stress integration for the co-rotational part is performed in HYPELA2 based on rotation neutralized values. The user is required to pass back the updated rotation neutralized stress based on the co-rotational system. The shell thickness is only updated with the LARGE STRAIN parameter.

Strains

E ( ) and DE( ), which are passed to HYPELA2, are the elastic mechanical strain and the increment of mechanical strain, respectively. Here, mechanical strain is defined by “total strain – thermal strain”. Note that for the first iteration (NCYCLE = 0) during assembly (LOVL = 4), DE is an estimate of the strain change. The variables NCYCLE and LOVL can be obtained from common block CONCOM.

The total strain etotl(*) can be obtained using:

include’array2’include ’heat’include ’ngenel’include ’space’dinension etotl(6)1a4=ietota+lofr+(nn-1)*ngenel-1do i=1,ngenel

etotl(i)=varselem(1a4+i)enddo

Required Output:

D is the stress strain law to be formed.G is the change in stress due to temperature effects.S is the stress to be updated by you.


288

Coordinate System

Continuum (3-D-Solid, plane strain, axisymmetric and 2-D plane stress) elements use the global Cartesian coordinate system for the base vectors of stress and strain components. Also, membranes, shells and beams usually use the local Cartesian systems defined in Marc Volume B: Element Library (please check this volume for the element used). However, if the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used, strain and stress components are rotated to account of rigid-body motion before HYPELA2 is called. So, local Cartesian coordinate system is used based on rotation-neutralized values

If the ORIENTATION model definition option is used, the stress and strain components are stored in the local orientation axis. The basis vectors rotate with the material by rotation tensor (R) and, so the stress and strain are already stored in the rotated orientation axis before HYPELA2 is called.

Stress and Strain Components Order of Storage

The number of strain and stress components is composed of “number of direct components” (NDI) and “number of shear components” (NSHEAR). NDI and NSHEAR are defined in Table 3-2 for each element. For example, 3-D solid elements: ndi=3 and nshear=3, thick shells: ndi=2 and nshear=3, thin shells and membranes: ndi=2 and nshear=1, plane strain and axisymmetric elements: ndi=3 and nshear=1, beams: ndi=1 and shear=0 to 2. The stress and strain are first stored direct components followed by shear components. For full components, (ndi=3, nshear=3), S(11), S(22), S(33), S(12), S(23), S(31) is the right order to store. For Herrmann formulation of elements, the last strain component is the volumetric strain and the last stress component is the mean pressure constant. Thus, in the Herrmann formulation, NGENS = NDI + NSHEAR + 1.

State Variables

If there are any state variables (other than temperature) in the problem, the user can use the array T( ) to update and return these state variables. The increments of the state variables should be calculated and returned as the array DT ( ). T( ) and DT( ) have the size of NSTATS if NSTATS is the number of state variables defined in the PARAMETERS model definition option in the input file. T(1) and DT(1) are reserved for the temperature and the temperature increment, respectively, and calculated by Marc. You must not change the values of T(1) and DT(1) even in isothermal problems with state variables. All variables T(2) to T(NSTATS) and DT(2) to


DT(NSTATS) are accessible to you. If the LARGE STRAIN parameter is used, any nonscalar state variables (vector or tensor values) need to be rotated by using the rotation tensor (R) provided.

Tangent Stiffness

The user also needs to provide the tangent stiffness D based on the updated stress.

The rate of convergence or a nonlinear problem depends critically on the user supplied tangent stiffness . Before using this user subroutine for large problems, it is recommended that the user check the user subroutine with one-element problems under displacement and load control boundary conditions. The displacement controlled boundary condition problem checks the accuracy of the stress update procedure while the load controlled problem checks the accuracy of the tangent stiffness. A fully consistent exact tangent stiffness provides quadratic convergence of the displacement or residual norm.

3 Thermal Stress Problems

User-defined Anisotropy and Constitutive Relations User Subroutines

For thermal stress problems, the user needs to calculate and return the change in stress due to temperature dependent material properties.

where and are the temperatures at time t = n and t = n + 1, respectively

and is strain increment which is passed to HYPELA2.

Deformation Gradient (F), Rotation Tensor (R) and Stretch Tensor (U)

HYPELA2

For continuum (3-D solid, plane strain, axisymmetric and 2-D plane stress) elements and membranes, the deformation gradient and rotation tensor are passed. For those elements, principal stretch ratio and eigenvectors are also passed to HYPELA2. Based on the information, the user can calculate stretch tensor (U) as follows:

CALL SCLA (UN1, 0.d0, ITEL, ITEL, 1)

DO I=1,3

Dij

∂ Δσi( )∂ Δεj( )-----------------=

D

Gi

Gi Dθn 1+ D

θn–( )i j Δε( )j=

θn θn 1+

Δε( )j


290

DO J=1,3

DO K=1,3

UN1 (I,J) = UN1 (I,J)+DSQRT (STRETCH1(K)*EIGVN1(I,K)*EIGVN1(J,K))

ENDDO

ENDDO

ENDDO

In this case, STRECHN1 stores the value of the squares of the stretches, and EIGVN1(I,J) stores the I-th eigenvector component corresponding to the J-th eigenvalue of C, where C is the right Cauchy-Green Tensor at .

For shells and beams, kinematic variables are not available.

The total strain etotl(*) can be obtained using:

include’array2’include ’heat’include ’ngenel’include ’space’dinension etotl(6)1a4=ietota+lofr+(nn-1)*ngenel-1do i=1,ngenel

etotl(i)=varselem(1a4+i)enddo

t n 1+=


■ UFINITE

Finite Deformation Isotropic Material Models

Description

This user subroutine is used for finite deformation isotropic material models based on principal stretches. Both nonlinear elasticity and large strain plasticity models can be implemented using this user subroutine. This user subroutine requires the use of the LARGE STRAIN, 2 parameter. The UFINITE user subroutine is available for plane strain, generalized plane strain, axisymmetric, axisymmetric with twist, and 3-D elements.

Format

User subroutine UFINITE is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UFINITE(STRECH,EIGV,DETFE,DETFT,DEFGR,DT,

1 DTDL,STRESS,TANGENT,M,NN,GF,D)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H,O-Z)

DIMENSION STRECH(3),STRESS(3),TANGENT(3,3),EIGV(3,3),2 DEFGR(3,3),DIMENSION N(2),COORD(NCRD,NNODE),3 DISP(NDEG,NNODE),BEN(6),DT(1),DTDL(1),GF(1),D(1)

user coding

RETURN END

where

Input:

STRECH is the squares of deviatoric trial elastic principal stretch ratios.

EIGV(I,J) is the I principal direction components for J eigenvalues of the trial elastic left Cauchy-Green tensor (Finger tensor).

DEFGR is the total deformation gradient for continuum elements.

DETFE is the elastic part of the Jacobian.

DETFT is the total Jacobian.

DT is the array of the total state variables (temperature is first).

DTDL is the array of the incremental state variables.


292

This user subroutine allows the user to implement arbitrary finite elasticity and large strain plasticity models. The user does not need to be concerned with preserving objectivity under large rotations in large strain problems, but must only deal with the small strain problem. The user needs to update principal deviatoric Kirchhoff stresses and provide a consistent deviatoric part of tangent in principal space and calculate any change in stresses due to temperature dependent thermal properties. Marc calculates the kinematic large strain contributions to the tangent automatically. The user does not need to calculate the pressure or the volumetric part of the tangent. Also, transformation from the principal to global space for both stresses and the tangent is done automatically by Marc.

If there are any state variables in the problem, you can use the array DT() to update and return these state variables. The increments of the state variables must be calculated and returned as the array DTDL(). DT() and DTDL() are the size NSTATS where NSTATS is the number of state variables and is set in the PARAMETERS option in the input file. It must be remembered that DT(1) and DTDL(1) are reserved for the temperature and the temperature increment, respectively and are supplied to you by Marc. The user must not change the values of DT(1) and DTDL(1) even in isothermal problems. All variables DT(2) to DT(NSTATS) and DTDL(2) to DTDL(NSTATS) are accessible to the user.


D is the array for material properties defined asD(1) = bulk modulus at (DT + DTDL)D(2) = shear modulus at (DT +DTDL)D(3) = initial yield stress (at zero effective plastic strain)D(4) = kinematic hardening modulus at (DT + DTDL)D(5) = portion of isotropic hardeningD(6) = portion of kinematic hardeningD(7) = coefficient of linear thermal expansionD(8) = bulk modulus at DTD(9) = shear modulus at DT.


Required Output:

STRESS is the principal deviatoric Kirchhoff stress at the end of the increment.

TANGENT is the elasto-plastic material tangent in the principal space; relating the total deviatoric Kirchhoff stress in principal space to the total principal deviatoric logarithmic strains.

GF is the stress change due to temperature dependent properties.


The framework used in this user subroutine is based on principal stretches of the trial left Cauchy-Green tensor. For more details, please refer to the work of Simo and coworkers.

The rate of convergence of the global residual in this approach is critically dependent on the accuracy of the consistent tangent and the accuracy of the stress update procedure.


294

■ UELASTOMER

Generalized Strain Energy Function

3 Description

User-defined Anisotropy and Constitutive

Relations User Subroutines

This user subroutine allows definition of the user’s own hyperelastic models. The subroutine is activated by one of the following model definition options: FOAM, MOONEY, ARRUDBOYCE, GENT, and OGDEN. The UELASTOMER user subroutine must be used with the LARGE STRAIN,2 parameter.

Foam Models

For compressible foam materials, four types of strain energy functions can be defined using the UELASTOMER user subroutine, depending on the iflag entered in

the 4th field of the 3rd data block of the FOAM model definition option:

1. iflag = 1, Invariant-based model

2. iflag = 2, Principal-stretch-based model

3. iflag = 3, Invariant-based model with volumetric and deviatoric split

4. iflag = 4, Principal-stretch-based model with volumetric and deviatoric split

, , and ( , , and ) are strain invariants (principal stretches), and and

( , , and ) are their deviatoric parts, defined by and

, ; is the determinant of the

deformation gradient.

W W I1 I2 I3, ,( )=

W W λ1 λ2 λ3, ,( )=

W Wdev I1 I2,( ) U J( )+=

W Wdev λ1 λ2 λ3, ,( ) U J( )+=

I1 I2 I3 λ1 λ2 λ3 I1

I2 λ1 λ2 λ3 I1 J 2 3/– I1=

I2 J 4 3/– I2= λi( J 1 3/– λi= i 1 2 3 ), ,= J


Marc uses conventional displacement elements for user-defined compressible foam models (iflag from 1 to 4). No volumetric constraints are taken into account. For incompressible or nearly incompressible rubber-like materials, rubber model with iflag equal to 5 or 6 should be used. When using FEATURE,3401, iflag=7 also needs to be used to define the volumetric strain energy.

Rubber Models

Because rubber-like materials are nearly incompressible, it is numerically more efficient to split the energy function into a volumetric part and a deviatoric part. A mixed formulation, which treats hydrostatic pressure as an independent variable, is used in Marc to overcome the numerical difficulties coming from the volumetric constraints. A linear relationship between pressure and volumetric strain is a presupposition in the mixed formulation. Therefore, requiring only the deviatoric part of energy function needs to be defined in the user subroutine for rubber-like materials.

However, in many cases, the pressure-volumetric strain relationship is nonlinear. For such cases, a new three-field formulation with pressure, volume ratio, and displacement is available. Currently, the FEATURE,3402 parameter must be used in order to activate this formulation. Also, in this case, both deviatoric and volumetric strain energies must be defined.

Invariant-based rubber models can be defined using the UELASTOMER user subroutine if the MOONEY, ARRUDBOYCE, or GENT model definition option is used.

5. iflag = 5, Invariant-based model, deviatoric part only

Principal-stretch-based rubber models can be defined using the UELASTOMER user

subroutine if a 3 is entered in the 3rd field of the 3rd data block of OGDEN model definition option.

6. iflag = 6, Principal-stretch-based model, deviatoric part only

Note: If iflag=5 or iflag=6, only the deviatoric part of the energy function is defined via the user subroutine UELASTOMER. The volumetric part is calculated internally by Marc. For this purpose, the bulk modulus MUST be defined with either MOONEY, or ARRUDBOYCE, or GENT, or OGDEN model definition option.

W Wdev I1 I2,( )=

W Wdev λ1 λ2 λ3, ,( )=


296

In case of the direct definition of material properties through input deck, if no bulk modulus is given, the default bulk modulus is calculated as 5000 times initial shear modulus. However, if UELASTOMER is used, the initial shear modulus is not explicitly available and the bulk modulus must be directly defined.

7. iflag=7, Volumetric part of the strain energy (applicable to both, invarinent as well as principal stretch-based, models)

Compared to the foam models (iflag from 1 to 4), working only for compressible materials, the rubber-like model (iflag equal to 5 or 6) can be used for both compressible and incompressible materials. The foam and rubber models (when using FEATURE,3402 parameter with iflag=7) allow the user to define a general nonlinear volumetric energy function.

Format

User subroutine UELASTOMER is written with the following headers:subroutine (iflag,m,nn,matus,be,x1,x2,x3,detft,

$ enerd,w1,w2,w3,w11,w22,w33,w12,w23,w31,

$ dudj,du2dj,dt,dtdl,iarray,array)

c

c user defined, generalized strain energy function

c implemented in the framework of updated Lagrange

c

implicit real*8 (a-h,o-z)

dimension m(2),be(6),dt(*),dtdl(*),iarray(*),array(*)

dimension matus(2)

c

return

end

where:

W U J )( )=


Input:

iflag Activated by FOAM model definition option:= 1 energy function in terms of invariants= 2 energy function in terms of principal stretches= 3 energy function in terms of invariants with deviatoric split= 4 energy function in terms of principal stretches with deviatoric split

Activated by MOONEY, or ARRUDBOYCE, or GENT model definition option:= 5 energy function in terms of invariants deviatoric part only. The bulk

modulus MUST be defined with either MOONEY, ARRUDBOYCE, or GENT model definition option (except when using FEATURE,3402 where the bulk modulus must be defined as =-1; in which case, the routine is called twice with iflag=6 and 7.)

Activated by OGDEN model definition option= 6 energy function in terms of principal stretches deviatoric part only.

The bulk modulus MUST be defined with OGDEN model definition option

= 7 energy function in terms of volumetric ratio only. This is possible with FEATURE,3402 and the bulk modulus must be defined as -1

m(1) user element number

m(2) internal element number

nn integration point number

mats(1) user material identification number

mats(2) internal material identification number

be left Cauchy Green deformation tensor

x1,x2,x3 if iflag = 1: invariants of beif iflag = 2: principal stretchesif iflag = 3: deviatoric part of invariants of beif iflag = 4: deviatoric principal stretchesif iflag = 5: deviatoric part of invariants of beif iflag = 6: deviatoric principal stretches

detft determinate of deformation gradient

dt array of state variables (temperature at first) at

dtdl incremental state variables

iarray not used

tn


298

array not used

Required Output:

enerd energy density at

Foam Rubber

iflag = 1 iflag = 2 iflag = 3 iflag = 4 iflag = 5 iflag = 6 iflag = 7

W1 N/A

W2 N/A

W3N/A N/A

N/A

W11 N/A

W22 N/A

W33N/A N/A

N/A

W12 N/A

W23N/A N/A

N/A

W31N/A N/A

N/A

dudjN/A N/A N/A N/A

du2djN/A N/A N/A N/A

tn 1+

∂W∂I1--------- ∂W

∂λ1--------- ∂W

∂I1--------- ∂W

∂λ1--------- ∂W

∂I1--------- ∂W

∂λ1---------

∂W∂I2--------- ∂W

∂λ2--------- ∂W

∂I2--------- ∂W

∂λ2--------- ∂W

∂I2--------- ∂W

∂λ2---------

∂W∂I3--------- ∂W

∂λ3--------- ∂W

∂λ3--------- ∂W

∂λ3---------

∂2W

∂I12

----------- ∂2W

∂λ12

----------- ∂2W

∂I12

----------- ∂2W

∂λ12

----------- ∂2W

∂I12

----------- ∂2W

∂λ12

-----------

∂2W

∂I22

----------- ∂2W

∂λ22

----------- ∂2W

∂I22

----------- ∂2W

∂λ22

----------- ∂2W

∂I22

----------- ∂2W

∂λ22

-----------

∂2W

∂I32

----------- ∂2W

∂λ32

----------- ∂2W

∂λ32

----------- ∂2W

∂λ32

-----------

∂2W∂I1∂I2---------------- ∂2W

∂λ1∂λ2------------------- ∂2W

∂I1∂I2---------------- ∂2W

∂λ1∂λ2------------------- ∂2W

∂I1∂I2---------------- ∂2W

∂λ1∂λ2-------------------

∂2W∂I2∂I3---------------- ∂2W

∂λ2∂λ3------------------- ∂2W

∂λ2∂λ3------------------- ∂2W

∂λ2∂λ3-------------------

∂2W∂I3∂I1---------------- ∂2W

∂λ3∂λ1------------------- ∂2W

∂λ3∂λ1------------------- ∂2W

∂λ3∂λ1-------------------

∂U∂J------- ∂U

∂J------- ∂W

∂J---------

∂2U∂J2---------- ∂2U

∂J2---------- ∂2W

∂J2-----------


■ GENSTR

Generalized Stress Strain Law (Shells & Beams)

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to enter the generalized stress-strain law for shells and beams which are conventionally integrated through their thickness. This is often convenient in composite analysis where the experimental information is for the total material, not individual plies. This option is activated using the SHELL SECT parameter. As no layer integration is performed, the number of layers can be set to one.

The user needs to provide the generalized stress-strain law D and the total generalized stress at the end of the increment.

Format

User subroutine GENSTR is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE GENSTR(D,DC,FCRP,ETOTA,DE,HT,S,T,DT,ER,EC, * SR,SC,NGENS,M,N,NN,MATUS,IHRESP,ICRESP) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION D(NGENS,NGENS),DC(NGENS,NGENS),FCRP(1),ETOTA(1), * DE(1),S(1),T(1),DT(1),ER(1),EC(1),SR(1),SC(1),N(2),MATUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

ETOTA is the total strain array.

DE is the increment of strain array.

HT is the shell thickness.

S is the stress array.

T are the state variables (temperature).

DT are the increments of state variables.

ER is the real strain array during harmonic sub-increment.


300

During transient increments, the user defines D, S, and FCRP.

During harmonic subincrements the user defines D, DC, SR, and SC.

For thick shell elements (types 22, 75, and 140):

For thin shell elements (types 4, 8, 24, 49, 72, 138, and 139):

EC is the imaginary strain array during harmonic sub-increment.

NGENS is the number of generalized stress.

M is the internal element number.





IHRESP is the flag to indicate harmonic sub-increment.

IHRESP=0 during a transient analysis.

IHRESP=1 during a harmonic sub-increment.

ICRESP indicates complex harmonic sub-increment.

Required Output:

D is the generalized real stress-strain law to be defined here.

DC is the generalized imaginary stress-strain law.

FCRP is the change in stress due to ‘temperature effects’ to be defined here.

SR is the real harmonic stress.

SC is the imaginary harmonic stress.

Components Description

1, 2, and 3 are membrane strains

4 and 5 are transverse shear strains

6, 7, and 8 are curvatures (correspond to 1, 2, and 3)

9 and 10 are physically undefined (correspond to 4 and 5)

11 and 12 are inplane rotation terms related to drilling degrees of freedom (only element 22 has component 12)

Components Description

1, 2, and 3 are membrane strains4, 5, and 6 are curvatures (correspond to 1, 2, and 3)7 is an inplane rotation term related to drilling degrees of freedom (only

elements 138 and 139 have component 7)


■ UBEAM

Input for Nonlinear Beam

Description

The UBEAM user subroutine allows the user to define nonlinear elastic cross-section properties as a function of generalized elastic strains and state variables for beam element 52 or beam element 98:

This is used in conjunction with the hypoelastic option. The user must use the HYPOELASTIC model definition option.

Note: This user subroutine should not be used if the material properties or the beam cross-section data are design variables. Use the ISOTROPIC and GEOMETRY option instead.

Format

User subroutine UBEAM is written with the following headers. SUBROUTINE UBEAM(D,FCRP,DF,DFI,ETOT,DE,DEI,S,SI,GS,GSI, +TEMP,DTEMP,NGENS,N,NN,MATUS) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSIOND(NGENS,NGENS),DF(1),S(1),GS(NGENS),DE(NGENS), +TEMP(1),DTEMP(1),FCRP(1),ETOT(1),DFI(1),DEI(NGENS),SI(1),

GSI(1),MATUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

ETOT are the total generalized strains.

DE are the increments of generalized strain.

DEI are the increments of imaginary generalized strain, if complex harmonic analysis.

S is not used.

SI is not used.


302

The components of generalized strain and stress for element 52 are:

The components of generalized strain and stress for element 98 are:

GS is passed in as the total generalized stress at the beginning of the increment, and must be redefined as the total stress generalized at the end of the increment.

GSI are the increments of generalized harmonic stress, if complex harmonic analysis.

TEMP are the total state variables at the beginning of the increment.

DTEMP are the increments of state variables.

NGENS is the number of generalized stress.





Required Output:

D is the matrix of cross-section stiffness properties (to be defined in this user subroutine).

FCRP is the generalized stress increment caused by change in state variables (to be defined in this user subroutine).

DF are the increments of generalized stress (to be defined in this user subroutine).

DFI are the increments of imaginary generalized stress, if complex harmonic analysis.

ETOT(1) Axial strain

ETOT(2) Curvature change in first bending direction

ETOT(3) Curvature change in second bending direction

ETOT(4) Twist of the beam

GS(1) Axial force

GS(2) Bending moment in first bending direction

GS(3) Bending moment in second bending direction

GS(4) Twisting moment

ETOT(1) Axial strain

ETOT(2) Local γxy shear

ETOT(3) Local γyz shear


ETOT(4) Curvature change in first bending direction

ETOT(5) Curvature change in second bending direction

ETOT(6) Twist of the beam

GS(1) Axial force

GS(2) Local τxy shear

GS(3) Local τyz shear

GS(4) Bending moment in the first bending direction

GS(5) Bending moment in the second bending direction

GS(6) Twisting moment


304

■ UCOHESIVE

Interface Material Model

Description

The UCOHESIVE user subroutine is provided to allow the user to enter a material model used by the interface elements 186 to 192. The call to this user subroutine is triggered by the COHESIVE model definition option, where the cohesive material type has to be set to -1. Material data entered on the COHESIVE option is available within this user subroutine.

Unlike conventional stress elements, the material behavior of the interface elements is defined in terms of stresses and relative displacements instead of stresses and strains. The element stresses are the so-called tractions and consist of one normal and one shear stress component for 2-D elements (186, 187, 190, and 191) and one normal and two shear components for 3-D elements (188, 189, 192, and 193). The stress and relative displacement components are given in the local element coordinate system (see Marc Volume B: Element Library).

In order to cope with multi-axial stress states, the equivalent relative opening displacement can be used. When UCOHESIVE is used, this variable can be set by the user to, for example, keep track of the loading history at the element integration point. The use of this variable is optional. For postprocessing purposes, one can define a damage parameter (corresponding to post code 80).

Format

The UCOHESIVE user subroutine is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UCOHESIVE(D,ETOT,E,S,SEND,NGENS,RELOP,DT,DTDL,

NCYCLE,MDUM,NN,KCUS,MATUS,COHPROP)

INCLUDE ’../COMMON/IMPLICIT’

DIMENSION D(NGENS,NGENS),ETOT(*),E(*),S(*),SEND(*),

$ RELOP(*),DT(*),DTDL(*),KCUS(*),MATUS(*),COHPROP(*)

user coding

RETURN END


where:

Required Input:

ETOT is the accumulated total relative displacements at beginning of increment

E is the current incremental relative displacements

S is the accumulated stress at beginning of increment

NGENS is the number of stress components

DT is the state variables

DTDL is the incremental state variables

NCYCLE is the current cycle number

MDUM(1) is the user element number

MDUM(2) is the internal element number


KCUS(1) is the user layer number

KCUS(2) is the internal layer number

MATUS(1) is the user material identifier

MATUS(2) is the internal material identifier

COHPROP is the cohesive material properties defined via the COHESIVE model definition option

Required Output:

D is the matrix defining the relation between the stresses and the relative displacements

SEND is the total stress at end of increment

Optional Output:

RELOP(1) is the equivalent relative opening displacement

RELOP(2) is the damage parameter


306

■ UPHI

Input of PHI Function in Harmonic Analysis

Description

This user subroutine allows the input of PHI functions to be expressed analytically. The values of PHI are then passed into a Marc user subroutine where they are used in calculation of the Laplace transform for harmonic analysis.

Format

User subroutine UPHI is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UPHI(ELCG,FREQ,WI1,WI2,C10,C01,C11,C20,C30,NDI,*NSHEAR,FI0,FI1,FI2,FI11,FI12,FI21,FI22,IFLAG,DERIVS) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION ELCG(1),DERIVS(1) user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

ELCG is the left Cauchy-Green strain vector.

FREQ is the excitation frequency in radians/ time unit.

WI1,WI2 are the first and second invariants of ELCG.

C10,C01,C11,C20,C30 are the five material parameters of the Mooney formulation.

NDI is the number of direct strain components.

NSHEAR is the number of shear strain components.

IFLAG = 1: The sine PHI functions should be defined.

IFLAG = 2: The cosine PHI functions should be defined.

DERIVS is the array which contains the variables W, W1, W2, W11, W12, W21, and W22.

Required Output:

FI0,FI1,FI2,FI11,FI12,FI21,FI22

are the seven PHI functions which should be defined in this user subroutine by the user.


where:

W is the strain energy density.

W1 is .

W2 is .

W11is .

W12 is .

W21is .

W22is .

∂W ∂I1⁄

∂W ∂I2⁄

∂2W ∂I

1

2⁄

∂2W ∂I1∂I2⁄

∂2W ∂I2∂I1⁄

∂2W ∂I

2

2⁄


308

■ UCOMPL

Input of Viscous Stress Strain Relationship

Description

The UCOMPL user subroutine allows the user to input a real (elastic) and imaginary (damping) stress-strain relation for complex harmonic analysis. If not used, only the real portion is formed in the conventional manner. This user subroutine is called for all elements, integration points, and layers in a harmonic subincrement. the user specifies the C matrix and can alter the existing B matrix if necessary. The stress is

then calculated from where ε, are the harmonic strain and strain rate, respectively.

Format

User subroutine UCOMPL is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UCOMPL(C,B,ETOT,EELAS,EPLAS,S,T,XINTP,COORD, 2 DISPT,FREQ,N,NN,KCUS,NGENS,INC,INCSUB,NDEG,NCRD,NDI,

NSHEAR) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION C(NGENS,NGENS),B(NGENS,NGENS),ETOT(1), 2 EELAS(1),EPLAS(1),T(1),XINTP(NCRD),COORD(NCRD,1), 2 DISPT(NDEG,1),N(2),KCUS(2)

C USER SUBROUTINE TO INPUT A COMPLEX STRESS STRAIN LAWC FOR HARMONIC ANALYSIS C IS IMAGINARY PARTC B IS REAL PART

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

ETOT are the total strains.

EELAS are the total elastic strains.

EPLAS are the plastic strains.

S are the stresses.

σ Bε Cε·+= ε·


T are the total state variables (temperature first).

XINTP are the coordinates of this integration point.

COORD are the coordinates of the nodes of this element.

DISPT are the total displacements of the nodes of this element.

FREQ is the harmonic frequency in radians/time unit.

N(1) is the user’s element number.





NGENS is the number of stress-strain components; for Herrmann elements, this includes the Herrmann variable.


INCSUB is the subincrement number.


NCRD is the number of coordinate directions per node.

NDI is the number of direct component of stress.

NSHEAR is the number of shear components of stress.

Required Output:

C is the imaginary damping part of the stress-strain law.

B is the real elastic part of the stress-strain law.


310

■ GAPU

Input of Gap Direction And Closure Distance

Description

This user subroutine allows input or modification of the direction and closure distance of gap element type 12 and 97 based on the current position of the end nodes of the element. This makes it possible to model contact sliding along curved surfaces which can occur in the analysis of metal forming problems. Although the gap direction and closing distance can be changed, this user subroutine does not allow for finite sliding of two meshes with respect to each other, since the load transfer path is unchanged. In addition, it allows for specification of a nonlinear relationship between the normal force and the maximum friction force instead of the regular linear Coulomb relation.

Note: If this user subroutine is used to change the direction of the gap, friction should not be included.

The user subroutine also allows the user to specify certain tolerances to control gap closure and friction iterations. This last feature is not generally used.

Format

User subroutine GAPU calls for the following headers: SUBROUTINE GAPU(DIR,DIST,X1,X4,TOL1,TOL2,TOL3,M,MSUB,INC,+NCR,FN,FF) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION DIR(3),X1(3),X4(3),M(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

X1 is the current array of coordinates of the first node of the element.

X4 is the current array of coordinates of the fourth node of the element.

TOL1 is the tolerance on gap overclosure. Default is 0.


In two dimensional problems, DIR, X1, and X4 have two components; otherwise, DIR, X1, and X4 have three components.

TOL2 is the tolerance on gap force which allows the gap to remain closed even if small negative force.

TOL3 is the tolerance on frictional force. Default is 0.

M(1) is your element number.


MSUB is the subelement number (only for Marc element type 97).


NCR is the dimension of the gap.2 for 2-D problems.3 for 3-D problems.

FN is the current gap force.

Required Output:

DIR is the array of direction cosines of the current gap direction. This can be modified by the user.

DIST is the current closure distance (distance that the nodes must travel to obtain closure), which is to be defined by the user.

FF is the frictional force limit, to be specified by the user.


312

■ UGASKET

Define the Initial Gasket Gap Distance

Description

In modeling gaskets, it is often easiest to specify a uniform gasket thickness and define an initial gap distance. This gap distance is a reflection that the gap does not fill the complete region. This user subroutine provides a mechanism to define a nonuniform gap distance.

Format

The UGASKET User subroutine calls for the following headers:SUBROUTINE UGASKET(MDUM,NN,XINTP,NCRD,NGASK,GASGAP)

REAL*8 GASGAP,XINTP

INTEGER MDUM, NCRD, NGASK, NN

DIMENSION XINTP(NCRDS),MDUM(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

MDUM(1) is the element id.

MDUM(2) is the internal element storage number.


XINTP is the array with integration point coordinates.


NGASK is the gasket material number.

Required Output:

GASGAP is the initial gap distance (to be defined).


■ USELEM

User-defined Element

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to calculate his own finite element stiffness or mass matrix. This can also be used as interface with other numerical techniques. In general, in the finite element calculation, several matrices are required; hence, for a particular element, this user subroutine is called a multiple number of times. The calls and the user’s requirements are defined as follows:

To use this option, the USER parameter must be included to define the size of the element stiffness matrix and other critical dimensions and the element type given on the connectivity must be a negative number.

IFLAG=1 Return the equivalent nodal loads (F) given distributed surface or body loads. If the ELASTIC, FOLLOW FOR parameters or the AUTO STEP, AUTO TIME, AUTO INCREMENT options are used, these are total loads or else incremental loads. In a heat transfer analysis, this is the total flux vector.

IFLAG=2 Return the element tangent stiffness matrix (K). For an elastic analysis, this is the usual stiffness. For a heat transfer matrix analysis, this is the conductivity matrix. Also calculate the total internal forces (R). This is not necessary in a linear elastic analysis if the LOAD COR parameter has been turned off.

IFLAG=3 Return the mass matrix (M) for a dynamic analysis or specific heat matrix for a heat transfer problem.

IFLAG=4 Calculate the incremental strains (DE), generalized stresses (GSIGS) and the internal force (R). For a linear elastic solution, if only displacements are required, the user does not need to return any values. In a heat transfer analysis, the thermal gradient and the heat fluxes (both stored via SIGXX) and the internal flux vector (R) need to be calculated.

IFLAG=5 Output element results if so desired.


314

Format

User subroutine USELEM calls for the following headers: SUBROUTINE USELEM(M,XK,XM,NNODE,NDEG,F,R,* JTYPE,DISPT,DISP,NDI,NSHEAR,IPASS,NSTATS,NGENEL,* INTEL,COORD,NCRD,IFLAG,IDSS,T,DT,ETOTA,GSIGS,DE,* GEOM,JGEOM,SIGXX,NSTRMU)

IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION XK(IDSS,IDSS),XM(IDSS,IDSS),DISPT(NDEG,*),DISP(NDEG,*) DIMENSION T(NSTATS,*),DT(NSTATS,*),COORD(NCRD,*) DIMENSION ETOTA(NGENEL,*),GSIGS(NGENEL,*),DE(NGENEL,*) DIMENSION F(NDEG,*),R(NDEG,*),SIGXX(NSTRMU,*),GEOM(*), JGEOM(*)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:


NNODE is the number of nodes per element.

NDEG is the maximum number of degrees of freedom per node.

JTYPE is the user element type (negative).

DISPT is the total nodal displacements array of this element.In heat transfer, DISPT is the temperature array at which material properties were last calculated.

DISP is the incremental nodal displacements of this element.In heat transfer, DISP is the total current nodal temperatures of this element.

NDI is the number of direct components of stress/internal heat flux.

NSHEAR is the number of shear components of stress.In heat transfer, NSHEAR is zero.


IPASS Flag to indicate which pass for coupled analysis.= 1 during a stress analysis pass.= 2 during a heat transfer pass.= 3 during a fluid pass.= 4 during a Joule heating pass.= 5 during a pore pressure pass.= 6 during an electrostatic pass.= 7 during a magnetostatic pass.= 8 during an electromagnetic pass.


NGENEL is the number of generalized strains.

INTEL is the number of integration points.

COORD is the original nodal coordinates array.


IFLAG indicates what is to be returned by the user.= 1 Called by OPRESS during formation of load vector.

You return F.= 2 Called by OASEMB during formation of stiffness matrix.

You return XK,R.= 3 Called by OASMAS during formation of mass matrix.

The user returns XM.= 4 Called by OGETST during stress recovery.

The user returns R,GSIGS,DE,ETOTA,SIGXX for stress analysis pass.The user returns R, SIGXX for heat transfer pass.

= 5 Called by SCIMP during output phase. The user prints the results.

IDSS is the size of element stiffness matrix.

T is the state variables.

DT is the increment of state variables.

GEOM is the array of the geometric parameters.

JGEOM is the array of table ids for the geometric parameters.

NSTRMU is the number of stresses/heat fluxes per integration points.

Required Output:

XK is the stiffness matrix or conductivity matrix.

XM is the mass matrix or specific heat matrix.

F is the externally applied equivalent nodal loads/nodal fluxes array.

R is the internal forces/fluxes array.


316

Note that the stiffness matrix is normally symmetric. If a nonsymmetric formulation is used, the SOLVER option should be used to indicate this.

ETOTA is the total strain array.Not used in heat transfer.

GSIGS is the generalized stress array.Not used in heat transfer.

DE is the increment of strain array.Not used in heat transfer.

SIGXX is layer stresses for shell elements and is equal to GSIGS for continuum element.In the heat transfer pass, SIGXX contains the thermal gradients and the heat fluxes.


■ UNEWTN

Input of Viscosity in Flow Analysis

Description

It is possible to solve Newtonian and non-Newtonian laminar incompressible steady state fluid analyses using the R-P FLOW parameter in Marc. The UNEWTN user subroutine is used to define the viscosity at a particular spatial location. An Eulerian approach is then used to solve for the nodal velocities. This user subroutine can also be used to define the nonlinear viscosity in Navier Stokes fluid analysis when the FLUID parameter is used.

Format

User subroutine UNEWTN is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UNEWTN (N,NN,V,E,NGENS,DT,DTDL) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION E(NGENS),N(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Note: If Herrmann elements are used, the last component of E represents a rate of change of volumetric strain.

Input:




E are the components of the strain rate.

NGENS is the number of components.

DT is the temperature at the beginning of the increment.

DTDL is the increment of temperature.

Required Output:

V is the viscosity to be defined here.


318

■ URPFLO

Rigid-Plastic Flow

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to define the current yield stress as a function of the equivalent strain rate, equivalent strain, temperature, and user-defined state variables. This user subroutine is used in conjunction with the transient R-P FLOW parameter.

Format

User subroutine URPFLO is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE URPFLO(MDUM,NN,KCUS,MATUS,INC,NDI,NGENS,NCRD,+NSTAT,CPTIM,TIMINC,EBAR,ERATE,DT,DTDL,STATS,DSTATS,+COORD,YD) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION MDUM(2),STATS(NSTAT),DSTATS(NSTAT),COORD(NCRD) DIMENSION MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

MDUM(1) element number.

MDUM(2) internal element/elsto number.




MATUS(1) user material identification number.

MATUS(2) internal material identification number.


NDI number of direct components.

NGENS total number of components.



NSTAT number of state variables excluding temperature.

CPTIM time at beginning of increment.

TIMINC incremental time.

DT temperature at beginning of increment.

DTDL incremental temperature.

EBAR total equivalent strain at beginning of increment.

STATS values of state variables excluding temperature at beginning of increment.

ERATE equivalent strain rate.

COORD integration point coordinates.

Required Output:

YD equivalent stress; if not calculated here, Marc finds the value of yd from the input data.

DSTATS incremental state variables (excluding temperature).


320

■ UARRBO

Arruda-Boyce Material Model

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to redefine the constants used in the strain energy function. This data is normally entered through the ARRUDBOYCE model definition option.


Format

User subroutine UARRBO is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UARRBO(A1,A2,T,N,NN,MATUS)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION N(2),MATUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:







Required Output:

A1 = nkθ is the linear term (in the strain energy function) to be defined by the user.

A2 = N is the number of statistical links of length l in the chain between chemical crosslinks (in the strain energy function) to be defined by the user.

W nkθ 12--- I1 3–( ) 1

20N---------- I

2

19–⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ 11

1050N2

------------------- I3

127–⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ 19

7000N3

------------------- I4

181–⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ 519

673750N4

------------------------- I5

1243–⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ …+ + + + +=


■ UGENT

Gent Material Model

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to redefine the constants used in the strain energy function. This data is normally entered through the GENT model definition option.


Format

User subroutine UGENT is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UGENT(E,AI,T,N,NN,MATUS,BUKLM)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION N(2),MATUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:





MATUS(1) is the user’s material identifier.


WE6---– Im 3–( ) 1

I1 3–

Im 3–---------------–

⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞

log=


322

Required Output:

E = E is the modulus (used in the strain energy function) to be defined by the user.

AI = Im is the maximum value of first invariant (used in the strain energy function) to be defined by the user.

BUKLM is the bulk modulus K (to be defined); if not defined, BULKM = 10000.*E/6


■ UACOUS

Definition of Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to redefine the material constants of an acoustic medium (fluid) as a function of the frequency in an acoustic harmonic analysis. This data is normally entered through the ACOUSTIC model definition option.

Format

User subroutine UACOUS is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UACOUS(MDUM,FREQC,XKF,DRAG,RHOHT)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION MDUM(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

MDUM(1) is the user’s element number.

MDUM(2) is the Marc element storage number.

FREQC is the frequency in cycles per time.

Required Output:

XKF is the fluid bulk modulus to be defined by the user.

DRAG is the fluid volumetric drag to be defined by the user.

RHOHT is the fluid density to be defined by the user.


324

■ USSUBS

Superelements Not Generated by Marc

Description

This user subroutine allows you to enter stiffness matrix, mass matrix, conductivity matrix, capacity matrix, load vector, internal force vector, or output for superelements not generated by Marc.

The number of superelements and the dimension are given via SUPER parameter and the connectivity of the superelements is given via the SUPERINPUT model definition option.

Format

User subroutine USSUBS is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE USSUBS(NLEV,NSS,IC,NODSUB,NDEG,LMI,LM,

* TIME,TIMINC,INC,IPASS,* XLOAD,XDISP,XRESI,XMAT)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION LMI(NODSUB),LM(NODSUB)DIMENSION XLOAD(NDEG,NODSUB),XDISP(NDEG,NODSUB),

* XRESI(NDEG,NODSUB)DIMENSION XMAT(NDEG*NODSUB,NDEG*NODSUB)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

NLEV is the superelement level = 1.

NSS is the superelement number.


IC = 1: return XLOAD (XDISP,XRESI,XMAT not filled)= 2: return XMAT (stiffness matrix) (XLOAD,XDISP,XRESI not filled)= 3: return XRESI or if IC is reset to -3 return XMAT, the program will

calculate XRESI=XMAT*XDISPXLOAD,MXAT not filled XDISP filled

= 4: output phaseXLOAD,XRESI,XMAT not filled XDISP filled

= 5: return Xmat (mass matrix) XLOAD,XDISP,XRESI not filled= 6: return XMAT (damping matrix) XLOAD,XDISP,XRESI not filled

NODSUB is the number of nodes in the superelement.

NDEG is the number of degrees of freedom per node in the superelement.

LIM( ) is the node id’s of the superelement.

LM() is the future expansion.

TIME is the transient time at the start of the increment.

TIMINC is the incremental time period.


IPASS Flag to indicate which pass for coupled analysis.= 1 during a stress analysis pass.= 2 during a heat transfer pass.= 3 during a fluid pass - not supported.= 4 during a Joule heating pass.= 5 during a pore pressure pass.= 6 during an electrostatic pass.= 7 during a magnetostatic pass.= 8 during an electromagnetic pass.

XDISP( ) is the displacement of the superelement.

Required Output:

XLOAD( ) is the external load vector on the superelement; this is total external force.

XRESI( ) in the internal force vector for the superelementXRESI=XMAT*XDISP (if linear)

XMAT( ) is the stiffness, mass, damping matrix of the superelement.


326

■ UPYROLSL

Calculate the Rate of Decomposition

Description

This user subroutine allows you to define the rate of decomposition due to pyrolysis as an alternative to the Arrhenius law. This routine is called at Streamline Integration Point during pyrolysis if requested or at each conventional integration point if D’Arcy law model is used.

Format

User subroutine UPYROLSL is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UPYROLSL(IREG,ISTL,MATE,IEND,NCRD,XSIP,CPTIM,* DELTIM,ND,ARRPRY,PHIJN,PHIJN1,XSIPN,TEMPE,DRODT) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z) DIMENSION ARRPY(6,ND),PHIJN(ND),PHIJN1(ND)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

IREG is the region ID (Streamline model).is the element number (D’Arcy flow).

ISTL is the streamline ID (Streamline flow).is the integration point number (D’Arcy flow).

MATE is the material ID.

IEND is the flag indicating if end SIP on streamline:= -1 first point (interior)= 0 point along streamline= +1 last point (exterior)= 0 for D’Arcy flow


XSID is the coordinate of streamline integration point, or conventional integration point for D’Arcy flow.

CPTIM is the time at beginning of increment.


DELTIM is the increment in time.

ARRPRY is the coefficients.

TEMPE is the current temperature.

ND is the number of terms in Arrhenius series.

ARRPRY is the Arrhenius coefficients.

PHIJN is at beginning of the increment.

XSIPN is the rate of pyrolysis.

Required Output:

DRODT is the time gradient of solid density due to pyrolysis.

PHJN1 is at end of the increment.

φj

φj


328

■ UCOKSL

Calculate the Mass Fraction of Carbon in Pyrolysis Gas

Description

This user subroutine allows you to define the mass fraction of carbon in the pyrolysis gas as an alternative to the Arrhenius law. This routine is called at each Stream Integration Point, while coking, for coking model if requested or at each conventional integration point if D’Arcy law model is used.

Format

User subroutine UCOKSL is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UCOKSL(IREG,ISTL,MATE,IEND,NCRD,XXSIP,CPTIM,

* DELTIM,AKCGN,AKCGN1,XSICN,NC,ARRCOK,PRESSURE,TEMPE)


DIMENSION ARRCOK(4,NC),XXSIP(NCRD)

C USER RETURNS AKCGN1

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:


ISTL is the streamline id (Streamline flow).is the integration point number (D’Arcy flow).





Example

C

C EXAMPLE : THE ARRHENIUS MODEL

C

INCLUDE '../COMMON/MRCPARM'

PRESSURE=1.0D0

DKCG=-1.D0*ARRCOK(1,1)*EXP(-1.D0*ARRCOK(2,1)/(UNVGAS*TEMPE))

* *(PRESSURE*(AKCG-ARRCOK(4,1)))**ARRCOK(3,1)

AKCGN1=AKCGN+DKCG*DELTIM

XXSIP is the coordinate of streamline integration point or conventional integration point for D’Arcy flow.


DELTIM is the increment in time.

AKCGN is the mass fraction of carbon in pyrolysis gases at previous time.

XSICN is the fraction of coking.

NC is the number of Arrhenius coefficients.

ARRCOK is the coefficients.

PRESSURE is the pressure.


Required Output:

AKCGN1 is the mass fraction of carbon in pyrolysis gases at current time.


330

■ UWATERSL

Calculate the Rate of Water Evaporation

Description

This user subroutine allows you to define the rate of evaporation of the water component in the pyrolysis analysis. The water vapor created contributes to the pyrolysis gas. This user routine is an alternative to the Arrhenius law or the Sullivan and Stokes model. This routine is called at each Stream Integration Point or each conventional integration point if D’Arcy law is used, and the water drying state is less than 0.98.

Format

User subroutine UWATERSL is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UCOKSL(IREG,ISTL,MATE,IEND,NCRD,XSIP,CPTIM,

* DELTIM,ARRWVP,PHIWN,RHOL0,TEMPE,DRODT)


DIMENSION ARRWVP(4),XSIP(NCRD)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:


ISTL is the streamline ID (Streamline flow).is the integration point number (D’Arcy flow).





It may be useful to obtain the universal gas constant which is available in variable UNVGAS in COMMON MRCPARM.

XSIP is the coordinate of streamline integration point.


DELTIM increment in time.

ARRWVP(4) is the coefficients.

PHIWN is the (advancement variable of water drying) at current point, at

previous time step.

RHO10 is the initial mass density of liquid water.


Required Output:

DRODT is the time gradient of liquid density due to water drying.

φj


332

■ UPYROLEFF

Define the Effective Conductivity

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to define the effective conductivity for a material subjected to pyrolysis. This may be used as an alternative to the ATAS (linear) model or the CMA-PTIMAD (weighted average) model. This routine is called at all integration points for those materials identified on the THERMO-PORE option. The number of effective conductivities that must be defined is one for isotropic materials or between 1 and 6 depending on the level of anisotropy desired. The values of the conductivity (virgin, charred, and coked) provided already include the effects of tables, so the temperature dependence, and/or nonhomogeneous behavior is already accounted for.

Format

User subroutine UPYROLSL is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UPYROLEFF(M,N,NN,KC,IFLAG,INEED,MATE,IP,IC,IW,* XDP,XDC,PHIW,CONDEFF,ECONDVR,ECONDC,ECONDCK,ECONDL,RHO,RHON,* DT,TEE,CPTIM,DELTIM) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z) DIMENSION CONDEFF(*),ECONDVR(*),ECONDC(*),ECONDCK(*)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:


N is the elsto number.


KC is the layer number (always 1).

IFLAG 1 return conductivity - called by konduc.f.


The conductivity in ECONDVR, ECONDC, and ECONDK is stored as follows:

For :

INEED is the number of components to be returned:- 1 return 11 - 2 return 11 and 22 - 3 return 11, 12, and 22- 4 return 11, 22, and 33- 5 return 11, 12, 13, 22, 23 and 33


IP is ne.0 - pyrolysis allowed.

IC is ne.0 - coking allowed.

IW is the water model/drying allowed

XDF is the fraction charred (0 to 1)

XDC is the fraction coked (0 to 1)

PHIW is the water drying state

CONDEFF is the effective conductivity to be returned by user

ECONDVR is the virgin conductivity, evaluated at the current temperature, etc.

ECONDC is the charred conductivity, evaluated at the current temperature, etc.

ECONDK is the coked conductivity, evaluated at the current temperature, etc.

ECOND1 is the coked conductivity, evaluated at the current temperature, etc.

RHO is the array of material densities

RHON is the material density at the beginning of the increment

DT is the temperature at the beginning of the increment

TEE is the temperature at the end of the increment

CPTIM is the time at the beginning of the increment

DELTIM is the increment of time

k11 1st component

k22 2nd component

k33 3rd component

k12 4th component

k13 5th component

k23 6th component

1 virgin material

2 charred material

ρ


334

The conductivity in CONDEFF is output as follows:

For isotropic material INEED=1, and only the 1st component CONDEFF(1) needs to be returned.

3 not used

4 not used

5 not used

6 liquid data

7 coke data

k11 1st component

k12 2nd component

k13 3rd component

k22 4th component

k23 5th component

k33 6th component


■ USPCHTAB

Define Specific Heat for Simplified Pyrolysis Model

Description

This USPCHTAB user subroutine would allow the user to specify the specific heat for the simplified pyrolysis model. This routine is called at every integration point when the THERMO-PORE option indicates that the simplified model is to be used.

Format

The USPCHTAB user subroutine is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE USPCHTAB(SPHEAT,M,NN,KC,INC,NCYCLE,MATS,NSTATS,* TEMP0,DTEMP,TIME,DTIME,RANGE,IFIRST,TPYRBEG,TCOMBEND)


user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

M element number

NN integration point number

KC layer number

ING increment

NCYCLE current cycle number

MATS material id

NSTATS number of state variables

TEMP0 temperature at beginning of increment

DTEMP estimated temperature increment

TIME time at beginning of increment

DTIME time increment

RANGE lowest and highest previous temperature

IFIRST flag to indicate which curve - either 1 or 2


336

TPYRBEG temperature when pyrolysis begins

TCOMBEND temperature when combustion ends

Required Output

SPHEAT specific heat on input set to standard value from input cards


References1. Simo, J. C. and Taylor, R. L., “Quasi incompressible finite elasticity in

principal stretches. Continuum basis and numerical algorithms”, Comp. Meth. App. Mech. Engrg., 85, pp. 273-310, 1991.

2. Simo, J. C., “Algorithms for static and dynamic multiplicative plasticity that preserve the classical return mapping schemes of the infinitesimal theory”, Comp. Meth. App. Mech. Engrg., 99, pp. 61-112, 1992.


338

Chapter 4 Viscoplasticity and Generalized Plasticity User Subroutines List


ASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

CRPLAW (Viscoplastic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

NASSOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

SINCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

UCRPLW (Viscoplastic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346UVSCPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

YIEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

ZERO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

4 Viscoplasticity and Generalized Plasticity User Subroutines List


340

Chapter 4 Viscoplasticity and Generalized Plasticity User Subroutines

4 Viscoplasticity and Generalized Plasticity User Subroutines


342

The user subroutines in this chapter are used to describe viscoplastic materials or a user-defined general plasticity model. There are two numeric procedures for viscoplasticity: implicit and explicit. This is activated on the CREEP parameter. The implicit method is preferred. The generalized plasticity allows the user to develop a yield surface, equivalent stress, and flow rate that is different from one provided by Marc. Table 4-1 summarizes these routines and indicates what parameters or model definition options are required to invoke the user subroutine.

Table 4-1 Viscoplasticity and Generalized Plasticity User Subroutine Requirements

User Subroutine


Purpose

ASSOC ISOTROPIC – GEN-PLAST Definition of the direction of incremental plastic strain in generalized plasticity model.

CRPLAW CREEP Definition of inelastic strain rate for explicit viscoplasticity model.

NASSOC CREEP Definition of direction of incremental viscoplastic strain for explicit viscoplasticity model.

SINCER ISOTROPIC – GEN-PLAST Definition of fraction of increment which is elastic for generalized plasticity model.

UCRPLW CREEP Definition of complex relationships for the factors in the power law expression for the creep strain rate

UVSCPL CREEPISOTROPIC – VISCO-PLASTIC

Definition of inelastic strain rate for implicit viscoplastic model.

YIEL ISOTROPIC,ORTHOTROPIC orANISOTROPIC

Definition of yield stress.

ZERO ISOTROPIC,ORTHOTROPIC orANISOTROPIC

Definition of equivalent stress.

343CHAPTER 4Viscoplasticity and Generalized Plasticity User Subroutines

■ UVSCPL

Definition of the Inelastic Strain Rate

Description

This user subroutine is used for computing the inelastic strain increment for an elastic-viscoplastic material. This routine allows very general material laws to be entered. The user must define the inelastic strain and the stress increment.

This user subroutine is activated when the implicit creep procedure is used, and VISCO PLAS material is selected on the ISOTROPIC or ORTHOTROPIC option.

Format

User subroutine UVSCPL is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UVSCPL(YOUNG,POISS,SHEAR,B,USTRRT,ETOT,E,1 THMSTI,EELAS,S,SINC,GF,EPL,AVGINE,EQCRP,EQCPNC,YD,YD1,2 VSCPAR,DT,DTDL,CPTIM,TIMINC,XINTP,NGENS,M,NN,KCUS,MATUS,3 NDI,NSHEAR,NCRD,IANISO,NSTATS,INC,NCYCLE,LOVL,NVSPLM) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION POISS(3,2),YOUNG(3,2),B(NGENS,NGENS),1 USTRRT(NGENS),ETOT(NGENS),E(NGENS),THMSTI(NGENS),2 EELAS(NGENS),S(NGENS),SINC(NGENS),GF(NGENS),EPL(NGENS),3 AVGINE(NGENS),DT(NSTATS),DTDL(NSTATS),XINTP(NCRD),

SHEAR(3,2),VSCPAR(NVSPLM),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

YOUNG is the Young’s modulus.

POISS is the Poisson’s modulus.

SHEAR is the shear modulus.

B is the tangent elastic matrix.

ETOT is the accumulated total strain at beginning of increment.

E is the current strain increment.


344

THMSTI is the thermal strain increment.

EELAS is the accumulated elastic strain at beginning of increment.

S is the accumulated stress at beginning of increment.

EPL is the accumulated inelastic strain at beginning of increment.

EQRCP is the equivalent inelastic strain at beginning of increment.

EQCPNC is the increment equivalent inelastic strain.

YD is the flow stress at temperature t.

YDL is the flow stress at temperature t + dt.

VSCPAR is the viscoplastic data read off isotropic or orthotropic option.

DT is the state variables at beginning of increment.

DTDL is the incremental state variables.

CPTIM is the elapsed time at beginning of increment.


XINTP is the integration point coordinates.

NGENS is the number of strain components.









NCRD is the number of coordinate directions.

IANISO is the flag to indicate nonisotropic elasticity.




LOVL = 4 during stiffness formation.= 6 during residual calculation.

NVSPLM is the number of viscoplastic data read from input.

Required Output:

USTRRT is the inelastic strain rate.

SINC is the stress increment.


Note: To ensure convergence, it should be noted that the returned values of these quantities must be mutually compatible; that is, they simultaneously must satisfy within tolerance:

1. SINC = B*(E - AVGINE - THMSTI) + GF

2. the creep law employed.

The tolerance should be at least one order of magnitude smaller than the global Newton-Raphson tolerance. The values of USTRRT, AVGINE, and SINC are expected to be returned from the routine for both LOVL=4 and LOVL=6.

GF is the change in stress due to change in elastic material properties associated with DT.

AVGINE is the inelastic strain increment.


346

■ UCRPLW (Viscoplastic)

Input of Creep Factors for Power Law Implicit Creep

Description

The UCRPLW user subroutine can be used for defining complex relationships for the factors in the power law expression for the creep strain rate. This user subroutine is automatically called when the implicit creep option is used in Marc. Note that the latter is implemented for isotropic materials exhibiting power law creep. For more complex implicit creep behavior, use the UVSCPL user subroutine.

Format

User subroutine UCRPLW is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UCRPLW(CPA,CFT,CFE,CFTI,CFSTRE,CPTIM,TIMINC,

* EQCP,DT,DTDL,MDUM,NN,KCUS,MATUS) C CREEP STRAIN RATE = CPA*CFT*CFE*CFTI*(STRESS**CFSTRE) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z) DIMENSION MDUM(*),MATUS(2), KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN

END

where:

Input:

CPTIM time at the beginning of the increment

TIMINC time Increment

EQCP creep strain at the beginning of the increment

DT temperature at the beginning of the increment

DTDL incremental temperature

MDUM(1) user element number

MDUM(2) internal element number

NN integration point number




MATUS(1) user material identifier.

MATUS(2) internal material identifier.

Required Output

CPA creep constant

CFT temperature factor

CFE creep strain factor

CFTI time factor

CFSTRE stress exponent


348

■ CRPLAW (Viscoplastic)

Input of Explicit Viscoplastic Strain Rate Law

Description

The CRPLAW user subroutine can also be used for calculating the viscoplastic behavior. All the creep quantities are treated as viscoplastic strain quantities when the appropriate flag is set on the CREEP parameter.

The basic information on the use of this subroutine can be found in Chapter 3 of this manual. Additionally, the user can use common block VISCPL.

The variables in common block VISCPL are:

Example

The following is a simple viscoplastic strain rate law that depends on the differences between the current stress state and the static yield stress, raised to the nth power. (Note that T(1), the current equivalent stress also includes Mohr-Coulomb terms when the option is flagged.)

where:

YD is the equivalent stress at first yield.

YD1 is the equivalent yield stress including current work hardening and temperature effects.

YD2 is the equivalent stress for ORNL tenth cycle yield.

YD21 is the equivalent stress including current work hardening and temperature effects for ORNL tenth cycle yield.

YDZER is the equivalent yield stress including Mohr-Coulomb terms (defaults to YD1).

is the current total equivalent stress.

is the current equivalent yield stress including workhardening, temperature effects and Mohr-Coulomb terms.

ε·

c σ σy–( )n=

σ

σy


This is programmed as follows; for n=2 SUBROUTINE CRPLAW(EQCP,EQCPNC,STR,CRPE,T,DT,TIMINC,CPTIM,M,+NN,KCUS,MATUS,NDI,NSHEAR) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION T(1),DT(1),STR(1),CRPE(1),MATUS(2),KCUS(2) C = 0.01/(YD*YD) S = T(1) - YDZER EQCPNC = 0.0 IF(S.LT.0.0)RETURN S=S*S EQCPNC=C*S*TIMINC RETURN END

is the index of the power law.

is the constant that depends on the index n. Here the strain rate equation is made.

dimensionless in stress by setting where is the equivalent

stress at first yield.

n

c

c 0.01 σnyo⁄= σyo


350

■ NASSOC

Input of a Nonassociated Flow Law

Description

The NASSOC user subroutine allows the user to calculate a strain increment with a flow rule differing from the normality rule of plasticity, which is the default used by Marc. This must be activated by the CREEP parameter.

Format

User subroutine NASSOC is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE NASSOC(EQCPNC,STOT,SINC,E,1 AMOHR,NGENS,NDI,T,TZERO) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION STOT(NGENS),SINC(NGENS),E(NGENS),T(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

EQCPNC is the increment of the equivalent viscoplastic strain.

STOT is the current stress array.

E(I) is the Ith viscoplastic strain increment. It is later set equal to EQCPNC*SINC(I) in Marc; thus, it is not set in this subroutine.

AMOHR is the Mohr-Coulomb parameter entered in the ISOTROPIC option (third field).

NGENS is the number of stresses or strains.


T(1) is the current equivalent stress.

T(2) is the current mean hydrostatic stress.

TZERO is the equivalent stress including Mohr-Coulomb terms, temperature and work hardening effects.


It is often useful to have the information regarding the yield surface. This can be obtained from common block VISCPL

yd, yd1, yd2, yd21, ydzer

where:

Example

The following example calculates a nonassociated flow rule for a Mohr-Coulomb problem. The default flow rule is the one associated with the von Mises yield criterion.

SUBROUTINE NASSOC(EQCPNC,STOT,SINC,E, + AMOHR,NGENS,NDI,T,TZERO) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION STOT(1),SINC(1),E(1),T(1) NSHEAR=NGENS-NDI DO 1 I=1,NDI1 SINC(I)=0.5*3.0*(STOT(1)-T(2)) TR=1./TZERO DO 2 I=1,NDI2 SINC(I)=SINC(I)*TR RETURN END

Required Output:

SINC is the dimensionless flow directions . The current values in this subroutine

are associated with the yield criterion used. The user are free to vary the flow rule in NASSOC by changing SINC.

YD is the equivalent stress at first yield.

YD1 is the equivalent yield stress including current work hardening and temperature effects.

YD2 is the equivalent stress for ORNL tenth cycle yield.

YD21 is the equivalent stress including current work hardening and temperature effects for ORNL tenth cycle yield.

YDZER is the equivalent yield stress including Mohr-Coulomb terms (defaults to YD1).

∂σ∂σ-------


352

■ ZERO

Calculation of Equivalent Stress

Description

The ZERO user subroutine is used to calculate the equivalent yield stress based on the current total stresses. The ZERO user subroutine in Marc applies the von Mises yield criterion as a default. The user can substitute another yield criterion by writing a new ZERO user subroutine. Mohr-Coulomb models specified in the ISOTROPIC option should not be used when ZERO user subroutine is used because of the danger of taking into account the effects of hydrostatic pressure twice.

Format

User subroutine ZERO is written with the following headers:REAL*8 FUNCTION ZERO(NDI,NSHEAR,T,IORT,IANISO,YRDIR,YRSHR,

* AMM,AO)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION T(1),YRDIR(3),YRSHR(3),AMM(3)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

NDI is the number of direct components of stress.NSHEAR is the number of shear components of stress.T(I) is the Ith component of stress. IORT is the flag indicating if curvilinear coordinates are used.

This is 1 for element types 4, 8, and 24.IANISO is the flag indicating if anisotropy is used. YRDIR are the components for Hill’s anisotropic plasticity. YRSHR are the shear components for Hill’s anisotropic plasticity.AMM is the metric if curvilinear coordinates are used. AO is the metric scale factor if curvilinear coordinates are used.

Required Output:

ZERO is the equivalent yield stress.


■ YIEL

Calculation of Current Yield

Description

The YIEL user subroutine is used to define the yield stress based on the current work hardening and other state variables.

Format

User subroutine YIEL is written with the following headers:REAL*8 FUNCTION YIEL(M,NN,KCUS,YIELD,IFIRST,DT,EPLAS,ERATE,MATS,JPROPS)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

M is the element numbers.NN is the integration point number.KCUS(1) is your layer number (always 1 for continuum elements).KCUS(2) is the internal layer number (always 1 for continuum element).YIELD is the yield stress entered as data in the ISOTROPIC option.IFIRST =1 Calculate yield stress.

=2 Calculate 10th cycle yield stress (ORNL only).=3 Calculate 100th cycle yield stress (ORNL only).

DT is the current temperatureEPLAS is the total equivalent plastic strain. Note that this is implied by the yield

criterion used in the ZERO user subroutine (or the Mohr-Coulomb yield criterion, if that is used).

ERATE is the equivalent plastic strain rate. Not available for viscoplasticity.MATS is the material id.JPROPS is the table id associated with the yield.

Required Output:

YIEL is the current magnitude of the yield stress.


354

■ ASSOC

Input of Associated Flow Law

Description

When used in conjunction with the generalized plasticity option (defined in the ISOTROPIC option), the ASSOC user subroutine can be used to define the flow direction for plasticity. The default is the associated flow law with the von Mises (J2) yield surface.

Format

User subroutine ASSOC is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE ASSOC(STOT,SINC,SC,T,NGENS,NDI,NSHEAR,N,NN,KCUS)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION STOT(NGENS),SINC(NGENS),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

STOT is the current stress array.

SC is the trace of stress tensor (three times hydrostatic pressure).

T is the equivalent stress.


NDI is the number of shear stress components.





Required Output:

SINCis the flow direction to be defined by the user, where is the

equivalent stress T.

∂σ∂σ------- σ⋅ σ


■ SINCER

User Subroutine for Improving Accuracy

Description

The SINCER user subroutine can be used to define how much an “elastic” stress increment exceeds the yield stress. This allows Marc to accurately take large increments such that the material goes from elastic to elastic-plastic. The user returns the value of FPLAS, which is the fraction of the stress increment beyond the yield surface. This routine should only be used if a yield surface other than the von Mises (J2) is used in conjunction with the generalized plasticity option (defined in the ISOTROPIC option).

Format

User subroutine SINCER is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE SINCER(FPLAS,SINC,STOT,NGENS)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION SINC(NGENS), STOT(NGENS)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

SINC is the estimated elastic increment of stress.

STOT is the stress at the beginning of the increment.


Required Output:

FPLAS is the fraction of stress increment beyond the yield stress to be defined the user.


356

Chapter 5 Viscoelasticity User Subroutines List


CRPVIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

HOOKVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

TRSFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

5 Viscoelasticity User Subroutines List


358

Chapter 5 Viscoelasticity User Subroutines

5 Viscoelasticity User Subroutines


360

This chapter describes user subroutines used for viscoelastic analysis. There are two procedures available. The explicit procedure uses the CRPVIS user subroutine to describe a generalized Kelvin model. The implicit procedure uses a hereditary integral approach and is the preferred choice. Table 5-1 summarizes these routines and indicates what parameters or model definition options are required to invoke the user subroutine.

Table 5-1 Viscoplasticity User Subroutines Requirements

User Subroutine


Purpose

CRPVIS VISCO ELAS Definition of generalized Kelvin model using explicit procedure.

HOOKVI VISCELORTH Definition of anisotropic viscoelastic material law for a particular relaxation time.

TRSFAC VISCELPROP orVISCELORTH orVISCELMOON orVISCELOGDEN andSHIFT FUNCTION

Definition of shift function for thermo-rheologically simple material.

361CHAPTER 5Viscoelasticity User Subroutines

■ CRPVIS

Viscoelasticity – Generalized Kelvin Material Behavior

Description

In addition to the nonlinear Maxwell type model allowed in the CREEP option, a general Kelvin model can be included by requesting it on the CREEP parameter. In this case, Marc assumes an additional creep strain , governed by

where:

and the total strain is:

where:

[A] and [B] are defined by the user in the user subroutine described below,

are the deviatoric stress components

are the thermal strain components.

are the elastic strain components (instantaneous response).

are the plastic strain components.

are the creep strains defined via CRPLAW and VSWELL user subroutines and using the CREEP option.

are the Kelvin model strain components as defined above.

εi jK

ddt-----εi j

K AijklSkl BijklεklK–=

sij si j σi j δi j

σkk

3---------–=

εi j εi je εi j

p εi jc εi j

K εi jth+ + + +=

εi jth

εi je

εi jp

εi jc

εi jK


362

Format

User subroutine CRPVIS is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE CRPVIS(CRPR,TSIG,SINC,AE,BE,NGENS,1 DT,DTDL,N,NN,KCUS,MATUS,NDI,NSHEAR,TIME,TIMINC) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION CRPR(1),TSIG(1),SINC(1),AE(NGENS,NGENS), 1 BE(NGENS,NGENS),DT(1),DTDL(1),N(2),MATUS(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

CRPR are the Kelvin creep strain components.

TSIG(1) is the second invariant of the deviatoric stress = .

TSIG(2) is the hydrostatic stress = .

SINC are the deviatoric stress components .

NGENS is the number of stress (strain) components.

DT are the total state variables at this point (temperature first).

DTDL are the increments of state variables at this point during this step of the solution.






MATUS(1) is the user’s material identifier.




TIME is the total time.


32---si jsi j⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ 1 2⁄

13---σkk

si j( )


Only AE and BE are to be defined by the user – the other variables are provided to assist in calculations, for example when a nonlinear Kelvin model is used.

This user subroutine is called at each integration point of each element when necessary, when the VISCO ELAS parameter is present. Note that the use of the VISCO ELAS parameter also requires the use of the CREEP option in the model definition data as well. The CREEP option is required to set the tolerance control for the maximum strain in any increment. In viscoelastic two-dimensional analysis, the stress does not change appreciably so that all time steps are controlled by the maximum increment in strain. The recommended and default value of this strain increment is 0.005 of the total maximum strain. Note that this value is ten times smaller than the default value for normal creep problems. Because of the use of the CREEP option, Maxwell models can be included in series with the Kelvin model. The ordering of stress and strain components is given in Marc Volume B: Element Library for each element type.

When used with doubly curved shell elements (shell elements 4, 8, and 24), the above relation is written in a mixed formulation:

(ε α β

K) = A α β

γ δ S γ

δ - B α β

γ δ

Kα,β etc. = 1,2

with two shear components stored, , then .

Required Output:

AE is the matrix above, to be defined here by the user.

BE is the matrix above, to be defined here by the user.

Aijkl

Bijkl

ddt----- εγ

d

ε12 ε2

1


364

■ TRSFAC

Define a Shift Function for Thermo-Rheologically Simple (T.R.S.) Material Behavior

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to define the shift function for the relaxation function.

A description of T.R.S. material behavior is given in Marc Volume A: User Information. The user is reminded that this option is only available in conjunction with the hereditary integral form of viscoelastic constitutive representation. The use of this user subroutine to define a shift function for a particular viscoelastic material group is indicated by inserting a negative value in the first field of block 2 in the SHIFT FUNCTION model definition option.

Marc proceeds to compute the increment of pseudo- or reduced time Δε (x, t) according to the relationship:

where the shift factor, B, is a function of the spatially and time dependent temperature, T(x, t). A five-point Simpson’s rule is used to numerically integrate this expression.

In this subroutine, the user is expected to define the shift function, φ, which is the logarithm of the shift factor: that is,

The user subroutine is called five times at each point. These points can be the centroids of the elements or each integrating point if the ALL POINTS parameter has been invoked.

Δε x t,( ) 10B T x t1,( )[ ]dt1tt Δ t+( )∫=

φ x t,( )[ ] Log10 B T x t,( )[ ]{ }–=


Format

User subroutine TRSFAC is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE TRSFAC(SHFTLG,MATV,NSHFT,N,NN,KCUS,DT,DTDL,TGLASS,*CPTIM,HXITOT,TIMINC,TINT) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION DT(1),DTDL(1),N(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

The following parameters are passed into this user subroutine and must not be redefined:

Input:

MATV is the viscoelastic material group identifier or number associated with the point, x, currently being considered.

NSHFT is the negative number associated with the particular user-defined shift function for the viscoelastic material group, MATV. This number was specified in the first field of the second data line in the SHIFT FUNCTION model definition option.



NN is the current integrating point number (or centroidal point if the ALL POINTS parameter is not used).



DT is the total temperature at this point corresponding to the beginning of the current increment.

DTDL is the current incremental change in temperature for this point.

TGLASS is the reference or glassy transition temperature used in defining the shift function.

CPTIM is the total creep or viscoelastic time up to the beginning of this increment.

HXITOT is the total pseudo- or reduced-time at this point, corresponding to the beginning of the increment.

TIMINC is the increment of real time.


366

TINT is a linearly interpolated value of the total temperature at one of the five integrating stations between the beginning and end of the increment. This is the variable which should be used in computing the value of the shift function.

Required Output:

SHFTLG is the logarithm of the shift factor, φ, which must be defined by the user.


■ HOOKVI

User-defined Anisotropic Viscoelasticity

Description

The user can specify the time dependent properties of an orthotropic material through the VISCELORTH model definition option. The user can then modify this data by use of the HOOKVI user subroutine which is automatically called for every material defined in that option.

Format

User subroutine HOOKVI is called with the following header codes:SUBROUTINE HOOKVI (M,NN,KCUS,ITERM,B,DT,DTDL,E,PR,G)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION B(6,6),DT(1),DTDL(1),E(3),PR(3),G(3),M(2)DIMENSION KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:M(1) is the user’s element number.M(2) is the internal element number.NN is the integration point number.KCUS(1) is your layer number (always 1 for continuum elements).KCUS(2) is the internal layer number (always 1 for continuum element).ITERM is the viscoelastic series number.DT is the current temperature.DTDL is the current increment in temperature.E is vector of time dependent Young’s moduli input in the

VISCELORTH option.PR is the vector of time dependent Poisson’s ratios input in the

VISCELORTH option.G is the vector of time dependent shear moduli given in the

VISCELORTH option. Required Output:B is the user-defined 6 x 6 matrix of viscoelastic time dependent constants

for this element and series number.


368

Chapter 6 Geometry Modifications User Subroutines List


MAP2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

REBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

UACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387UACTUAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408UADAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394UADAP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399UADAPBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400UCOORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393UCRACK_PARIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403UCRACKGROW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395UFCONN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375UFRORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390UFXORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374UMAKNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380UPNOD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

6 Geometry Modifications User Subroutines List


370


URCONN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391USHELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406USIZEOUTL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378USPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392USPLIT_MESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397UTHICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407UTRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Chapter 6 Geometry Modifications User Subroutines

6 Geometry Modifications User Subroutines


372

The user subroutines described in this section are provided to allow the user to define the initial geometry of the finite element mesh, or to change the mesh due to rezoning or rigid plastic analyses. Often these user subroutines are used to customize already existing meshes. The UTRANS user subroutine is a powerful way to provide transformations to the degrees of freedom of a node. Table 6-1 summarizes these routines and indicates what parameters or model definition options are required to invoke the user subroutine.

Table 6-1 Geometry Modifications User Subroutines Requirements


Purpose

MAP2D MESH2DMAPPER

Define the coordinates of key boundary nodes for mesh generation.

REBAR ELEMENTS(rebar element types)

Define the orientation and effective thickness of the elements.

UACTIVE Activate or deactivate elements.

UACTUAT GEOMETRY Define the length of the actuator element.

UADAP ADAPTIVE (parameter)ADAPTIVE (model definition option)

Define a user-defined error criterion for adaptive meshing.

UADAP2 ADAPTIVE (parameter)ADAPTIVE (model definition option)

Define unrefinement for adaptive meshing.

UADAPBOX ADAPTIVE (parameter)ADAPTIVE (model definition option)

User-defined region for local adaptive meshing.

UCOORD ADAPTIVE (parameter)ADAPTIVE (model definition option)

Describe of the location of newly created nodes.

UCRACK_PARIS VCCT Defines the increment of crack growth.

UFCONN UFCONN Modifies the connectivity of an element.

UCRACKGROW VCCT Allows definition of the crack growth direction and crack growth increment.

UFRORD REZONINGREZONEUFRORD

Modify the coordinates of a node during rezoning.

UFXORD UFXORD Modify the initial nodal coordinates.

UMAKNET ADAPT GLOBAL User-defined standalone mesher

373CHAPTER 6Geometry Modifications User Subroutines

UPNOD R-P FLOW Update the nodal coordinates in a rigid plastic analysis using the Eulerian procedure.

URCONN UFCONN Modify the connectivity of an element during rezoning.

USHELL GEOMETRY Define the integration point thickness for shell elements.

USIZEOUTL ADAPT GLOBAL Define refinement boxes with different element edge length on the 2-D outlines for remeshing.

USPLIT ADAPT GLOBAL Define where to split a continuous deformable body into two separate parts.

USPLIT_MESH ADAPT GLOBAL Define edges, nodes, or faces to split up a mesh.

UTHICK NODAL THICKNESS Define the initial thickness at the nodes for shell elements.

UTRANS UTRANFORM Define a transformation to be applied to the degrees of freedom at a node.

Table 6-1 Geometry Modifications User Subroutines Requirements (continued)


Purpose


374

■ UFXORD

Coordinate Generation or Modification

Description

The UFXORD user subroutine can be used to modify (or expand) coordinates input through use of the COORDINATES option, or as an internal coordinate generator. The user must input the UFXORD model definition option, followed by a block giving the nodes for which UFXORD is used. Marc calls UFXORD for each node in the list, so that the coordinates of that node can be modified or generated. The UFXORD option can be repeated as many times as necessary.

Format

User subroutine UFXORD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UFXORD (XORD, NCRD, N)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XORD (NCRD)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

This user subroutine is most commonly used with shell or beam elements (for example, elements 4, 8, 13, 15) where the full coordinate set is usually generated on the basis of reduced set of coordinates. See, for example, the description of the FXORD option in Marc Volume A: User Information. The user can also use this routine to generate special coordinate systems (for example, cylindrical or spherical) or to convert from special coordinate systems to a rectangular system.

Input:



Required Output:

XORD is the array of coordinates in the Nth node and is passed in containing coordinates previously generated at the Nth node by COORDINATES, FXORD or UFXORD options.


■ UFCONN

Connectivity Generation or Modification

Description

The UFCONN user subroutine can be used to modify (or expand) input given through use of the CONNECTIVITY option, or as an internal connectivity generator. The user must input the UFCONN model definition option, followed by a block giving the elements for which UFCONN is used. Marc calls UFCONN for each element in the series, so that the connectivity of that element can be modified or generated. The UFCONN option can be repeated as many times as necessary.

Format

User subroutine UFCONN is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UFCONN(J,ITYPE,LM,NNODMX)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION LM(1)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

LM is passed in containing the connectivity of the Jth element already generated by previous CONNECTIVITY, UFCONN, or other generators. Similarly, ITYPE is the element type if previously defined. The user can modify or define ITYPE or LM in

Input:

J is the element number.

ITYPE is the element type.

LM is the array of nodes making up the element.

NNODMX is the maximum number of nodes in an element.

Required Output:




376

this routine. Note there is no checking to determine if ITYPE has been defined on the SIZING or ELEMENTS parameter, or if node numbers are in the range

.1 N NUMNP≤ ≤


■ MAP2D

Boundary Node Coordinates Modification in Mesh2D

Description

The MAP2D user subroutine can be used to modify coordinates input for the boundary nodes in MESH2D by the BOUNDARY option. The user must input the MAPPER option as part of the two-dimensional mesh generation. Marc calls MAP2D once, so that the coordinates of all the boundary nodes can be modified or generated.

Format

User subroutine MAP2D is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE MAP2D(NNO,X,Y)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION X(NNO),Y(NNO)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

NNO is the number of boundary nodes.

Required Output:

X and Y are the user-defined coordinates of the boundary nodes.


378

■ USIZEOUTL

Local Refinement Definition for 2-D Remeshing with Advancing Front Mesher

C-44 Description

This user subroutine allows users to define refinement boxes with different element edge length on the 2-D outlines for remeshing. The position of the refinement box can be attached to the current reference center of any rigid body. Therefore, if the body is moving, the box can move along with it. The position of the refinement box can be attached to a nodal position as long as the node number does not change during the analysis.

Format

User subroutine USIZEOUTL is written with the following header lines:

SUBROUTINE USIZEOUTL(NBODY,IDIERE,XCENT,YCENT,INC,CPTIM,& ELLEN,ESIZE,XYZ,NUMOUT)

IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION ESIZE(*),XYZ(2,*),XCENT(NBODY),YCENT(NBODY)DIMENSION POS(5)

user coding RETURN END

where:

Input:

NBODY is the number of contact bodies (= 0, if there is no contact).

IDIERE is the current body number for remeshing.

XCENT is the x reference center of rigid contact bodies.

YCENT is the y reference center of rigid contact bodies.


CPTIM is the current analysis time.

ELLEN is the input element length for remeshing.


XZY is the outline point coordinates.

NUMOUT is the number of the outline points.

Required Output:

ESIZE is the edge length array on the outline.


380

■ UMAKNET

User-defined Remeshing Routine

Description

This subroutine is used as user-defined standalone mesher. It cannot be used to replace the internal 2-D overlay mesher. The routine can be used to generate 2-D (quad) and 3-D (hexahedral). For 2-D, the correct t18 file needs to be output. For 3-D, the correct feb file needs to be output.

Examples

Userguide_auto/user_extru2d.mfd and user_extru3d.mfd. The user subroutines are user_extru2d.f and user_extru3d.f, respectively.

Format

SUBROUTINE UMAKNET(IDO,IFLAG,NCRDMX,NDEGMX,NUMNP,NUMEL,NDEG,& NCRD,IEL_TYPE,NNODMX,NUMELMX,NELTEAB,& XORD,DISP,IELCON,IELTAB,FILENAME)INCLUDE '../COMMON/IMPLICIT'DIMENSION xord(ncrdmx,*),disp(ndegmx,*),ieltab(neltab,*)DIMENSION ielcon(nnodmx,*)IFLAG=1

user codingRETURNEND

where:

Input:

ido=2 is the 2-D remeshing.

ido=3 is the 3-D remeshing.

iel_type is the element type.

nnodmx is the maximum number of nodes per element.

ncrdmx is the maximum number of coordinate components.

ndegmx is the maximum number of degrees of freedom per node.


t18 file for 2-D or Axisymmetric - Fixed Format

Format DataTypeFree EntryFixed

Format

1st data block

1-10 A Enter the word "extended".

2nd data block

1-20 A Enter the words "connectivity change".

3rd data block

1-10 I Enter 0.

4th data block

1-10 I Enter element number.

11-20 I Enter 11.

numnp is the total number of nodes.

numel is the total number of elements.

numelmx is the maximum number of elements.

neltab is the size of the array ieltab.

ndeg is the number of degrees of freedom.

ncrd is the number of coordinate components (2d=2, 3d=3).

xord(ncrdmx,*) is the nodal coordinates.

disp(ndegmx,*) is the nodal displacement.

ieltab(neltab,*) is the element group information.

ielcon(nnodmx,*) is the current element connectivity.

filename is the remeshing filename.

Output:

iflag if return 0, no user subroutine not usedif 1, user subroutine is used.

t18 file with filename if 2-D.

feb file with filename if 3-D.


382


21-30 I First node number of element.

31-40 I Second node number of element.

41-50 I Third node number of element.

51-60 I Fourth node number of element.

5th data block

1-20 A Enter the words "coordinate change".

6th data block

1-10 I Enter 0.

Repeat the 7th data block for each node.

7th data block

1-10 I Enter node number.

11-30 E Enter:

x-coordinate for 2-D

z-coordinate for axisymmetric.

31-50 E Enter:

y-coordinate for 2-D

r-coordinate for axisymmetric.

8th data block

1-10 A Enter the word "exit".

9th data block

1-10 A Enter the word "usdata".


feb file format - fixed format


Format

1st data block

1-10 A Enter the word "extended".

2nd data block

1-10 A Enter the words “connectivity change”.

3rd data block

1-10 I Enter 0.

Repeat the 4th data block for each element.

4th data block

1-10 I Enter element number.

11-20 I Enter 7.

21-30 I First node number of element.

31-40 I Second node number of element.

41-50 I Third node number of element.

51-60 I Fourth node number of element.

61-70 I Fifth node number of element.

71-80 I Sixth node number of element.

81-90 I Seventh node number of element.

91-100 I Eighth node number of element.

5th data block

1-20 A Enter the words "coordinate change".

6th data block

1-10 I Enter 0.

Repeat the 7th data block for each node.


384


7th data block

1-10 I Enter node number.

11-30 E Enter x-coordinate.

31-50 E Enter y-coordinate.

51-70 E Enter z-coordinate.

8th data block

1-10 A Enter the words "end option".


■ UPNOD

Update Nodal Positions in Flow Solutions

Description

This user subroutine is used in conjunction with Eulerian flow solutions (for example, R-P FLOW parameter) to update the mesh after a velocity field has been found. The user can access the velocity field and re-define the nodal coordinates. The user subroutine is called in a loop over all the nodes in the mesh at the end of convergent step of the flow calculation. This user subroutine should not be used in conjunction with the CONTACT option.

Format

User subroutine UPNOD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UPNOD (XORD,VEL,NCRD,NDEG,NODE)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSIONAL XORD (NCRD), VEL(NDEG)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

VEL is the array of current velocities at this node.

NCRD is the size of the XORD array (number of coordinates per node).

NDEG is the size of the VEL array (number of velocity components per node).


Required Output:

XORD is the array of coordinates at this node, to be redefined in this routine as required.


386

Example

A typical user subroutine UPNOD for use with higher order elements would be: SUBROUTINE UPNOD(XORD,VEL,NCRD,NODE) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION XORD(NCRD),VEL(NDEG) TIME= DO 5 I=1,NCRD XORD(I)=XORD(I)+VEL(I)*TIME5 CONTINUE RETURN END


■ UACTIVE

Activate or Deactivate Elements

Description

The UACTIVE user subroutine can be used to either activate or deactivate elements in the model. The user subroutine is called at the beginning of the analysis and at the end of each increment. A deactivated element does not contribute to the load, mass, stiffness, or internal force calculation. If an element is activated after previously being deactivated, the user can specify if the material is to come back in its previous state or in a modified state.

Format

User subroutine UACTIVE is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UACTIVE(M,N,MODE,IRSTSTR,IRSTSTN,INC,TIME,TIMINC)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION MODE(3)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

M(1) is the element number.

M(2) is the master element number in an adaptive analysis.

N is the internal elsto number.

NN is the internal element number.



TIMINC is the incremental time.

Required Output:

MODE(1) -1 deactivate element and remove element from post file.

-11 deactivate element and keep element on post file

2 leave in current status.


388

1 activate element and add element to post file

11 activate element and keep status on post file.

MODE(2) 1 only activate/deactivate mechanical part in coupled

2 only activate/deactivate at the thermal part in coupled

MODE(3) 0 activation/deactivation at the end of increment

1 activation/deactivation at the beginning of increment

IRSTSTR set to 1 to reset stresses to zero.

IRSTSTN set to 1 to reset strains to zero.


■ REBAR

Input of Rebar Positions, Areas and Orientations

Description

This user subroutine is used in conjunction with the single strain rebar elements (23, 46, 47, 48, 142-148, 165-170). See the description of these elements for details of the use of this user subroutine. Any nonzero value defined in the this subroutine overwrites the corresponding value defined by the REBAR model definition option if it is used with this user subroutine.

Format

User subroutine REBAR is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE REBAR (N,NN,T,PR,TR,A)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION A(3),NN(3)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Note: Three entries are to be defined in A in all cases.

Input:


NN(1) is the integration point number.

NN(2) is the layer number.

NN(3) is the integration point number in this layer.

T,PR,TR,A are to be defined by the user.

Required Output:

T is the nominal size in thickness direction.

PR is the relative position of rebar layer with respect to T.Marc uses the ratio PR/T to position the rebar layer in the thickness direction.

TR is the equivalent thickness of rebar.

A is the direction cosines of the rebar.


390

■ UFRORD

Rezoning Coordinate Generation or Modification

Description

The UFRORD user subroutine can be used to modify (or expand) coordinate change input in a rezoning analysis. The user must input the UFRORD rezoning option, followed by a block giving a list of nodes for which UFRORD is used. Marc calls UFRORD for each node in the list, so that the coordinates for that node can be modified or generated. The UFRORD rezoning option can be repeated as many times as necessary.

Format

User subroutine UFRORD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UFRORD(XORD,NCRD,DISPT,NDEG,N)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XORD(NCRD),DISPT(NDEG)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:


DISPT is the total displacements of node N.



Required Output:

XORD is the coordinates of node N which should be generated or modified in this user subroutine.


■ URCONN

Rezoning Connectivity Generation or Modification

Description

The URCONN user subroutine can be used to modify (or expand) input given through use of the CONNECTIVITY CHANGE option, or as an internal connectivity generator. The user must input the URCONN rezoning option, followed by a block giving the elements for which URCONN is used. Marc calls URCONN for each element in the series, so that the connectivity of that element can be modified or generated.

Format

User subroutine URCONN is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE URCONN(J,ITYPE,LM,NNODMX)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION LM(1)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

LM is passed in containing the connectivity of the Jth element already generated by previous CONNECTIVITY, UFCONN, CONNECTIVITY CHANGE, or other generators. Similarly, ITYPE is the element type if previously defined. The user can modify or define ITYPE or LM in this routine. Note there is no checking to determine if ITYPE has been defined on the SIZING or ELEMENTS parameter, or if node numbers are in the range .

Input:

J is the element number.

NNODMX is the maximum number of nodes in an element.

Required Output:



1 N NUMNP≤ ≤


392

■ USPLIT

User-defined Criterion to Split a Two-dimensional Body

C-45 Description

This subroutine is used to split a continuous deformable body into two separate parts. Currently, the criterion for splitting the body is defined by the thickness and the splitting is done through global remeshing. When the thickness of the body is less than the value given in the subroutine, the body is split into two parts and remeshed. This user subroutine can only be used with 2-D Advancing Front and Delaunay meshers.

Format

User subroutine USPLIT is written with the following headers:

SUBROUTINE USPLIT (IDIERE,IFLAG,SPLIT0) implicit real*8 (a-h,o-z)C THIS ROUTINE DEFINES MATERIAL SPLIT USER CONTROLC METHOD 1:C IFLAG=1 : BODY SPLIT DUE TO THIN SECTIONC SPLIT0 - MINIMUM THICKNESS TO AVOID SPLITC IF SPLIT0=0, NO BODY SPLIT CHECK RETURN END

where:

Input:

IDIERE is the body number.

Required Output:

IFLAG=1 a body is split by checking the thickness or distance of any pair of the opposite segments.

SPLIT0 the distance value at which the body will be split.


■ UCOORD

Relocate Nodes Created During Adaptive Meshing

Description

The UCOORD user subroutine can be used to define the location of a new node created due to local adaptive meshing. The default if this routine is not used is to put the newly created node geometrically half way between the old nodes. This user subroutine is called for each new node created.

Format

User subroutine UCOORD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UCOORD(XORD, NCRD, INOD, LM, NNOD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XORD(NCRD,1),LM(1)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Update XORD(J,INOD) if desired.

Input:


INOD is the node number of new node.

LM(I) is the nodes on which INOD is depending.

NNOD is the number of nodes on which INOD is depending.= 2 middle of edge between LM(1) and LM(2).= 3 center of triangle LM(1), LM(2), LM(3).= 4 center of plane LM(1), LM(2), LM(3), LM(4).= 4 center of tetrahedral 4 LM(1), LM(2), LM(3), LM(4).= 8 center of brick LM(1), LM(2), LM(3), LM(4), LM(5), LM(6), LM(7), LM(8).

Required Output:

XORD(J,I) is the current coordinate j of node i.


394

■ UADAP

User-defined Error Criterion

Description

The UADAP user subroutine can be used to define an error criterion for local adaptive meshing. The value of USERCR must be returned. It is a measure of the quality of this element. If the value of USERCR is greater than f1 * user_max or greater than f2, the element refines.

Note that the f1 and f2 must be specified on the ADAPTIVE model definition option. User_max is the largest value of USERCR over all of the elements.

Format

User subroutine UADAP is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UADAP(MM,XORD,DSXT,NCRDMX,NDEGMX,LM,NNODE,USERCR)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XORD(NCRDMX,*),DSXT(NDEGMX,*),LM(*)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

MM is the user’s element number.

XORD is the original coordinates.

DSXT is the total displacements.

NCRDMX is the maximum number of coordinates per node.

NDEGMX is the maximum number of degrees of freedom per node.

LM is the node numbers of this element.

NNODE is the number of nodes per element.

Required Output:

USERCR is the user error criteria to be defined here.


■ UCRACKGROW

Definition of Crack Growth Direction and Crack Growth Increment for the VCCT Option

Description

This user subroutine allows you to define the crack growth direction and crack growth increment when using the VCCT model definition option. The routine is called at the end of each increment if the VCCT option is used. The crack growth direction can be defined both for 2-D and 3-D and is available on the post file. Both the crack growth direction and the crack growth increment are used for crack propagation if this option is flagged in the VCCT option.

The routine is called once for each crack tip node of each crack.

Format

User subroutine UCRACKGROW is written with the following header lines:

SUBROUTINE UCRACKGROW(G1,G2,G3,DIR,CTOD,TRANSF,GROWINC,& NODE,LCRACK,ICFN,INC,TIME, TIMEINC)

IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION DIR(3),CTOD(3),TRANSF(3,3)

user coding RETURN END

where:

Input:

G1,G2,G3 are the three modes of the energy release rate Gtot=abs(G1)+abs(G2)+abs(G3)

DIR is the estimated growth direction in the local crack tip system calculated by Marc. Can be modified in this routine.

CTOD is the crack tip opening displacement in the local crack tip system.

TRANSF is transformation matrix between the local crack tip system and the global system.

GROWINC is the initial crack growth increment given in the VCCT input option.

NODE is the user node number of the current crack tip.


396

LCRACK is current crack number.

ICFN is index of the crack tip node in the current crack front. For 2-D and 3-D, shells always equal to 1.


TIME is the current analysis time.

TIMEINC is the current time increment.

Required Output:

DIR is the estimated crack growth direction.

GROWINC is the crack growth increment.


■ USPLIT_MESH

User Subroutine for Splitting Up a Mesh

Description

For 2-D and shells: enter a list of edges where the mesh should be split. The mesh is only be split where it is possible to do so. For example, the internal end point of an edge is not split.

For 3-D solids: enter a list of faces similar to 2-D and shells.

A list of nodes can also be given to specify which nodes are candidates for a split. If this list is given, only these nodes may be split. If this list is empty, all nodes of the edges or faces are candidates for a split. For 2-D and shells, a sequence of edges can be given in the node list. If no edges are given in iedgelist, it is filled up from the list of nodes. For 3-D solids, one must give a list of faces.

Format

The USPLIT-MESH user subroutine is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE USPLIT_MESH(ICALL,NODELIST,NLIST,IEDGELIST,

$ NEDGELIST,IFACELIST,NFACELIST,INC,TIME,TIMEINC)

INTEGER NODELIST,NLIST,IEDGELIST,NEDGELIST,IFACELIST,

INTEGER NFACELIST,ICALL,INC

REAL*8 TIME,TIMEINC

DIMENSION NODELIST(*),IEDGELIST(2,*),IFACELIST(4,*)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

ICALL = 1 is called before the analysis begins.

= 2 is called during recycles of increment inc after convergence is obtained (including contact separation). If a split occurs, more recycles are forced.

= 3 is called at the end of increment INC.


398

NLIST is the number of nodes specified in list. If nlist = 0, all nodes in the specified edges or faces are used.

IEDGELIST is the list of edges given as node pairs where the mesh should be split.

NEDGELIST is the number of edges given in iedgelist.

IFACELIST is the list of faces where the mesh should be split. For triangular faces, set the fourth face node to zero. For higher order, elements only specify the corner nodes of the face.

NFACELIST is the number of faces given in ifacelist.


TIME is the current solution time at the start of increment INC.

TIMEINC is the current time increment.

Required Output

NODELIST is the array of nodes defining where the mesh is to be split.


■ UADAP2

User-defined Unrefinement

Description

The UADAP2 user subroutine can be used to define unrefinement for local adaptive meshing.

A refined element is unrefined if all its slave elements are marked for unrefine. An element is marked for unrefine if USERCR specified in this routine is larger than f1 * user_max or f2.

Note that f1 and f2 must be specified on the ADAPTIVE model definition option. User_max is the largest value of USERCR over all of the elements.

This routine is only called for active elements.

Format

User subroutine UADAP2 is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UADAP2(MM,XORD,DSXT,NCRDMX,NDEGMX,LM,NNODE,

USERCR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XORD(NCRDMX,*),DSXT(NDEGMX,*),LM(*)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:MM is the internal element number.

ielext (mm) gives the user element number.XORD contains the original coordinates.DSXT contains the total displacements.NCRDMX is the maximum number of coordinates per node.NDEGMX is the maximum number of degrees of freedom per node.LM contains the node numbers of this element.NNODE is the number of nodes of this element.Required Output:USERCR is the criterion is to be defined in this routine.


400

■ UADAPBOX

User-defined Region For Local Adaptive Meshing

Description

The UADAPBOX user subroutine can be used to define and move the region used with either the adaptive criteria node within a box, cylinder, or sphere for local adaptive meshing.

The position and latest motion of rigid contact bodies are provided in this routine; the numbering used is the same as in the input file. Please note that the values of position and motion of deformable bodies will be zero.

Format

User subroutine UADAPBOX is written with the following. headers:SUBROUTINE UADAPBOX(REGCOORD,ICRITERION,TIME,DTIME,

$ BODYCOORD,BODYMOTION,NBODIES,NFIRSTRIGID)


REAL*8 REGCOORD(*),BODYCOORD(3,*),BODYMOTION(3,*),TIME,DTIME

INTEGER ICRITERION(2),NBODIES,NFIRSTRIGID

user coding

RETURN

END

where:

Input

REGCOORD(*) are the region coordinates (see below).

ICRITERION(1) is the adaptive criterion number (from input).

ICRITERION(2) is the adaptive criterion type.

TIME is the time at the end of the previous increment.

DTIME is the time increment of the previous increment.

BODYCOORD(I,J) are the current coordinates of the reference point of contact body j


BODYMOTION(I,J) are the displacements of the reference point of contact body j

NBODIES are the total number of contact bodies in the model

NFIRSTRIGID is the the number of the first rigid contact body (= 0 if none are present)

Required Output:

For Box Criteria - Type 4

REGCOORD(1) = Xmin

REGCOORD(2) = Ymin

REGCOORD(3) = Zmin

REGCOORD(4) = Xmax

REGCOORD(5) = Ymax

REGCOORD(6) = Zmax

For Cylindrical Region Criteria - Type 19

REGCOORD(1) = Radius

REGCOORD(2) = X coordinate of 1st point on axis.

REGCOORD(3) = Y coordinate of 1st point on axis.

REGCOORD(4) = Z coordinate of 1st point on axis.

REGCOORD(5) = X coordinate of 2nd point on axis.

REGCOORD(6) = Y coordinate of 2nd point on axis.

REGCOORD(7) = Z coordinate of 2nd point on axis.

For Spherical Region Criteria - Type 20

REGCOORD(1) = Radius

REGCOORD(2) = X coordinate of center.

REGCOORD(3) = Y coordinate of center.

REGCOORD(4) = Z coordinate of center.


402

Example

The following code lets the box defined in adaptive criterion 1 follow the motion of rigid body number 2.

IF (ICRITERION.EQ.1) THEN

REGCOORD(1)=REGCOORD(1)+BODYMOTION(1,2)






ENDIF


■ UCRACK_PARIS

Define the Crack Growth Increment

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to define the increment of crack growth for VCCT or crack propagation.

Format

The UCRACK_PARIS user subroutine is written with the following header:SUBROUTINE UCRACK_PARIS(GMAX,GMIN,GTHRESH,C,EXPON,GROWINCMIN,

* GROWINC,NODE,LCRACK,NAME,ICFN,INC,

* TIME,TIMEINC)

IMPLICIT REAL*8 )A-H,O-Z)

CHARACTER*(*) NAME

USER CODING

RETURN

END

where:

Required Input

GMIN, GMAX are the max and min values of the energy release rate during the load sequence.

GTHRESH is the threshold value for the energy release rate, from input. Possibly scaled by table.

C is the user input C parameter for Paris law possibly scaled by table.

EXPON is the user input m parameter (exponent) for Paris law possibly scaled by table.

GROWINCMIN

is the minimum growth increment, from input possibly scaled by table.

NODE is the user node number of the current crack tip node.

LCRACK is the crack number.

NAME is the name of the crack, from input.

ICFN is the index of the crack tip node in the crack front. For 2-D and shells, it is always equal to 1.


404


TIME is the time.

TIMEINC is the time increment.

Required Output

GROWINC is the crack growth increment to be specified in this routine; initially contains the value determined by the program based upon Paris’s law which is:

growinc C Gmax Gmin–( ) onexp Gthonexp–[ ]=


■ UTRANS

Implement Local Coordinate System

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to specify a local coordinate system for user-specified nodes. The node numbers are given in the UTRANFORM model definition option. This user subroutine is called a multiple number of times for each increment of analysis. The local coordinate system can be modified (updated) at each increment to facilitate the input of complex boundary conditions. Incremental nodal displacements and reaction forces are output in both the local and global coordinate system. All total nodal quantities are output in the global system.

Format

User subroutine UTRANS is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UTRANS (DICOS, NDEG, XORD, NCRD, I, N)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION DICOS (NDEG, NDEG), XORD(NCRD)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

NDEG is the number of degrees of freedom.

XORD is the coordinates of the node updated if either the LARGE STRAIN or FOLLOW FOR parameter is used.


I is the user’s node number.

N is the transformation number.

Required Output:

DICOS is the user-defined rotation matrix from the local to global coordinate system. Note that this matrix must be proper orthogonal.


406

■ USHELL

Modify Thickness of Shell Elements

Description

This user subroutine allows the user to specify the thickness of shell elements for each integration point. This user subroutine is called twice for each increment of analysis. It is not advisable to change the thickness during an analysis.

Note: This user subroutine should not be used if the thickness is to be considered a design variable. Use the GEOMETRY option instead.

Format

User subroutine USHELL is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE USHELL (THICK,XINTP,NCRD,M,NN)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION XINTP(NCRD),M(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

XINTP is the integration point coordinates.

NCRD is the number of coordinates per point.

M(1) is the user’s element number.



Required Output:

THICK is the thickness of shell, to be modified by the user.


■ UTHICK

User-specified Nodal Thicknesses

Description

The UTHICK user subroutine is called automatically by the NODAL THICKNESS model definition block. The value of the THICK argument upon input is the value for nodal thickness entered by the user. If this user subroutine is not used, the nodal thickness data entered through the NODAL THICKNESS block are used.

Note: This user subroutine should not be used if the thickness is to be considered a design variable. Use the GEOMETRY option instead.

Format

User subroutine UTHICK is called with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UTHICK (THICK,COORD,NCRD,NOD,BEARC,NBEARF,INC,

INCSUB) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION COORD (NCRD), BEARC(6, NBEARF)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

COORD is the array of coordinates for this node. This array is only available if the COORDINATES option (and UFXORD option, if used) precedes the NODAL THICKNESS option.

NCRD is the maximum number of coordinates per node.NOD is the node number.BEARC is not used.NBEARF is not used.INC is not used.INCSUB is not used.

Required Output:

THICK is the user-defined nodal thickness of node NOD. Upon input, THICK takes the value input through the NODAL THICKNESS option.


408

■ UACTUAT

Prescribe the Length of an Actuator

Description

The UACTUAT user subroutine allows the user to control the length of an actuator in an incremental analysis. This is often useful in mechanism analyses, where the kinematics are prescribed. This is used with the truss element type 9, when an initial length is given in the fourth field of the GEOMETRY option.

Format

User subroutine UACTUAT is called with the following headers: SUBROUTINE UATUAT (M,INC,CPTIM,TIMINC,XLNGTH,OLNGTH) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION M(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:




CPTIM is the time.


OLNGTH is the current length of actuator.

Required Output:

XLNGTH is the length of actuator to be set by the user.

Chapter 7 Output Quantities User Subroutines List


ELEVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428ELEVEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

IMPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

INTCRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

PLOTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

UBGINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433UBGITR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435UBGPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436UEDINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434UELOOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437UPOSTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415UPSTNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

7 Output Quantities User Subroutines List


410

Chapter 7 Output Quantities User Subroutines

7 Output Quantities User Subroutines


412

This chapter describes user subroutines which can be used to obtain results from the analysis and manipulate it for postprocessing. There are also four dummy user subroutines that can be used to set parameters for the advanced user. Table 7-1 summarizes these user subroutines and indicates what parameters or model definition options are required to invoke the user subroutine.

Table 7-1 Output Quantities User Subroutines Requirements

User Subroutine


Purpose

ELEVAR UDUMP Allows postprocessing of element results.

ELEVEC UDUMP Allows postprocessing of element results in harmonic analysis.

INTCRD Makes available integration point coordinates.

IMPD UDUMP Allows postprocessing of nodal vector results.

PLOTV POSTORIENTATION

Defines element quantity to be written to post file.

UBGINC Dummy routine available at the beginning of each increment.

UBGITR Dummy routine available at the beginning of each iteration.

UBGPASS Dummy routine available at the beginning of each pass in coupled analyses.

UEDINC Dummy routine available at the end of each increment.

UELOOP Dummy routine available during major element loops.

UPOSTV POST Defines nodal vectors to be written to a post file.

UPSTNO POST Defines nodal quantities to be written to a post file

413CHAPTER 7Output Quantities User Subroutines

■ PLOTV

User-selected Postprocessing of Element Variables

Description

The PLOTV user subroutine is used in conjunction with either element code 19 or a negative code entered in the POST option. This allows the user to define an element variable to be written to the post file.

Format

User subroutine PLOTV is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE PLOTV(V,S,SP,ETOT,EPLAS,ECREEP,T,M,NN,KCUS,NDI, + NSHEAR,JPLTCD)

IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION S(*),SP(*),ETOT(*),EPLAS(*),ECREEP(*),T(*),+ M(2),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

S is the array of stresses at this integration point. For heat transfer analysis, S contains and . For a magnetostatic analysis, S contains the

magnetic induction (B) (positions 1, 2, 3 for x, y, z) and the magnetic field intensity (H) (positions 5, 6, 7 for x, y, z).

SP is the array of stresses in the preferred direction if ORIENTATION is used.ETOT is the total strain (generalized) at this integration point.EPLAS is the total plastic strain at this integration point.ECREEP is the total creep strain at this integration point.T is the array of state variables at this integration point (temperature first).M(1) is the user’s element number.M(2) is the internal element number.NN is the integration point number.KCUS(1) is the internal layer number (always 1 for continuum elements).KCUS(2) is the internal layer number (always 1 for continuum elements).

∂T ∂Xi⁄ Ki∂T ∂Xi⁄


414

Example

For example, suppose the user wishes to output the sum of the squares of the two shear stresses in the friction theory. These are S(2) and S(3), so the user subroutine would appear as:

SUBROUTINE PLOTV(V,S,SP,ETOT,EPLAS,ECREEP,T,M,NN,KCUS,NDI,+ NSHEAR,JPLTCD) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION S(*),SP(*),ETOT(*),EPLAS(*),ECREEP(*), T(*)+ M(2),KCUS(2) V=SQRT(S(2)**2 + S(3)**2) RETURN END

This quantity could then be postprocessed using Marc Mentat or MD Patran.

For electromagnetics, the PLOTV variables are:

NDI is the number of direct stresses.NSHEAR is the number of shear stresses.JPLTCD is the absolute value of the user’s entered code.

Required Output:

V is the variable to be plotted or put onto the post file, to be defined in this routine.

V is the variable.

ERI is the real and imaginary components of the electric field intensity.

DRI is the real and imaginary components of the electric displacement.

BRI is the real and imaginary components of the magnetic induction.

HRI is the real and imaginary components of the magnetic field intensity.

CRI is the real and imaginary components of the current density.

T is the current temperature; not used.


M(2) is the internal element number


KCUS(1) is not used (always 1).

KCUS(2) is not used (always 1).

NDI is the number of components = 3

NSHEAR is not used.

JPLTCD is the absolute value of the user’s post code.


■ UPOSTV

User-selected Postprocessing of Nodal Variables

Description

The UPOSTV user subroutine is used in conjunction with the POST option to define a vector quantity that is to be written to the post file. This routine should only be used with post revision formats 8 or earlier. For later post revisions, use the UPSTNO user subroutine.

Format

User subroutine UPOSTV is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE

UPOSTV(N,NDEG,NCRD,NUMNP,IANTYP,JNODE,IUID,UPOST,* XORD,VECTOR,INC,CPTIM) IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION UPOST(NDEG),XORD(NCRD),VECTOR(NDEG,JNODE)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

N is the user’s node number.NDEG is the number of degrees of freedom per node.NUMNP is the number of nodes in the mesh.IANTYP is the analysis type – see PLDUMP in Chapter 9.JNODE is the number of vector quantities already defined – see PLDUMP in

Chapter 9.IUID is the user’s vector number.XORD is the coordinates of this node.VECTOR is the displacement, etc. of this node. See PLDUMP in Chapter 9.INC is the increment number.CPTIM is the total time.

Required Output:

UPOST is user-defined components of vector for this node.


416

Example

For example, the user would like to postprocess the relative displacement of all nodes with respect to his node 5 for all time. The user would need to obtain the displacement of node 5 and subtract this from the other displacements. This is done as follows:

SUBROUTINE UPOSTV(N,NDEG,NCRD,NUMNP,IANTYP,JNODE,IUID,

* UPOST,XORD,VECTOR,INC,CPTIM)

implicit real*8 (a-h,o-z)

c

c user subroutine to define nodal post variables

c

c n user node number

c ndeg number of degrees of freedom per node

c ncrd number of coordinates per node

c numnp number of nodes in mesh

c iantyp analysis type - see PLDUMP in volume D

c jnode number of vector quantities already defined

c - see PLDUMP in volume D

c iuid user vector number

c upost user defined components of vector for this node

c xord coordinates of this node

c vectors displacement, etc of this node.

c see iantyp/jnode table in PLDUMP section in volume D

c inc increment number

c cptim total time

c

dimension upost(ndeg),xord(ncrd),vector(ndeg,jnode)

include 'space'

include 'array2'

dimension disp5(12)

c set reference node lext=5

lext=5

c get internal node number


lint=nodint (lext)

c get reference displacement and store into disp5

la3=idsxt+(lint-1)*ndeg

call mcpy(vars(la3),disp5,ndeg,1,0)

c

c get displacement of current node from vector and

c subtract off reference displacement and store back into upost

c

do i=1,ndeg

upost(i)=vector(i,1)-disp5(i)

enddo

c

return

end


418

■ UPSTNO

User-selected Postprocessing of Nodal Variables

Description

The UPSTNO user subroutine is used in conjunction with the POST option to define nodal quantities to be written on the post file. This routine is called for post revision nine and higher. For 7- and 8-style post files, the UPOSTV user subroutine should be used.

Format

User subroutine UPSTNO is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UPSTNO(NQCODE,NODEID,VALNO,NQNCOMP,NQTYPE,

* NQAVER,NQCOMPTYPE,NQDATATYPE,NQCOMPNAME)


c

DIMENSION VALNO(*)

CHARACTER*24 NQCOMPNAME(*)

user coding

RETURN

END

where

Input:

NQCODE User nodal post code, defined on the POST option

NODEID Node number

NQCOMPNAME Not used (reserved for future expansion)

Required Output:

VALNO() Nodal values:real/imaginary VALNO( 1: NQNCOMP) real

VALNO(NQNCOMP+1:2*NQNCOMP) imagaginarymagnitude/phase VALNO( 1: NQNCOMP) magnitude

VALNO(NQNCOMP+1:2*NQNCOMP) phase


Example

For example, the user would like to vector plot the total contact force on nodes whereby the total contact force is the vector sum of the normal and friction force vectors. The UPSTNO user subroutine can be selected to perform the vector addition and place the sum on the post file. This is done as follows:

subroutine upstno(nqcode,nodeid,valno,nqncomp,nqtype, * nqaver,nqcomptype,nqdatatype, * nqcompname) implicit real*8 (a-h,o-z) dimension valno(*) character*24 nqcompname(*)c......................................... Begin User Coding dimension valno1(3),valno2(3) if (nqcode.eq.-1) thenc... pick up contact normal force and store in valno1 call nodvar(35,nodeid,valno1,nqncomp,nqdatatype)c... pick up contact friction force and store in valno2 call nodvar(37,nodeid,valno2,nqncomp,nqdatatype)c... add normal and friction force do 1 i = 1, nqncomp valno(i)=valno1(i)+valno2(i)1 continuec... indicate that valno represents a vector nqtype=1 end ifc......................................... End User Coding return end

NQNCOMP Number of values in VALNO

NQTYPE 0 = scalar1 = vector

NQAVER Only for DDM: 0 = sum over domains1 = average over domains

NQCOMPTYPE Used by Marc Mentat: 0 = global coordinate system (X,Y,Z)1 = shell (Top, Bottom, Middle)2 = order (First, Second, Third)

NQDATATYPE 0 = default1 = modal2 = buckle3 = harmonic real4 = harmonic real/imaginary5 = harmonic magnitude/phase


420

■ IMPD

Output of Nodal Quantities

Description

The IMPD user subroutine makes the displacements, coordinates, reaction forces, velocities, and accelerations available at the end of each increment so that the user can save them in any form convenient for postprocessing. During harmonic subincrements, IMPD allows the user to obtain the complex displacements and reactions. In heat transfer (or Joule heating) analysis, this user subroutine allows the user to obtain nodal temperatures, fluxes, and voltages for his postprocessing. This user subroutine is used in conjunction with the UDUMP option.

Stress Analysis

Format

User subroutine IMPD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE IMPD (LNODE,DD,TD,XORD,F,V,A,NDEG,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION DD (NDEG), TD (NDEG), XORD (NCRD),F(NDEG),V(NDEG),A(NDEG), LNODE(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:

LNODE(1) is the node number (the user subroutine is called once per node per increment).

LNODE(2) = 1DD is the array of displacement increments at this node.TD is the array of total displacements at this node.XORD are the coordinates of this node.F are the reaction forces at prescribed boundary conditions; residual load

correction elsewhere at this node.V is the total velocity at this node.A is the total acceleration at this node.


During harmonic subincrements:

Example

For example, suppose the user wishes to write on a file the displaced position of a three-dimensional solid structure for subsequent plotting. A scale factor of 5 is used on the displacements.

SUBROUTINE IMPD (LNODE,DD,TD,XORD,F,V,A,NDEG,NCRD) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION DD(NDEG), TD(NDEG),XORD(NCRD),F(NDEG), 1 V(NDEG), A(NDEG), LNODE(2) DIMENSION TXORD(3)C TXORD WILL BE THE COORDS + 5X TOTAL DISPLACEMENTS DO 1 I = 1,3 1 TXORD(I) = XORD(I) + 5.0*TD(I)C WRITE OUT DISPLACED POSITIONS ON TAPE 20. WRITE (20) LNODE(1), TXORD RETURN END

After each increment, there are NUMNP records (number of nodal points) on logical unit 20; each contains a node number and three adjusted coordinates. Note that any additional file unit must be taken care of with the appropriate machine dependent JCL.

Note: In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, IMPD is called at the end of the stress pass of an increment. If one then wants to have the temperature of a node (or the top, bottom, and middle temperature in the case of shell elements), use can be made of the NODVAR user subroutine as follows:

DIMENSION TXORD(3)C CALL NODVAR (14, N, DDTEMP, N1DUM,N2DUM)

Now DDTEMP contains the temperature(s) of node n.

NDEG is the number of degrees of freedom per node (that is, the size of the DD, TD, V, and A arrays).

NCRD is the number of coordinate directions per node (equals the size of the XORD array).

Input:

DD is the array of real displacements.TD is the array of imaginary displacements.F is the array of real reaction forces.V is the array of imaginary reaction forces.


422

Heat Transfer Analysis

Format

User subroutine IMPD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE IMPD (N,DD,TD,XORD,F,V,A,NDEG,NCRD) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION DD (NDEG),TD(NDEG),XORD(NCRD),F(NDEG),V(NDEG),A(NDEG),LNODE(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Joule Heating (Current Pass) Analysis

Format

User subroutine IMPD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE IMPD (N,DD,TD,XORD,F,V,A,NDEG,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION DD (NDEG),TD(NDEG),XORD(NCRD),F(NDEG),V(NDEG),A(NDEG), LNODE(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

Input:


LNODE(2) = 2

DD is the array of temperatures at this node.

TD is the array of reaction fluxes at this node.

XORD is the coordinates of this node.

F is not used.

V is not used.

A is not used.




where:

Electrostatic Analysis

Format

User subroutine IMPD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE IMPD (LNODE,DD,TD,XORD,F,V,A,NDEG,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XORD(NCRD)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:


LNODE(2) = 4

DD is the array of voltages at this node.

TD is the array of reaction currents at this node.


F is not used.

V is not used.

A is not used.



Input:


LNODE(2) = 6.

DD is the potential at this node.

TD is the reaction charge at this node.


F is not used.


424

Magnetostatic Analysis

Format

User subroutine IMPD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE IMPD (LNODE,DD,TD,XORD,F,V,A,NDEG,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XORD(NCRD),LNODE(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

V is not used.

A is not used.

NDEG is the number of degrees of freedom per node = 1.


Input:


LNODE(2) = 7

DD is the potential at this node.

TD is the reaction current at this node.


F is not used.

V is not used.

A is not used.




Harmonic Electromagnetic Analysis

Format

User subroutine IMPD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE IMPD (LNODE,DD,TD,XORD,F,V,A,NDEG,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION DD (NDEG),TD(NDEG),XORD(NCRD),F(NDEG),V(NDEG),A(NDEG), LNODE(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Transient Electromagnetic Analysis

Format

User subroutine IMPD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE IMPD (LNODE,DD,TD,XORD,F,V,A,NDEG,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION DD (NDEG),TD(NDEG),XORD(NCRD),F(NDEG),LNODE(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

Input:


LNODE(2) = 8

DD is the array of real component of potential at this node.

TD is the array of imaginary component of potential at this node.


F is the real component of the reaction.

V is the imaginary component of the reaction.

A is not used.




426

where:

Acoustic Analysis

Format

User subroutine IMPD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE IMPD (LNODE,DD,TD,XORD,F,V,A,NDEG,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XORD(NCRD),LNODE(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:


LNODE(2) = 8

DD is the array of incremental potential at this node.

TD is the array of total potential at this node.


F is the reaction forces at applied boundary conditions.

V is not used.

A is not used.

NDEG is the number of degrees of freedom per node (that is, the size of the DD, TD, and F arrays).


Input:

LNODE(1) is the node number.

LNODE(2) = 10

DD is the real displacements (nodes of structural elements).is the real pressure (nodes of acoustic medium).

TD is the imaginary displacements (nodes of acoustic medium).is the imaginary pressure (nodes of acoustic medium).

XORD is the coordinates.


Fluid or Fluid-Thermal Analysis

Format

User subroutine IMPD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE IMPD (LNODE,DD,TD,XORD,F,V,A,NDEG,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION DD (NDEG),TD(NDEG),XORD(NCRD),F(NDEG),V(1),A(1),LNODE(2)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

F is the real reaction forces (nodes of structural elements).is the real reaction sound source (nodes of acoustic medium).

V is the imaginary reaction forces (nodes of structural elements).is the imaginary reaction sound source (nodes of structural elements).

A is not used.


NCRD is the number of coordinate directions per node.

Input:


LNODE(2) = 3.

DD is not used.

TD is the array of velocities at this node.


F is the array of forces.

V is the temperature at this node in a fluid-thermal analysis.

A is the flux at this node in a fluid-thermal analysis.

NDEG is the number of degrees of freedom per node (that is, the size of the DD, TD, and F arrays).



428

■ ELEVAR

Output of Element Quantities

Description

The ELEVAR user subroutine makes element (integration point) quantities available at the end of each increment so that the user can save them in any form convenient for postprocessing. This user subroutine is used in conjunction with the UDUMP option.

Format

User subroutine ELEVAR is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE ELEVAR(N,NN,KCUS,GSTRAN,GSTRES,STRESS,PSTRAN, 1 CSTRAN,VSTRAN,CAUCHY,EPLAS,EQUIVC,SWELL,KRTYP,PRANG,DT, 2 GSV,NGENS,NGEN1,NSTATS,NSTASS,THERM) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION GSTRAN(NGENS),GSTRES(NGENS),1 STRESS(NGEN1),PSTRAN(NGEN1),CSTRAN(NGEN1),VSTRAN(NGEN1), 2 CAUCHY(NGEN1),DT(NSTATS),GSV(1),THERM(NGEN1),KRTYP(4),3 PRANG(3,2),KCUS(2)

User Coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:





GSTRAN is the total strain array.

GSTRES is the generalized force array.

STRESS is the total stresses array.

PSTRAN is the plastic strain array.

CSTRAN is the creep strain array.


VSTRAN is the viscoelastic strain array.

CAUCHY is the Cauchy stress array.


EQUIVC is the equivalent creep strain.

SWELL is the swelling strain.

KRTYP(1) is the crack indicator for the first crack direction:0 = no crack in this direction.1 = open crack, developed in this increment.2 = open crack, developed in previous increment.3 = closed crack.

KRTYP(2) is the crack indicator for the second crack direction.

KRTYP(3) is the crack indicator for the third crack direction.

KRTYP(4) is the crushing indicator:0 = no crushing.1 = crushing occurring in this increment.2 = crushing occurred in previous increment.

PRANG (i,1) = components of normal to the first crack plane.(i,2) = components of normal to the second crack plane (3-D only).

DT is the state variables array, temperature first.

GSV is the global state variable array.

NGENS is the number of generalized strains.

NGEN1 is the number of physical components.


NSTASS is the number of global state variables.

THERM is the total thermal strain array.


430

■ ELEVEC

Output of Element Quantities in Harmonic Analysis

Description

The ELEVEC user subroutine makes element (integration point) quantities available at the end of each harmonic subincrement so that the user can save them in any form convenient for his postprocessing. This user subroutine is used in conjunction with the UDUMP option.

Format

User subroutine ELEVEC is written with the following headers: SUBROUTINE ELEVEC(N,NN,KCUS,GSTRAN,GSTRES,STRESS,PSTRAN,1 CSTRAN,VSTRAN,CAUCHY,EPLAS,EQUIVC,SWELL,KRTYP,PRANG,DT,2 GSV,NGENS,NGEN1,NSTATS,NSTASS,STSRE,STSIM,STNRE,STNIM) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z) DIMENSION GSTRAN(NGENS),GSTRES(NGENS), 1 STRESS(NGEN1),PSTRAN(NGEN1),CSTRAN(NGEN1),VSTRAN(NGEN1), 2 CAUCHY(NGEN1),DT(NSTATS),GSV(NSTASS), 3 STSRE(NGEN1),STSIM(NGEN1),STNRE(NGEN1),STNIM(NGEN1),KCUS(2)

user coding

RETURN END

where:

Input:





GSTRAN is the total strain array.

GSTRES is the generalized force array.

STRESS is the total stresses array.

PSTRAN is the plastic strain array.


CSTRAN is the creep strain array.

VSTRAN is the viscoelastic strain array.

CAUCHY is the Cauchy stress array.


EQUIVC is the equivalent stress.

SWELL is the swelling strain.

KRTYP is the cracking type.

PRANG is the crack angle.

DT is the state variables array, temperature first.

GSV is the global state variable array.

NGENS is the number of generalized strains.

NGEN1 is the number of physical components.


NSTASS is the number of global state variables.

STSRE is the real harmonic stress.

STSIM is the imaginary harmonic stress.

STNRE is the real harmonic strain.

STNIN is the imaginary harmonic strain.


432

■ INTCRD

Output of Integration Point Coordinates

Description

The INTCRD user subroutine makes the integration point coordinates for the stiffness matrix available at each increment. The user can save them in any form convenient for postprocessing.

Format

User subroutine INTCRD is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE INTCRD(M,NN,XORD,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION XORD(NCRD)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:



XORD is the coordinates of this integration point.

NCRD is the number of coordinate directions.


■ UBGINC

Beginning of Increment

Description

The UBGINC user subroutine is called at the beginning of each new increment. It can be used to define or modify data variables stored in common blocks.

Note: No special flag is required in the input file.

Format

User subroutine UBGINC is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UBGINC(INC,INCSUB)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:




434

■ UEDINC

End of Increment

Description

The UEDINC user subroutine is called at the end of each increment. It can be used to define or modify data variables stored in common blocks.


Format

User subroutine UEDINC is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UEDINC(INC,INCSUB)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:




■ UBGITR

Beginning of Iteration

Description

The UBGITR user subroutine is called at the beginning of each iteration in the solution of the nonlinear problem. It can be used to define or modify data variables stored in common blocks.


Format

User subroutine UBGITR is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UBGITR(INC,INCSUB,NCYCLE)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:



NCYCLE is the iteration number (the first is labeled zero).


436

■ UBGPASS

Beginning of Pass in Coupled Analyses

Description

The UBGPASS user subroutine is called at the beginning of each pass of coupled analyses. It can be used to define or modify data variables stored in common blocks.


Format

User subroutine UBGPASS is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UBGPASS (INC,INCSUB,IPASS)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:



IPASS is the pass identifier:IPASS = 1 - stress passIPASS = 2 - thermal passIPASS = 3 - fluid passIPASS = 4 - Joule heating passIPASS = 5 - pore pressure passIPASS = 6 - electrostatics passIPASS = 7 - magnetostatics pass IPASS = 8 - electromagnetics pass


■ UELOOP

Beginning of Element Loop

Description

The UELOOP user subroutine is called in a loop over the elements. It can be used to define or modify data variables stored in common blocks.


Format

User subroutine UELOOP is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UELOOP(M,N,IL)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:



IL is the loop flag.= 1 form consistent nodal loads from distributed loads.= 2 stiffness matrix formation.= 3 mass matrix formation.= 4 stress recovery.


438

Chapter 8 Hydrodynamic Lubrication User Subroutines List


UBEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443UGROOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444URESTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445UTHICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447UVELOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

8 Hydrodynamic Lubrication User Subroutines List


440

Chapter 8 Hydrodynamic Lubrication User Subroutine

8 Hydrodynamic Lubrication User Subroutines


442

This chapter describes user subroutines that can be used to customize a hydrodynamic bearing analysis. In such problems, the geometry can be complicated by grooves in the bearing surface or nonuniform lubricant. The user subroutines provided here facilitate the input of this data. Table 8-1 summarizes these user subroutines and indicates what parameters or model definition options are required to invoke the user subroutine.

Table 8-1 Hydrodynamic Lubrication User Subroutines Requirements

User Subroutine


Purpose

UBEAR BEARING Define the orientation of the film surface.

UGROOV BEARING Define the groove depth.

URESTR BEARINGRESTRICTOR

Define the nonuniform restrictor coefficient and pump pressures.

UTHICK BEARINGNODAL THICKNESSTHICKNS CHANGE

Define the lubricant thickness.

UVELOC BEARINGVELOCITY

Define the nodal velocity of bearing surface.

443CHAPTER 8Hydrodynamic Lubrication User Subroutines

■ UBEAR

Input of Spatial Orientation of Lubricant Thickness

Description

In bearing analysis, the lubricant is modeled by a planar mesh due to the absence of pressure gradients across the film height. Marc integrates the obtained pressure distribution over the entire mesh. This yields a set of equivalent consistent nodal forces perpendicular to the lubricant. In order to calculate the load capacity of a particular bearing system, these forces must be transformed to the global coordinate system. For this purpose, information is required about the direction cosines of the lubricant normal. This can be done in the UBEAR user subroutine which is called for each node.

Format

User subroutine UBEAR is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UBEAR (COORD,DIRCOS,NODE,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION COORD (NCRD), COS(3)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:




Required Output:

DIRCOS is the array of direction cosines of the vector perpendicular to the lubricant; to be defined in this user subroutine. A default vector (0,0,1) is assumed if not specified.


444

■ UGROOV

Input of Groove Depths

Description

In bearing analysis, discontinuous film thicknesses are often applied to increase the load carrying capacity. This is usually done by grooves, which can be defined in the GEOMETRY option. However, this is not possible if position dependent groove depths have to be included. In such situations, the UGROOV user subroutine must be used. It is called at each integration point and allows the user to specify the groove depth at these points. In addition, this user subroutine can be used for selecting elements which are located at grooves if complex groove patterns have to be modeled.

Format

User subroutine UGROOV is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UGROOV (THICK,COORD,M,NN,NCRD)IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION COORD (NCRD)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

COORD is the array of coordinates at this integration point.




Required Output:

THICK is the groove depth magnitude to be specified.


■ URESTR

Input of Nonuniform Restrictor Coefficients

Description

In bearing analysis, it is often necessary to include nonuniform restrictor coefficients and pump pressures. The URESTR user subroutine allows this. It is called at each increment for each integration point on each element surface given in the RESTRICTOR model definition set, and allows the user to modify the restrictor coefficient and pump pressure input on the data blocks.

Format

User subroutine URESTR is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE URESTR (CR,PP,PS,N,INC) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION N(3)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

PS is the surface pressure at the beginning of the increment.N(1) is the element number.N(2) is the face number.N(3) is the integration point number.INC is the current increment number.

Required Output:

CR is the ratio of the desired restrictor coefficient to that given on the RESTRICTOR data set for this element to be defined by the user (preset to 1).

PP is the ratio of the desired pump pressure to that given on the RESTRICTOR data set for this element to be defined by the user (preset to 1).


446

Note that since CR and PP are defined as ratios, if the user does not re-define them in this user subroutine, the data block values are used. If the user wishes to give absolute values here, the corresponding values on the RESTRICTOR data set can be conveniently set to 1.


■ UTHICK (Hydrodynamic Lubrication)

Generation or Modification of Nodal Thickness or Thickness Change Field

Description

In bearing analysis, the film height usually varies over the entire lubricant region. The UTHICK user subroutine allows the user to define, or to redefine previously specified, nodal thicknesses. It is called for each node in the mesh.

In addition, this user subroutine can be used to define thickness increments in incremental analysis or within subincrements when evaluating damping and/or stiffness coefficients. In order to enable the specification of thickness increments as function of previously calculated bearing properties, the user has access to the latter quantities in this user subroutine.

Format

User subroutine UTHICK is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UTHICK (THICK,COORD,NCRD,NOD,BEARC,NBEARF,INC,INCSUB) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION COORD (NCRD), BEARC (6,NBEARF)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

COORD is the array of coordinates for this node.


NOD is the node number.

BEARC is the matrix of previously calculated bearing properties. Each column contains three bearing force and three bearing moment components. The quantities calculated in the previous increment are stored in the first column. Each subsequent column contains the properties pertaining to the previous set of subincrements.


448

NBEARF is the maximum number of subincrements as given on the BEARING parameter.



Required Output:

THICK is the lubricant thickness or incremental lubricant thickness magnitude to be specified for this node.


■ UVELOC (Hydrodynamic Lubrication)

Generation or Modification of Nodal Velocity Vectors

Description

In bearing analysis, it is sometimes necessary to include a position dependent velocity field. The UVELOC user subroutine, which is called for each node, allows the user the specification or re-definition of previously specified nodal velocity vectors.


Format

User subroutine UVELOC is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE UVELOC (VELOC,COORD,NCRD,NODE) IMPLICIT REAL *8 (A-H, O-Z)DIMENSION VELOC (NCRD),COORD(NCRD)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:




Required Output:

VELOC is the array of nodal velocity components to be defined.


450

Chapter 9 Special Routines — Marc Post File Processor List

Special Subroutine Page

PLDUMP13/PLDUMP2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

9 Special Routines User — Marc Post File Processor List


452

Chapter 9 Special Routines — Marc Post File Processor

9 Special Routines User — Marc Post File Processor


454

This chapter discusses a stand-alone program that provides examination of the postprocessing file created by the POST option. This allows the user to perform additional calculations based upon results calculated in Marc and to create a post file. These results can then be viewed with Marc Mentat or MD Patran.

455CHAPTER 9Special Routines User — Marc Post File Processor

■ PLDUMP13/PLDUMP2000

Marc Post File Processor PLDUMP13/PLDUMP2000 is a small utility program which can be used to access, analyze, convert, and process Marc binary and formatted post files. PLDUMP13 should be used for post files with revision 13 or greater written by MSC.Marc 2005r3 and newer versions. The source is supplied at no additional charge to Marc customers and is available on the Marc installation media. The user can modify this source as necessary to suit his requirements.

When PLDUMP13/PLDUMP2000 is executed, the user is asked several questions, as follows (the example answers given in italics show the conversion of 12 increments of a binary post file jobname.t16 into a formatted post file newpost.t19):

1. Dump output file name: for example, post.txt.

The amount of data written into this file depends on the answer to question 2.

2. Write post data to output option: for example, p.

Valid responses are:

n or none – do not write post file to outputp or partial – write analysis control data to outputf or full – write entire post file to output

3. Type of post file to read: for example, b.


b or binary – to read a binary filef or formatted – to read a formatted file

4. Name of post file to read: for example, jobname.t16.

5. Type of post file to write: for example, f.


n or none – do not write a new post fileb or binary – write a new binary filef or formatted – write a new formatted file

6. New post file name: for example, newpost.t19.


456

7. User data processing option: for example, n.


n or no – no user data processing; default pldump13/pldump2000/pldump is usedy or yes – user data processing; only if the source of

pldump13/pldump2000/pldump has been modified by the user

8. Number of increments to process: for example, 12.

Processing stops if this number of increments has been processed. To process only non-incremental data, enter a 0.

Marc Post File Layout (Revision 9 or Higher): PLDUMP 2000

The revision 9 (or higher) post file is subdivided into blocks with each block having a unique number and name. For each block, a description is given below, following the Fortran code of PLDUMP2000, both for formatted and binary post files. First, the block number and name are given. Next, the way in which the data is read is shown. Finally, the data read is explained.

The post file for revision 12 has seven new blocks:

53000 - Points

52100 - Curves

53200 - Surfaces

53300 - Attach Nodes

53400 - Attach Edges

53500 - Attach Faces

53600 - Boundary Conditions

BLOCK 501nn - analysis title

****************************

read(formatted,’(a70)’) blkbegin

read(formatted,’(a70)’) title(1:70)

read(formatted,’( a5)’) blkend


read(binary) (ibeg(ijk),ijk=1,70)

write(blkbegin,’(70a1)’) blkbegin

read(binary) (ititle(ijk),ijk=1,70)

write(title(1:70),’(70a1)’) (ititle(ijk),ijk=1,70)

read(binary) (iend(ijk),ijk=1,5)

write(blkbegin,’(5a1)’) blkend

blkbegin = =beg=50100 (Analysis Title)

title = title of analysis

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 502nn - analysis verification data

****************************************


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (lm(ijk),ijk=1,18)





read(binary) (lm(ijk),ijk=1,18)





458

blkbegin = =beg=50200 (Analysis Verification Data)

lm( 1) = number of post codes (npost )

lm( 2) = number of nodes (numnp )

lm( 3) = number of elements (numel )

lm( 4) = number of d.o.f. per node (ndeg ) not used

lm( 5) = number of int. points (nstres)

lm( 6) = number of nodal variables (inod ) not used

lm( 7) = post file type (ipstco) not used

lm( 8) = number of tyings from adaptive meshing (nadtie)

lm( 9) = number of coordinates per node (ncrd )

lm(10) = number of nodes per element (nnodmx)

lm(11) = analysis type (iantyp) not used

lm(12) = complex flag (icompl) not used

lm(13) = number of transformations (nbctra)

lm(14) = post file revision number (postrv) not used

lm(15) = number of distributed loads (ndistl)

lm(16) = number of sets (nset )

lm(17) = number of springs (nsprng)

lm(18) = number of contact bodies (ndie )

lm(19) = number of element sets (nesets) not used

lm(20) = number of node sets (nnsets) not used

lm(21) = number of int. point sets (nisets) not used

lm(22) = number of layer sets (nlsets) not used

lm(23) = number of d.o.f. sets (ndsets) not used

lm(24) = number of increment sets (ninset) not used


lm(25) = number of items in element sets (kelem ) not used

lm(26) = number of items in nodes in sets (knode ) not used

lm(27) = number of items in int. point sets (kint ) not used

lm(28) = number of items in layer sets (klayr ) not used

lm(29) = number of items in d.o.f. sets (kdof ) not used

lm(30) = number of items in increment sets (kinc ) not used

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 504nn - dummy

*******************


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) idum




read(binary) idum



blkbegin = =beg=50400 (Dummy)

idum = dummy variable (=0)

blkend = =end=


460

BLOCK 505nn - domain decomposition information

***********************************************


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) nprocd,idomit




read(binary) nprocd,idomit



blkbegin = =beg=50500 (Domain Decomposition Information)

nprocd = number of domains of total model

idomit = domain number of this post file

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 506nn - element variable postcodes

****************************************

if(npost.gt.0) then



do ijk=1,npost

read(formatted,’(i13,a24)’) ipost,cpost

enddo




do ijk=1,npost

read(binary) ipost,(iname(ijl),ijl=1,24)

write(cpost,’(24a1)’) (iname(ijl),ijl=1,24)

enddo



endif

blkbegin = =beg=50600 (Element Variable Postcodes)

npost = number of element post variable (from BLOCK 502nn)

ipost = element post code (see manual Volume C model definition

option POST) + 1000 * layer number for post variable ijk

cpost = character string with name to be given to post variable ijk

(see manual Volume C model definition option POST)

blkend = =end=


462

BLOCK 507nn - element connectivities

************************************

if(numel.gt.0) then


do ijk=1,numel

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) ielid,ityp,nnod,(iel(ijl),ijl=1,nnodmx)

enddo




do ijk=1,numel

read(binary) ielid,ityp,nnod,(iel(ijl),ijl=1,nnodmx)

enddo



endif

blkbegin = =beg=50700 (Element Connectivities)

numel = number of elements (from BLOCK 502nn)

nnodmx = number of nodes per element (from BLOCK 502nn)

ielid = user element number of element ijk

ityp = MARC element type of element ijk (see Volume B)


nnod = number of nodes of element ijk

iel(i) = user node number of i-th node of element ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 508nn - nodal coordinates

*******************************

if(numnp.gt.0) then


do ijk=1,numnp

read(formatted,’(i13,5e13.6,/,6e13.6)’)

inod(ijk),(xord(ijl,ijk),ijl=1,ncrd)

enddo




do ijk=1,numnp

read(binary) inod(ijk),(xord(ijl,ijk),ijl=1,ncrd)

enddo



endif


464

blkbegin = =beg=50800 (Nodal Coordinates)

numnp = number of nodes (from BLOCK 502nn)

ncrd = number of coordinates per node (from BLOCK 502nn)

inod = user node number of node ijk

xord(i) = i-th coordinate of node ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53000 - point data

************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) npoints

if(npoints.ne.0) then

do ijk=1,npoints

read(formatted,’(i13,3e13.6)’) ipnt(ijk),(xpnt(ijl,ijk),ijl=1,3)

enddo

endif

read(formatted,’(a5)’) blkend

read (binary) (ibeg(ijk),ijk=1,70)


read(binary) npoints



do ijk=1,npoints

read(binary) ipnt(ijk),(xpnt(ijl,ijk),ijl=1,3)

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53000 (Points)

npoints = number of geometric points

ipnt = user point id of point ijk

xpnt(i,ijk)=i th coordinate of point ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53100 - curve data

************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) ncurves

if(ncurves.ne.0) then

do ijk=1,ncurves

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (icurvinf(ijl),ijl=1,6)

icrv(ijk)=icurvinf(1)


466

lct=icurvinf(2)

npu=icurvinf(3)

nou=icurvinf(4)

nrx=3

if(lct.eq.6) nrx=5

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xhomog(ijl),ijl=1,npu)

lss=npu+nou

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xknot(ijl),ijl=1,lss)

if(lct.eq.-4) then

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (jpnt(ijl),ijl=1,npu)

elseif(lct.eq.-6) then

do itp=1,npu

read(formatted,’(i13,2e13.6)’) itpid,xiso,yiso

enddo

elseif(lct.eq.4) then

do itp=1,npu

read(formatted,’(5e13.6)’) (xpnt(kk1),kk1=1,3)

enddo


do itp=1,npu

read(formatted,’(5e13.6)’) (xtrim(kk1),kk1=1,3),xiso,yiso

enddo

endif

enddo

endif





read(binary) ncurves


do ijk=1,ncurves

read(binary) (icurvinf(ijl),ijl=1,6)


lct=icurvinf(2)

npu=icurvinf(3)

nou=icurvinf(4)

nrx=3

if(lct.eq.6) nrx=5

read(binary) (xhomog(ijl),ijl=1,npu)

lss=npu+nou

read(binary) (xknot(ijl),ijl=1,lss)

if(lct.eq.-4) then

read(binary) (jpnt(ijl),ijl=1,npu)


do itp=1,npu

read(binary)itpid,xiso,yiso

enddo


do itp=1,npu

read(binary) (xpnt(kk1),kk1=1,3)

enddo


468


do itp=1,npu

read(binary) (xtrim(kk1),kk1=1,3),xiso,yiso

enddo

endif

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53100 (Curves)

ncurves = number of geometric curves

icurvinf(1)= user curve id of curve ijk

icurvinf(2)= curve type

-4 -NURB curve - referencing previously defined points

+4 -NURB curve - not referencing previously defined points

-6 -Trimming curve on surface - referencing previously defined

points

+6 -Trimming curve on surface - not referencing previously

defined points

icurvinf(3)= number of points

icurvinf(4)= order of curve

icurvinf(5)= not used


xhomog = homogeneous coordinates of points on curve

xknot = knot vector of curve


jpnt = array of point ids

xpnt = coordinates of points on curve

xtrim = real coordinates of points on trimming curve

xiso,yiso = isoparametric coordinates of points on trimming curve relative to

surface

itpid = point id of trimming point

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53200 - surface data

**************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) nsurfaces

if(nsurfaces.ne.0) then

do ijk=1,nsurfaces

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (isurfinf(ijl),ijl=1,7)

icrv(ijk)=isurfinf(1)

lct=isurfinf(2)

npu=isurfinf(3)

nou=isurfinf(4)

npv=isurfinf(5)

nov=isurfinf(6)

ntrim=isurfinf(7)


470

nnnn=npu*npv

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xhomog(ijl),ijl=1,nnnn)

lss=npu+nou+npv+nov


if(lct.eq.-9) then

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (jpnt(ijl),ijl=1,nnnn)


do itp=1,nnnn


enddo

endif

if(ntrim.ne.0) then

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (jtrmcv(ijl),ijl=1,ntrim)

endif

enddo

endif




read(binary) nsurfaces


do ijk=1,npoints

read(binary) (isurfinf(ijl),ijl=1,7)



lct=isurfinf(2)

npu=isurfinf(3)

nou=isurfinf(4)

npv=isurfinf(5)

nov=isurfinf(6)

ntrim=isurfinf(7)

nnnn=npu*npv

read(binary) (xhomog(ijl),ijl=1,nnnn)

lss=npu+nou+npv+nov


if(lct.eq.-9) then

read(binary) (jpnt(ijl),ijl=1,nnnn)


do itp=1,nnnn


enddo

endif

if(ntrim.ne.0) then

read(binary) (jtrmcv(ijl),ijl=1,ntrim)

endif

enddo

endif




472

blkbegin = =beg=53200 (Surfaces)

nsurfaces = number of geometric surfaces

isurfinf(1)= user surface id of surface ijk

isurfinf(2)= surface type

-9 -NURB surface - referencing previously defined points

+9 -NURB surface - not referencing previously defined points

isurfinf(3)= number of points, 1st isoparametric direction

isurfinf(4)= order of curve, 1st isoparametric direction

isurfinf(5)= number of points, 2nd isoparametric direction

isurfinf(6)= order of curve, 2nd isoparametric direction

isurfinf(7)= number of trimming curves

xhomog = homogeneous coordinates of points on surface

xknot = knot vector of surface


xpnt(i) = i th coordinate of point

jtrmcv = array of curve ids that are the trimming curves for this surface

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53300 - attach nodes

**************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) natpts

if(natpts.ne.0) then

do ijk=1,natpts


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) jpoint(ijk),jnode(ijk)

enddo

endif




read(binary) natpts


do ijk=1,natpts

read(binary) jpoint(ijk),jnode(ijk)

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53300 (Attach Nodes)

natpts = number of nodes attached to points

jpoint(ijk)= point id for ijk th node

jnode(ijk) = node id for ith th node

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53400 - attach edges

**************************


474


read(formatted,’(i13)’) ncvwedat

if(ncvwedat.ne.0) then

do ijk=1,ncvwedat

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) icurvid,nedgat

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (lelem(ilm),ilm=1,nedgat)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (ledge(ilm),ilm=1,nedgat)

enddo

endif




read(binary) ncvwedat


do ijk=1,ncvwedat

read(binary) icurvid,nedgat

read(binary) (lelem(ilm),ilm=1,nedgat)

read(binary) (ledge(ilm),ilm=1,nedgat)

enddo

endif




blkbegin = =beg=53400 (Attach Edges)

ncvwedat = number of curves with edges attached

icurvid = curve id

nedgat = number of edges attached to this curve

lelem = array of elements attached to the curve

ledge = array of edge ids corresponding to the element (Marc convention)

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53500 - attach faces

**************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) nsfwfcat

if(nsfwfcat.ne.0) then

do ijk=1,nsfwfcat

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) isurfid,nfaceat

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (lelem(ilm),ilm=1,nfaceat)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (lface(ilm),ilm=1,nfaceat)

enddo

endif



476



read(binary) nsfwfcat


do ijk=1,nsfwfcat

read(binary) isurfid,nfaceat

read(binary) (lelem(ilm),ilm=1,nfaceat)

read(binary) (lface(ilm),ilm=1,nfaceat)

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53500 (Attach Faces)

nsfwfcat = number of surfaces with faces attached

isurfid = surface id

nfaceat = number of faces attached to this surface

lelem = array of elements attached to the surface

lface = array of face ids corresponding to the element (Marc convention)

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53600 - boundary conditions

*********************************



read(formatted,’(i13)’) nbcs

if(nbcs.ne.0) then

do ijk=1,nbcs

read(formatted,’(32a1)’) (ibcname(ilm),ilm=1,32)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (ibcinfo(ilm),ilm=1,9)

ltyp =ibcinfo(1)

lmode =ibcinfo(2)

lmact =ibcinfo(3)

lmharm=ibcinfo(4)

lmng =ibcinfo(5)

lmread=ibcinfo(7)

lmreal=ibcinfo(8)

lmdim =ibcinfo(9)

read(formatted,’(6e13)’) ( rload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (itrload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)

if(lmharm.gt.0) then

read(formatted,’(6e13)’) ( cload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (itcload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)

endif

if(lmdim.ne.0) then

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (lm(ilm),ilm=1,lmdim)

endif

do kk2=1,lmng

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) igid,igtype

read(formatted,’(80a1)’) (kbcline(ilm),ilm=1,80)


478

enddo

enddo

endif




read(formatted) nbcs

if(nbcs.ne.0) then

do ijk=1,nbcs

read(formatted) (ibcname(ilm),ilm=1,32)

read(formatted) (ibcinfo(ilm),ilm=1,9)

ltyp =ibcinfo(1)

lmode =ibcinfo(2)

lmact =ibcinfo(3)

lmharm=ibcinfo(4)

lmng =ibcinfo(5)

lmread=ibcinfo(7)

lmreal=ibcinfo(8)

lmdim =ibcinfo(9)

read(formatted) ( rload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)

read(formatted) (itrload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)


read(formatted) ( cload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)


read(formatted) (itcload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)

endif

if(lmdim.ne.0) then

read(formatted) (lm(ilm),ilm=1,lmdim)

endif

do kk2=1,lmng

read(formatted) igid,igtype

read(formatted) (kbcline(ilm),ilm=1,80)

enddo

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53600 (Boundary Conditions)

nbcs = number of boundary conditions

ibcname = boundary condition name

ibcinfo = boundary condition information

ibcinfo(1) = boundary condition physics type

=1 mechanical displacements-pressure

=2 temperature temperature-fluxes

=3 magnetic voltage-current

=4 electrical potential-charge

=5 bearing pressure-mass flux

=6 fluid velocity - pressure

=7 acoustics pressure-source


480

ibcinfo(2) = boundary condition type

=1 fixed

=2 point

=3 distributed

=4 foundation

=5 initial displacement/temperature/pressure

=6 initial velocity or velocity for convection

=7 initial acceleration

=8 initial density or relative density (powder)

=9 hold node

=10 rad-cavity or press-cavity

=11 initial stress - mechanical analysis only

=12 initial plastic strain - mechanical analysis only

=13 initial porosity -

=14 porosity

=15 initial pore pressure

=16 change pore pressure

=17 initial temperature - not heat transfer analysis

=18 point temperature - not heat transfer analysis

=19 initial state - not heat transfer analysis

=20 change state - not heat transfer analysis

=21 initial void ratio

=22 void ratio

=23 initial preconsolidation pressure

=24 weld flux (read in readbcweld.f)

ibcinfo(3) = active/inactive flag


ibcinfo(4) = user subroutine used

ibcinfo(5) = complex harmonic flag

= 0 - real values only

= 1 - real and imaginary values

= 2 - magnitude and phase

ibcinfo(6) = Fourier loading series term (currently always = 0)

ibcinfo(7) = Number of geometric types

ibcinfo(8) = Number of real data associated with boundary condition

ibcinfo(9) = Number of integer data associated with boundary condition

rload = real data associated with boundary condition

itrload = table ids associated with real data

cload = imaginary or phase data associated with boundary condition

itcload = table ids associated with imaginary or phase data

igid = geometry number

igtype = geometry type

1= element ids

2= node ids

3= volume

4= surface

5= curve

6= point

7= element set

8= node set

9= polycurve

10= polysurface

11= element-edge


482

12= element-face

13= elem mn-edge

14= elem mn-face

15= cavity

16= surface-edge

17= curve-face

18= surface mn-edge

19= curve mn-face

kbcline = list of location where boundary condition is applied

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 509nn - spring data

*************************

if(nsprng.gt.0) then


do ijk=1,nsprng

read(formatted,’(5i13)’) (ispr(ijl,ijk),ijl=1,5)

enddo




do ijk=1,nsprng

read(binary) id,node1,idof1,node2,idof2

enddo




endif

blkbegin = =beg=50900 (Spring Data)

nsprng = number of springs (from BLOCK 502nn)

id = number of spring ijk

node1 = number of first node of spring ijk

idof1 = degree of freedom of node1 of spring ijk

node2 = number of second node of spring ijk


blkend = =end=

BLOCK 510nn - nodal codes and transformation id

***********************************************


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (inoco(ijl),ijl=1,numnp)




read(binary) (inoco(ijl),ijl=1,numnp)



484


blkbegin = =beg=51000 (Nodal Codes and Transformation ID)


inoco(i) = nodal code for node i + 1000*transformation number for node i

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 511nn - ties due to meshing

*********************************

if(nadtie.gt.0) then


do ijk=1,nadtie

read(formatted,’(2i13)’) ityp,iret

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (nodes(ijl),ijl=1,iret)

enddo




do ijk=1,nadtie

read(binary) ityp,iret

read(binary) (nodes(ijl),ijl=1,iret)

enddo




endif

blkbegin = =beg=51100 (Ties due to Meshing)

nadtie = number of adaptive meshing tyings (from BLOCK 502nn)

ityp = type of adaptive meshing tying

91 : tie one node in between 2 other nodes


iret = number of nodes involved in adaptive meshing tying

nodes(i) = node numbers involved in adaptive meshing tying

91 : nodes(1)=0.5 *(nodes(2)+nodes(3))

92 : nodes(1)=0.25*(nodes(2)+nodes(3)+nodes(4)+nodes(5))

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 512nn - transformation matrices

*************************************

if(nbctra.gt.0) then


do ijk=1,nbctra

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) ((d(i1,i2),i1=1,3),i2=1,3)

enddo


486




do ijk=1,nbctra

read(binary) ((d(i1,i2),i1=1,3),i2=1,3)

enddo



blkbegin = =beg=51200 (Transformation Matrices)

nbctra = number of transformations (from BLOCK 502nn)

d(i,j) = transformation matrix for transformation number ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 51300 - set definition

****************************

if(nset.gt.0.and postrv.le.10) then


do ijk=1,nset

read(formatted,’(a12)’) setnam

read(formatted,’(2i13.6)’) isetn,isett

if(isetn.ne.0) then


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (nsett(ijl),ijl=1,isetn)

if(isett.eq.12.or.isett.eq.13.or.

* isett.eq.18.or.isett.eq.19)

* read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (nsettf(ijl),ijl=1,isetn)

endif

enddo




do ijk=1,nset

read(binary) (isetnam(ijl),ijl=1,12)

write(setnam,’(12a1)’) (isetnam(ijl),ijl=1,12)

read(binary) isetn,isett

if(isetn.ne.0) then

read(binary) (nsett(ijl),ijl=1,isetn)

if(isett.eq.12.or.isett.eq.13.or.

* isett.eq.18.or.isett.eq.19)

* read(binary) (nsettf(ijl),ijl=1,isetn)

endif

enddo



endif


488

blkbegin = =beg=51300 (Set Definitions)

nset = number of sets (from BLOCK 502nn)

setnam = name of set ijk

isetn = number of items in set ijk

isett = type of set ijk

0 : element set

1 : node set

nsett(i) = element/node numbers of members of set ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 51301 - set definition

****************************

if(postrv.gt.10) then


read(formatted,’(i13)’) nset

do ijk=1,nset



if(isetn.ne.0) then


if(isett.eq.12.or.isett.eq.13)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (nsett(ij1).ij1=1,isetn)

endif


endif

enddo




do ijk=1,nset




if(isetn.ne.0) then


if(isett.eq.12.or.isett.eq.13.or.isett.eq.18.or.isett.eq.19) then

read(binary) (neddt(ij1),ij1=1,isetn)

endif

endif

enddo



endif


nset = number of sets



490



0 : element set

1 : node set

12: edge set

13: face set

14: point set

15: curve set

16: surface set

17: cavity set

18: ordered surface set

19 ordered curve set


neddt(i) = face/edge number if face/edge set of set ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 514nn - contact geometry data

***********************************

if(ndie.gt.0) then


do ijk=1,ndie

if(ipstk2.lt.8) then

read(formatted,’(3i13)’) ibody,itype,nitems


else

read(formatted,’(4i13)’) ibody,itype,nitems,istruc

read(formatted,’(a24)’) bdname

read(formatted,(6e13.6)’)

(pos(ij1),ij1-1,3),(rot(ij1),ij1=1,3)

endif

if(itype,ne.0.or.ipstk2.ge.8) then

if(itype.eq.0) then

read(formatted,’(i13)’) nelem

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (ielem(ijl),ijl=1,nelem)

endif

if(itype.eq.1) then

do ijl=1,nitems

read(formatted’(2i13)’) npatch,npoint

do ijm=1,npatch

read(formatted’(4i13)’) ipatn,ipatt,ip1,ip2

enddo

do ijm=1,npoint

read(formatted’(i13,2e13.6)’) ipoint,xp,yp

enddo

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.2) then

do ijl=1,nitems


do ijm=1,npatch


492

read(formatted’(6i13)’) ipatn,ipatt,ip1,ip2,ip3,ip4

enddo

do ijm=1,npoint

read(formatted’(i13,3e13.6)’) ipoint,xp,yp,zp

enddo

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.3) then

do ijl=1,nitems

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) nurbid,kpt,idum3,kor,idum5,idum6

do ijm=1,kpt

read(formatted,’(3e13.6)’) xp,yp,zp

enddo

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (homo(ijm),ijm=1,kpt)

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xnot(ijm),ijm=1,kpt+kor)

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.4) then

do ijl=1,nitems

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) nurbid,nptu,nptv,noru,norv,itrim

do ijm=1,nptu*nptv


enddo

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (homo(ijm),ijm=1,nptu*nptv)

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xnot(ijm),ijm=1,nptu+noru+nptv+norv)

do ijm=1,itrim


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) itriid,kpt,idum3,idum4,idum5,idum6

do ijl=1,kpt


enddo

enddo

enddo

endif

endif

enddo




do ijk=1,ndie

if(ipstk2.lt.8) then

read(binary) ibody,itype,nitems

else

read(binary) ibody,itype,nitems,istruc

read(binary) (ibdname(ij1),ij1=1,24)

write(bdname,’(24a1)’) (ibdname(ij1),ij1=1,24)

read(binary) (pos(ij1),ij1=1,3),(rot(ij1),ij1=1,3)

endif

if(itype.ne.0.or.ipstk2.ge.8) then

if(ibody.eq.0) then

read(binary) nelem

read(binary) (ielem(ijl),ijl=1,nelem)


494

endif

if(ibody.eq.1) then

do ijl=1,nitems

read(binary) npatch,npoint

do ijm=1,npatch

read(binary) ipatn,ipatt,ip1,ip2

enddo

do ijm=1,npoint

read(binary) ipoint,xp,yp,zp

enddo

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.2) then

do ijl=1,nitems


do ijm=1,npatch

read(binary) ipatn,ipatt,ip1,ip2,ip3,ip4

enddo

do ijm=1,npoint


enddo

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.3) then

do ijl=1,nitems

read(binary) nurbid,kpt,idum3,kor,idum5,idum6


do ijm=1,kpt

read(binary) xp,yp,zp

enddo

read(binary) (homo(ijm),ijm=1,kpt)

read(binary) (xnot(ijm),ijm=1,kpt+kor)

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.4) then

do ijl=1,nitems

read(binary) nurbid,nptu,nptv,noru,norv,itrim

do ijm=1,nptu*nptv


enddo

read(binary) (homo(ijm),ijm=1,nptu*nptv)

read(binary) (xnot(ijm),ijm=1,nptu+noru+nptv+norv)

do ijm=1,itrim

read(binary) itriid,kpt,idum3,idum4,idum5,idum6

do ijl=1,kpt


enddo

enddo

enddo

endif

endif

enddo


496

endif

blkbegin = =beg=51400 (Contact Geometry Data)

ndie = number of contact bodies (from BLOCK 502nn)

ibody = number of body ijk

itype = type of body ijk

0 : deformable

1 : 2d line elements (type 9)

2 : 3d patch elements (type 18)

3 : 2d curves

4 : 3d surfaces

nitems = number of entities in body ijk

istruc = physical meaning of body ijk

1 : rigid

2 : deformable structural

3 : symmetry

4 : deformable heat-rigid

5 : workpiece (Autoforge only)

6 : deformable acoustic

bdnam = name of body ijk

pos(i) = position of center of body ijk

rot(i) = rotation vector for body ijk

nelem = number of elements in deformable body ijk

ielem(i) = user element numbers of deformable body ijk

npatch = number of patches in body ijk entity ijl

npoint = number of points in body ijk entity ijl


ipatn = patch number

ipatt = patch type (9=line,18=surface)

ip1 = first node of patch

ip2 = second node of patch

ip3 = third node of patch

ip4 = fourth node of patch

ipoint = point number

xp,yp,zp = x-, y- and z-coordinates of point

nurbid = identifier of NURBS

kpt = number of points for NURBS curve

kor = order of NURBS curve

nptu = number of points in u-direction for NURBS surface

nptv = number of points in v-direction for NURBS surface

noru = order of NURBS surface in u-direction

norv = order of NURBS surface in v-direction

itrim = number of trimming curves of NURBS surface

homo(i) = homogeneous coordinates

xnot(i) = knot vectors

itriid = identifier of trimming curve of NURBS surface

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 515nn - flow line data

****************************


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) numcrgr,numndgr,ngrid,idum4,idum5,idum6


498

do ijk=1,ngrid

if(numcrgr.eq.2) read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (lm(ijm),ijm=1,6)


enddo




read(binary) numcrgr,numndgr,ngrid,idum4,idum5,idum6

do ijk=1,ngrid

if(numcrgr.eq.2) read(binary) (lm(ijm),ijm=1,6)


enddo



blkbegin = ’=beg=51500 (Flow Line Data)

numcrgr = dimension of grid

2 : 2d grid (quad "elements")

3 : 3d grid (brick "elements")

numndgr = number of "nodes" in grid

ngrid = number of "elements" in grid

lm(1) = "element" number

lm(2) = "element" type

lm(3-6) = "node" numbers of quad "element"

lm(3-10) = "node" numbers of brick "element"

blkend = =end=


BLOCK xxxxx - begin increment/end of analysis indicator

*******************************************************

read(formatted,’(a4)’) csee

read(binary) isee

write(csee,’(a4)’) isee

csee = indicator

**** begin of incremental data

++++ end of analysis

BLOCK 516nn - loadcase title

****************************











500

blkbegin = =beg=51600 (Loadcase Title)

title = title of loadcase

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 517nn - integer increment verification data

*************************************************









blkbegin = =beg=51701 (Integer Increment Verification Data)

lm( 1) = remeshing flag (newmo)

0 : same mesh as before

1 : new mesh

lm( 2) = increment number (inc)

lm( 3) = sub-increment number (incsub)

lm( 4) = analysis type (jantyp)

> 100 element variables are written for this increment


lm( 5) = number of nodal variables (knod)

lm( 6) = number of design variables (ndsvar)

lm( 7) = normal/harmonic/modal/buckle flag (ihresp)

0 : normal

1 : modal result

2 : buckle result

3 : real harmonic result

4 : complex harmonic result

lm( 8) = number of recycles for this increment

lm( 9) = total number of separation recycles

lm(10) = total number of cutbacks

lm(11) = total number of increment splittings

lm(12) = not used

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 51800 - real increment verification data

**********************************************

If post file revision number is 9 (MARC 2000)


read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xlm(ijk),ijk=1,6)




502


read(binary) (xlm(ijk),ijk=1,6)



blkbegin = =beg=51800 (Real Increment Verification Data)

xlm( 1) = transient time (time)

xlm( 2) =

modal result : frequency (freq)

harmonic result : frequency (freq)

buckle result : buckle factor (fact)

xlm( 3) =

modal result : generalized mass (gmas)

xlm( 4) =

jantyp = 60 sensitivity check (respon)

jantyp = 61 objective function (objec )

xlm( 5) =

jantyp = 60 limiting value (rsplim)

jantyp = 61 critical constraint (conval)

xlm( 6) = not used

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 51801 - real increment verification data

**********************************************

If post file revision number > 10 (MARC 2001 and later)



read(formatted,’(6i13)’) nw

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xlm(ijk),ijk=1,nw)




read(binary) nw

read(binary) (xlm(ijk),ijk=1,nw)





xlm( 2) =




xlm( 3) =


xlm( 4) =



xlm( 5) =




504

xlm( 6) = not used

xlm( 7) = total volume

xlm( 8) = total mass

xlm( 9) = total strain energy

xlm(10) = total plastic strain energy

xlm(11) = total creep strain energy

xlm(12) = total Kinetic energy

xlm(13) = total damping energy

xlm(14) = total work done by contact/external forces

xlm(15) = total thermal energy

xlm(16) = total elastic strain energy

xlm(17) = total work done by contact forces

xlm(18) = total work done by friction forces

xlm(19) = total work done by springs

xlm(20) = total work done by foundations

xlm(21) = total work done by applied-force/disp

xlm(22) = not used

xlm(23) = not used

xlm(24) = not used

blkend = =end=

Note: nw = 18

BLOCK 519nn - new model

***********************

if(newmo.ne.0) then


repeat BLOCK 502nn upto and including BLOCK 514nn

endif

newmo = remeshing flag (see BLOCK 517nn)

BLOCK 520nn - magnitude of distributed loads

********************************************

if(ndistl.gt.0) then


read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (dist(ijk),ijk=1,ndistl)




read(binary) (dist(ijk),ijk=1,ndistl)



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52000 (Magnitude of Distributed Loads)


506

ndistl = number of dist loads (see BLOCK 502nn)

dist(i) = magnitude of dist load i

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 521nn - magnitude of spring forces

****************************************



do ijk=1,nsprng

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) force1,force2

enddo




do ijk=1,nsprng

read(binary) force1,force2

enddo



endif


blkbegin = =beg=52100 (Magnitude of Spring Forces)

nsprng = number of springs (see BLOCK 502nn)

force1 = real force of spring ijk

force2 = imaginary force of spring ijk

only non-zero for complex analysis (see BLOCK 517nn)

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 522nn - contact body results

**********************************

if(ndie.gt.0) then


do ijk=1,ndie

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (ddat(ijk),ijk=1,36)

enddo




do ijk=1,ndie

read(binary) (ddat(ijk),ijk=1,36)

enddo




508

endif

blkbegin = =beg=52200 (Contact Body Results)

ddat( 1) - ddat( 3) =

x-, y-, z- position of center of body ijk

ddat( 4) = not used

ddat( 5) = not used

ddat( 6) = total angle rotated for body ijk

ddat( 7) - ddat( 9) =

x-, y-, z- velocity of center of body ijk

ddat(10) = not used

ddat(11) = not used

ddat(12) = angular velocity of body ijk

ddat(13) - ddat(15) =

x-, y-, z- force of body ijk

ddat(16) - ddat(18) =

moment around x-, y-, z- axis of body ijk

ddat(19) - ddat(34) =

4x4 rotation/translation matrix to transform

original position of body ijk to current position

ddat(35) = not used

ddat(36) = not used

blkend = =end=


BLOCK 523nn - element integration point values

**********************************************

if(jantyp.gt.100.and.npost.gt.0.and.numel.gt.0) then


do ijk=1,numel

do ijl=1,nstres

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (elvar(ijk),ijk=1,npost)

enddo

enddo




do ijk=1,numel

do ijl=1,nstres

read(binary) (elvar(ijk),ijk=1,npost)

enddo

enddo



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52300 (Element Integration Point Values)


510

npost = number of post codes (see BLOCK 502nn)

numel = number of elements (see BLOCK 502nn)

jantyp = analysis type (see BLOCK 517nn)

nstres = number of integration points per element

(see BLOCK 502nn)

elvar(i) = values of post codes for element ijk, integration

point ijl

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 524nn - nodal results

***************************

if(jantyp.ne.60.and.jantyp.ne.61.and.knod.gt.0) then


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) nnqnod,nnvnod

do ijk=1,nnqnod

read(formatted,’(a48)’) cnam

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (ivec(ijk),ijk=1,12)

nd=0

if(ivec(7).eq.-1) nd=numnp*ivec(4)

if(nd.gt.0) then

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (vecr(ijl),ijl=1,nd)

if(ivec(6).eq.4.or.ivec(6).eq.5) then

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (veci(ijl),ijl=1,nd)


endif

endif

enddo




read(binary) nnqnod,nnvnod

do ijk=1,nnqnod

read(binary) (inam(ijl),ijl=1,48)

write(cnam,’(48a1)’) (inam(ijl),ijl=1,48)

read(binary) (ivec(ijk),ijk=1,12)

nd=0


if(nd.gt.0) then

read(binary) (vecr(ijl),ijl=1,nd)


read(binary) (veci(ijl),ijl=1,nd)

endif

endif



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52400 (Nodal Results)


512


knod = number of nodal variables (see BLOCK 517nn)


nnqnod = number of nodal vectors on post file

nnvnod = total number of nodal quantities on post file

cnam = name of nodal vector ijk

ivec( 1) = quantity identifier for vector ijk (see Table below)

ivec( 2) =

ivec( 3) =

ivec( 4) = number of components per node in vector ijk

ivec( 5) =

ivec( 6) = normal/modal/buckle/harmonic flag ijk

0 : normal

1 : modal

2 : buckle

3 : real harmonic

4 : complex harmonic (real + imaginary)

5 : complex harmonic (magnitude + phase)

ivec( 7) = number of nodes flag for vector ijk

-1 : values for all nodes given

0 : all values zero, no values given

ivec( 8) = not used

ivec( 9) = not used

ivec(10) = not used

ivec(11) = not used

ivec(11) = not used


vecr(i) = real values for vector ijk (or magnitude)

veci(i) = imaginary values for vector ijk (or phase)

blkend = =end=

Description of quantity identifiers of nodal vectors:

1 = Displacement

2 = Rotation

3 = External Force

4 = External Moment

5 = Reaction Force

6 = Reaction Moment

7 = Fluid Velocity

8 = Fluid Pressure

9 = External Fluid Force

10 = Reaction Fluid Force

11 = Sound Pressure

12 = External Sound Source

13 = Reaction Sound Source

14 = Temperature

15 = External Heat Flux

16 = Reaction Heat Flux

17 = Electric Potential

18 = External Electric Charge

19 = Reaction Electric Charge

20 = Magnetic Potential

21 = External Electric Current


514

22 = Reaction Electric Current

23 = Pore Pressure

24 = External Mass Flux

25 = Reaction Mass Flux

26 = Bearing Pressure

27 = Bearing Force

28 = Velocity

29 = Rotational Velocity

30 = Acceleration

31 = Rotational Acceleration

32 = Modal Mass

33 = Rotational Modal Mass

34 = Contact Normal Stress

35 = Contact Normal Force

36 = Contact Friction Stress

37 = Contact Friction Force

38 = Contact Status

39 = Contact Touched Body

40 = Herrmann Variable

cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccc

BLOCK 25 - response gradients

*****************************

if(jantyp.eq.60) then



read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (respon(ijk),ijk=1,ndsvar)




read(binary) (respon(ijk),ijk=1,ndsvar)



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52500 (Response Gradients)


ndsvar = number of design variables (see BLOCK 517nn)

respon(i)= response gradient for design variable i

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 526nn - element contribution to response

**********************************************




516

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (elcon(ijk),ijk=1,numel)




read(binary) (elcon(ijk),ijk=1,numel)



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52600 (Element Contribution to the Response)



elcon(i) = contribution of element i to the response

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 527nn - design variable values

************************************



read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (desvar(ijk),ijk=1,ndsvar)





read(binary) (desvar(ijk),ijk=1,ndsvar)



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52700 (Design Variable Values)



desvar(i)= value of design variable i

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 528nn - flow line updates

********************************

if(numndgr.gt.0) then


do ijk=1,numndgr

if(numcrgr.eq.2) read(formatted,’(i13,2e13.6)’) inod,yp,yp

if(numcrgr.eq.3) read(formatted,’(i13,3e13.6)’) inod,yp,yp,zp

enddo



518



do ijk=1,numndgr

if(numcrgr.eq.2) read(binary) inod,yp,yp

if(numcrgr.eq.3) read(binary) inod,yp,yp,zp

enddo



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52800 (Flow Line Updates)

numndgr = number of "nodes" in grid (see BLOCK 515nn)

numcrgr = dimension of grid (see BLOCK 515nn)

inod = id of grid "node" ijk

xp,yp,zp = x-, y-, z- coordinate of grid "node" ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 529nn - global variables

********************************

if(postrv.ge.11) then



read(formatted,’(2i13)’) inumv,inumt

do ijk=1,inumv

read(formatted,’(a48)’) globename(ijk)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) ityp,id2,inum,nnum,id5,id6

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xlm(ijl),ijl=1,nnum)

enddo




do ijk=1,inumv

read(binary) (inam(ijl)’),ijl=1,48)

write(globnam,’48a1)’) (inam(ijl),ijl=1,48)

read(binary) ityp,id2,inum,nnum,id5,id6

read(binary) (xlm(ijl)’),ijl=1,nnum)

enddo



endif


inumv = number of items in this block

inumt = total number of global variables in this block

globname = global variable name for this item

ityp = global variable type:


520

1=Cavity Pressure

2=Cavity volume

3=Global State Variable

4=Cavity Mass

5=Cavity Temperature

6=Throat Coordinate

7=Loadcase percentage complete

id2 = 0 (for the time being)

inum = id for this global variable, e.g. cavity number

nnum = 1 (number of variables in this item)


id6 = 0 (for future use)

xlm = value of the global variables defined in this item

blkend = =end=

BLOCK yyyyy - end increment indicator

*************************************


read(binary) isee


csee = indicator

---- end of incremental data


Marc Post File Layout (Revision 13 or Higher): PLDUMP13

The post file is subdivided into blocks with each block having a unique number and name. For each block, a description is given below, following the Fortran code of PLDUMP13, both for formatted and binary post files. First, the block number and name are given. Next, the way in which the data is read is shown. Finally, the data read is explained.

The post file for revision 13 has one new block:

53800 - Element Groups

BLOCK 501nn - analysis title

****************************










blkbegin = =beg=50100 (Analysis Title)

title = title of analysis

blkend = =end=


522

BLOCK 502nn - analysis verification data

****************************************

read(formatted,'(a70)') blkbegin

read(formatted,'(6i13)') (lm(ijk),ijk=1,6)

read(formatted,'( a5)') blkend


write(blkbegin,'(70a1)') blkbegin



write(blkbegin,'(5a1)') blkend

blkbegin = =beg=50201 (Analysis Verification Data)

lm(1) = post file revision number (postrv)

lm(2) = number of nodes in the model (numnp )

lm(3) = number of elements in the model (numel )

lm(4) = maximum number of nodes per element (nnodmx)

lm(5) = not used

lm(6) = not used

blkend = =end=


BLOCK 505nn - domain decomposition information

***********************************************


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) nprocd,idomit




read(binary) nprocd,idomit



blkbegin = =beg=50500 (Domain Decomposition Information)

nprocd = number of domains of total model

idomit = domain number of this post file

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 506nn - element variable postcodes

****************************************


read(formatted,’(2i13)’) npost

do ijk=1,npost

read(formatted,’(i13,a48)’) ipost,cpost


524

enddo




read(binary) npost

do ijk=1,npost

read(binary) ipost,(iname(ijl),ijl=1,48)

enddo



blkbegin = =beg=50601 (Element Variable Postcodes)

npost = number of element post variables

ipost = element post code (see manual Volume C model definition

option POST) + 1000 * layer number for post variable ijk

cpost = character string with name to be given to post variable ijk

(see manual Volume C model definition option POST)

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 538nn - element type data

*******************************


read(formatted,'(i13)') neltyp


do j=1,neltyp

read(formatted,'(6i13)') (lm(i),i=1,8)

read(formatted,'(2i13)') npvars(j),nintps(j)

read(formatted,'(6i13)') (ints(i),i=1, npvars(j))

ityps(lm(1))=j

enddo




read(binary) neltyp

do j=1,neltyp

read(binary) (lm(i),i=1,8)

read(binary) npvars(j),nintps(j)

read(binary) (ints(i),i=1, npvars(j))

ityps(lm(1))=j

enddo



blkbegin = =beg=53800 (Element Type Data)

neltyp = number of element types

lm(1) = MARC element type

lm(2) = number of nodes per element

lm(3) = number of integration points per element

lm(4) = number of direct stress components


526

lm(5) = number of shear stress components

lm(6) = element class

lm(7) = toplogical class

lm(8) = heat transfer element

npvars(j)= number of valid post codes for element type j

nintps(j)= number of integration points in post file

ints(*) = index of valid post codes for element type j

(see block 50601)

ityps(*) = array to convert MARC element type to sequence number

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 507nn - element connectivities

************************************


read(formatted,’(2i13)’) numelp,nnodmx

do j=1,numelp

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) ielid,ityp,nnod,(iel(ijl),ijl=1,nnodmx)

enddo




read(binary) numelp,nnodmx

do j=1,numelp


read(binary) ielid,ityp,nnod,(iel(ijl),ijl=1,nnodmx)

enddo



blkbegin = =beg=50701 (Element Connectivities)

numelp = number of elements in this block

nnodmx = number of nodes per element

ielid = user element number of element j

ityp = MARC element type of element j (see Volume B)

nnod = number of nodes of element j

iel(i) = user node number of i-th node of element j

jetyp(j) = element type index for element j

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 508nn - nodal coordinates

*******************************


read(formatted,’(2i13)’) numnp, ncrd

do ijk=1,numnp

read(formatted,’(i13,5e13.6,/,6e13.6)’)

inod(ijk),(xord(ijl,ijk),ijl=1,ncrd)

enddo



528



read(binary) numnp, ncrd

do ijk=1,numnp

read(binary) inod(ijk),(xord(ijl,ijk),ijl=1,ncrd)

enddo



blkbegin = =beg=50801 (Nodal Coordinates)

numnp = number of nodes in this block.

ncrd = number of coordinates per node

inod = user node number of node ijk

xord(i) = i-th coordinate of node ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53000 - point data

************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) npoints


do ijk=1,npoints

read(formatted,’(i13,3e13.6)’) ipnt(ijk),(xpnt(ijl,ijk),ijl=1,3)


enddo

endif




read(binary) npoints


do ijk=1,npoints

read(binary) ipnt(ijk),(xpnt(ijl,ijk),ijl=1,3)

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53000 (Points)

npoints = number of geometric points

ipnt = user point id of point ijk

xpnt(i,ijk)=i th coordinate of point ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53100 - curve data

************************


530


read(formatted,’(i13)’) ncurves


do ijk=1,ncurves

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (icurvinf(ijl),ijl=1,6)


lct=icurvinf(2)

npu=icurvinf(3)

nou=icurvinf(4)

nrx=3

if(lct.eq.6) nrx=5

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xhomog(ijl),ijl=1,npu)

lss=npu+nou


if(lct.eq.-4) then

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (jpnt(ijl),ijl=1,npu)


do itp=1,npu

read(formatted,’(i13,2e13.6)’) itpid,xiso,yiso

enddo


do itp=1,npu


enddo


do itp=1,npu


read(formatted,’(5e13.6)’) (xtrim(kk1),kk1=1,3),xiso,yiso

enddo

endif

enddo

endif




read(binary) ncurves


do ijk=1,ncurves

read(binary) (icurvinf(ijl),ijl=1,6)


lct=icurvinf(2)

npu=icurvinf(3)

nou=icurvinf(4)

nrx=3

if(lct.eq.6) nrx=5

read(binary) (xhomog(ijl),ijl=1,npu)

lss=npu+nou


if(lct.eq.-4) then

read(binary) (jpnt(ijl),ijl=1,npu)


532


do itp=1,npu

read(binary)itpid,xiso,yiso

enddo


do itp=1,npu


enddo


do itp=1,npu

read(binary) (xtrim(kk1),kk1=1,3),xiso,yiso

enddo

endif

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53100 (Curves)

ncurves = number of geometric curves

icurvinf(1)= user curve id of curve ijk

icurvinf(2)= curve type

-4 -NURB curve - referencing previously defined points

+4 -NURB curve - not referencing previously defined points

-6 -Trimming curve on surface - referencing previously defined points

+6 -Trimming curve on surface - not referencing previously

defined points


icurvinf(3)= number of points

icurvinf(4)= order of curve



xhomog = homogeneous coordinates of points on curve

xknot = knot vector of curve


xpnt = coordinates of points on curve

xtrim = real coordinates of points on trimming curve

xiso,yiso = isoparametric coordinates of points on trimming curve relative to

surface

itpid = point id of trimming point

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53200 - surface data

**************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) nsurfaces


do ijk=1,nsurfaces

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (isurfinf(ijl),ijl=1,7)


lct=isurfinf(2)


534

npu=isurfinf(3)

nou=isurfinf(4)

npv=isurfinf(5)

nov=isurfinf(6)

ntrim=isurfinf(7)

nnnn=npu*npv

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xhomog(ijl),ijl=1,nnnn)

lss=npu+nou+npv+nov


if(lct.eq.-9) then

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (jpnt(ijl),ijl=1,nnnn)


do itp=1,nnnn


enddo

endif

if(ntrim.ne.0) then

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (jtrmcv(ijl),ijl=1,ntrim)

endif

enddo

endif





read(binary) nsurfaces


do ijk=1,npoints

read(binary) (isurfinf(ijl),ijl=1,7)


lct=isurfinf(2)

npu=isurfinf(3)

nou=isurfinf(4)

npv=isurfinf(5)

nov=isurfinf(6)

ntrim=isurfinf(7)

nnnn=npu*npv

read(binary) (xhomog(ijl),ijl=1,nnnn)

lss=npu+nou+npv+nov


if(lct.eq.-9) then

read(binary) (jpnt(ijl),ijl=1,nnnn)


do itp=1,nnnn


enddo

endif

if(ntrim.ne.0) then

read(binary) (jtrmcv(ijl),ijl=1,ntrim)

endif


536

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53200 (Surfaces)

nsurfaces = number of geometric surfaces

isurfinf(1)= user surface id of surface ijk

isurfinf(2)= surface type

-9 -NURB surface - referencing previously defined points

+9 -NURB surface - not referencing previously defined points

isurfinf(3)= number of points, 1st isoparametric direction

isurfinf(4)= order of curve, 1st isoparametric direction

isurfinf(5)= number of points, 2nd isoparametric direction

isurfinf(6)= order of curve, 2nd isoparametric direction

isurfinf(7)= number of trimming curves

xhomog = homogeneous coordinates of points on surface

xknot = knot vector of surface


xpnt(i) = i th coordinate of point

jtrmcv = array of curve ids that are the trimming curves for this surface

blkend = =end=


BLOCK 53300 - attach nodes

**************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) natpts


do ijk=1,natpts

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) jpoint(ijk),jnode(ijk)

enddo

endif




read(binary) natpts


do ijk=1,natpts

read(binary) jpoint(ijk),jnode(ijk)

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53300 (Attach Nodes)


538

natpts = number of nodes attached to points

jpoint(ijk)= point id for ijk th node

jnode(ijk) = node id for ith th node

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53400 - attach edges

**************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) ncvwedat


do ijk=1,ncvwedat

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) icurvid,nedgat

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (lelem(ilm),ilm=1,nedgat)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (ledge(ilm),ilm=1,nedgat)

enddo

endif




read(binary) ncvwedat


do ijk=1,ncvwedat


read(binary) icurvid,nedgat

read(binary) (lelem(ilm),ilm=1,nedgat)

read(binary) (ledge(ilm),ilm=1,nedgat)

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53400 (Attach Edges)

ncvwedat = number of curves with edges attached

icurvid = curve id

nedgat = number of edges attached to this curve

lelem = array of elements attached to the curve

ledge = array of edge ids corresponding to the element (Marc convention)

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53500 - attach faces

**************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) nsfwfcat


do ijk=1,nsfwfcat

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) isurfid,nfaceat


540

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (lelem(ilm),ilm=1,nfaceat)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (lface(ilm),ilm=1,nfaceat)

enddo

endif




read(binary) nsfwfcat


do ijk=1,nsfwfcat

read(binary) isurfid,nfaceat

read(binary) (lelem(ilm),ilm=1,nfaceat)

read(binary) (lface(ilm),ilm=1,nfaceat)

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53500 (Attach Faces)

nsfwfcat = number of surfaces with faces attached

isurfid = surface id

nfaceat = number of faces attached to this surface

lelem = array of elements attached to the surface


lface = array of face ids corresponding to the element (Marc convention)

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 53600 - boundary conditions

*********************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) nbcs

if(nbcs.ne.0) then

do ijk=1,nbcs

read(formatted,’(32a1)’) (ibcname(ilm),ilm=1,32)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (ibcinfo(ilm),ilm=1,9)

ltyp =ibcinfo(1)

lmode =ibcinfo(2)

lmact =ibcinfo(3)

lmharm=ibcinfo(4)

lmng =ibcinfo(5)

lmread=ibcinfo(7)

lmreal=ibcinfo(8)

lmdim =ibcinfo(9)

read(formatted,’(6e13)’) ( rload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (itrload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)


read(formatted,’(6e13)’) ( cload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)


542

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (itcload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)

endif

if(lmdim.ne.0) then

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (lm(ilm),ilm=1,lmdim)

endif

do kk2=1,lmng

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) igid,igtype

read(formatted,’(80a1)’) (kbcline(ilm),ilm=1,80)

enddo

enddo

endif




read(formatted) nbcs

if(nbcs.ne.0) then

do ijk=1,nbcs

read(formatted) (ibcname(ilm),ilm=1,32)

read(formatted) (ibcinfo(ilm),ilm=1,9)

ltyp =ibcinfo(1)

lmode =ibcinfo(2)

lmact =ibcinfo(3)

lmharm=ibcinfo(4)


lmng =ibcinfo(5)

lmread=ibcinfo(7)

lmreal=ibcinfo(8)

lmdim =ibcinfo(9)

read(formatted) ( rload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)

read(formatted) (itrload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)


read(formatted) ( cload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)

read(formatted) (itcload(ilm),ilm=1,lmreal)

endif

if(lmdim.ne.0) then

read(formatted) (lm(ilm),ilm=1,lmdim)

endif

do kk2=1,lmng

read(formatted) igid,igtype

read(formatted) (kbcline(ilm),ilm=1,80)

enddo

enddo

endif



blkbegin = =beg=53600 (Boundary Conditions)

nbcs = number of boundary conditions

ibcname = boundary condition name

ibcinfo = boundary condition information


544

ibcinfo(1) = boundary condition physics type

=1 mechanical displacements-pressure

=2 temperature temperature-fluxes

=3 magnetic voltage-current

=4 electrical potential-charge

=5 bearing pressure-mass flux

=6 fluid velocity - pressure

=7 acoustics pressure-source

ibcinfo(2) = boundary condition type

=1 fixed

=2 point

=3 distributed

=4 foundation

=5 initial displacement/temperature/pressure

=6 initial velocity or velocity for convection

=7 initial acceleration

=8 initial density or relative density (powder)

=9 hold node

=10 rad-cavity or press-cavity

=11 initial stress - mechanical analysis only

=12 initial plastic strain - mechanical analysis only

=13 initial porosity -

=14 porosity

=15 initial pore pressure

=16 change pore pressure

=17 initial temperature - not heat transfer analysis


=18 point temperature - not heat transfer analysis

=19 initial state - not heat transfer analysis

=20 change state - not heat transfer analysis

=21 initial void ratio

=22 void ratio

=23 initial preconsolidation pressure

=24 weld flux (read in readbcweld.f)

ibcinfo(3) = active/inactive flag

ibcinfo(4) = user subroutine used

ibcinfo(5) = complex harmonic flag

= 0 - real values only

= 1 - real and imaginary values

= 2 - magnitude and phase

ibcinfo(6) = Fourier loading series term (currently always = 0)

ibcinfo(7) = Number of geometric types

ibcinfo(8) = Number of real data associated with boundary condition

ibcinfo(9) = Number of integer data associated with boundary condition

rload = real data associated with boundary condition

itrload = table ids associated with real data

cload = imaginary or phase data associated with boundary condition

itcload = table ids associated with imaginary or phase data

igid = geometry number

igtype = geometry type

1= element ids

2= node ids

3= volume


546

4= surface

5= curve

6= point

7= element set

8= node set

9= polycurve

10= polysurface

11= element-edge

12= element-face

13= elem mn-edge

14= elem mn-face

15= cavity

16= surface-edge

17= curve-face

18= surface mn-edge

19= curve mn-face

kbcline = list of location where boundary condition is applied

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 509nn - spring data

*************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) nsprng

do ijk=1,nsprng


read(formatted,’(5i13)’) (ispr(ijl,ijk),ijl=1,5)

enddo




read(binary) nsprng

do ijk=1,nsprng

read(binary) id,node1,idof1,node2,idof2

enddo




548

blkbegin = =beg=50900 (Spring Data)

nsprng = number of springs

id = number of spring ijk

node1 = number of first node of spring ijk


node2 = number of second node of spring ijk


blkend = =end=

BLOCK 510nn - nodal codes and transformation id

***********************************************


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (inoco(ijl),ijl=1,numnp)




read(binary) (inoco(ijl),ijl=1,numnp)



blkbegin = =beg=51000 (Nodal Codes and Transformation ID)


inoco(i) = nodal code for node i + 1000*transformation number for node i

blkend = =end=


BLOCK 511nn - ties due to meshing

*********************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) nadtie

do ijk=1,nadtie

read(formatted,’(2i13)’) ityp,iret

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (nodes(ijl),ijl=1,iret)

enddo




read(binary) nadtie

do ijk=1,nadtie

read(binary) ityp,iret

read(binary) (nodes(ijl),ijl=1,iret)

enddo



blkbegin = =beg=51101 (Ties due to Meshing)

nadtie = number of adaptive meshing tyings


550

ityp = type of adaptive meshing tying



iret = number of nodes involved in adaptive meshing tying

nodes(i) = node numbers involved in adaptive meshing tying

91 : nodes(1)=0.5 *(nodes(2)+nodes(3))

92 : nodes(1)=0.25*(nodes(2)+nodes(3)+nodes(4)+nodes(5))

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 512nn - transformation matrices

*************************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) nbctra

do ijk=1,nbctra

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) ((d(i1,i2),i1=1,3),i2=1,3)

enddo




read(binary) nbctra

do ijk=1,nbctra

read(binary) ((d(i1,i2),i1=1,3),i2=1,3)

enddo




blkbegin = =beg=51201 (Transformation Matrices)

nbctra = number of transformations

d(i,j) = transformation matrix for transformation number ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 513nn - set definition

****************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) nset

do ijk=1,nset



if(isetn.ne.0) then


if(isett.eq.12.or.isett.eq.13)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (nsett(ij1).ij1=1,isetn)

endif

endif

enddo



552



do ijk=1,nset




if(isetn.ne.0) then


if(isett.eq.12.or.isett.eq.13.or.isett.eq.18.or.isett.eq.19) then

read(binary) (neddt(ij1),ij1=1,isetn)

endif

endif

enddo




nset = number of sets




0 : element set

1 : node set

12: edge set

13: face set

14: point set


15: curve set

16: surface set

17: cavity set

18: ordered surface set

19 ordered curve set


neddt(i) = face/edge number if face/edge set of set ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 514nn - contact geometry data

***********************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) ndie

do ijk=1,ndie

read(formatted,’(4i13)’) ibody,itype,nitems,istruc

read(formatted,’(a24)’) bdname

read(formatted,(6e13.6)’) (pos(ij1),ij1-1,3),(rot(ij1),ij1=1,3)

if(itype.eq.0) then

read(formatted,’(i13)’) nelem

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (ielem(ijl),ijl=1,nelem)

endif

if(itype.eq.1) then

do ijl=1,nitems



554

do ijm=1,npatch

read(formatted’(4i13)’) ipatn,ipatt,ip1,ip2

enddo

do ijm=1,npoint

read(formatted’(i13,2e13.6)’) ipoint,xp,yp

enddo

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.2) then

do ijl=1,nitems


do ijm=1,npatch

read(formatted’(6i13)’) ipatn,ipatt,ip1,ip2,ip3,ip4

enddo

do ijm=1,npoint

read(formatted’(i13,3e13.6)’) ipoint,xp,yp,zp

enddo

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.3) then

do ijl=1,nitems

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) nurbid,kpt,idum3,kor,idum5,idum6

do ijm=1,kpt


enddo

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (homo(ijm),ijm=1,kpt)


read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xnot(ijm),ijm=1,kpt+kor)

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.4) then

do ijl=1,nitems

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) nurbid,nptu,nptv,noru,norv,itrim

do ijm=1,nptu*nptv


enddo

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (homo(ijm),ijm=1,nptu*nptv)

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xnot(ijm),ijm=1,nptu+noru+nptv+norv)

do ijm=1,itrim

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) itriid,kpt,idum3,idum4,idum5,idum6

do ijl=1,kpt


enddo

enddo

enddo

endif

enddo




read(binary) ndie


556

do ijk=1,ndie

read(binary) ibody,itype,nitems,istruc

read(binary) (ibdname(ij1),ij1=1,24)

write(bdname,’(24a1)’) (ibdname(ij1),ij1=1,24)

read(binary) (pos(ij1),ij1=1,3),(rot(ij1),ij1=1,3)

if(ibody.eq.0) then

read(binary) nelem

read(binary) (ielem(ijl),ijl=1,nelem)

endif

if(ibody.eq.1) then

do ijl=1,nitems


do ijm=1,npatch

read(binary) ipatn,ipatt,ip1,ip2

enddo

do ijm=1,npoint


enddo

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.2) then

do ijl=1,nitems


do ijm=1,npatch

read(binary) ipatn,ipatt,ip1,ip2,ip3,ip4

enddo


do ijm=1,npoint


enddo

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.3) then

do ijl=1,nitems

read(binary) nurbid,kpt,idum3,kor,idum5,idum6

do ijm=1,kpt


enddo

read(binary) (homo(ijm),ijm=1,kpt)

read(binary) (xnot(ijm),ijm=1,kpt+kor)

enddo

endif

if(ibody.eq.4) then

do ijl=1,nitems

read(binary) nurbid,nptu,nptv,noru,norv,itrim

do ijm=1,nptu*nptv


enddo

read(binary) (homo(ijm),ijm=1,nptu*nptv)

read(binary) (xnot(ijm),ijm=1,nptu+noru+nptv+norv)

do ijm=1,itrim

read(binary) itriid,kpt,idum3,idum4,idum5,idum6

do ijl=1,kpt


558


enddo

enddo

enddo

endif

enddo



blkbegin = =beg=51401 (Contact Geometry Data)

ndie = number of contact bodies

ibody = number of body ijk

itype = type of body ijk

0 : deformable

1 : 2d line elements (type 9)

2 : 3d patch elements (type 18)

3 : 2d curves

4 : 3d surfaces

nitems = number of entities in body ijk

istruc = physical meaning of body ijk

1 : rigid

2 : deformable structural

3 : symmetry

4 : deformable heat-rigid

5 : workpiece (Autoforge only)

6 : deformable acoustic


bdnam = name of body ijk

pos(i) = position of center of body ijk

rot(i) = rotation vector for body ijk

nelem = number of elements in deformable body ijk

ielem(i) = user element numbers of deformable body ijk

npatch = number of patches in body ijk entity ijl

npoint = number of points in body ijk entity ijl

ipatn = patch number

ipatt = patch type (9=line,18=surface)

ip1 = first node of patch

ip2 = second node of patch

ip3 = third node of patch

ip4 = fourth node of patch

ipoint = point number

xp,yp,zp = x-, y- and z-coordinates of point

nurbid = identifier of NURBS

kpt = number of points for NURBS curve

kor = order of NURBS curve

nptu = number of points in u-direction for NURBS surface

nptv = number of points in v-direction for NURBS surface

noru = order of NURBS surface in u-direction

norv = order of NURBS surface in v-direction

itrim = number of trimming curves of NURBS surface

homo(i) = homogeneous coordinates

xnot(i) = knot vectors

itriid = identifier of trimming curve of NURBS surface

blkend = =end=


560

BLOCK 515nn - flow line data

****************************


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) numcrgr,numndgr,ngrid,idum4,idum5,idum6

do ijk=1,ngrid



enddo




read(binary) numcrgr,numndgr,ngrid,idum4,idum5,idum6

do ijk=1,ngrid



enddo



blkbegin = ’=beg=51500 (Flow Line Data)

numcrgr = dimension of grid

2 : 2d grid (quad "elements")

3 : 3d grid (brick "elements")


numndgr = number of "nodes" in grid

ngrid = number of "elements" in grid

lm(1) = "element" number

lm(2) = "element" type

lm(3-6) = "node" numbers of quad "element"

lm(3-10) = "node" numbers of brick "element"

blkend = =end=

BLOCK xxxxx - begin increment/end of analysis indicator

*******************************************************


read(binary) isee


csee = indicator

**** begin of incremental data

++++ end of analysis


562

BLOCK 516nn - loadcase title

****************************










blkbegin = =beg=51600 (Loadcase Title)

title = title of loadcase

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 517nn - integer increment verification data

*************************************************










blkbegin = =beg=51701 (Integer Increment Verification Data)

lm( 1) = remeshing flag (newmo)

0 : same mesh as before

1 : new mesh

lm( 2) = increment number (inc)

lm( 3) = sub-increment number (incsub)

lm( 4) = analysis type (jantyp)

> 100 element variables are written for this increment

lm( 5) = number of nodal variables (knod)

lm( 6) = number of design variables (ndsvar)

lm( 7) = normal/harmonic/modal/buckle flag (ihresp)

0 : normal

1 : modal result

2 : buckle result

3 : real harmonic result

4 : complex harmonic result

lm( 8) = number of recycles for this increment

lm( 9) = total number of separation recycles

lm(10) = total number of cutbacks

lm(11) = total number of increment splittings


564

lm(12) = not used

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 518nn - real increment verification data

**********************************************


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) nw

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xlm(ijk),ijk=1,nw)




read(binary) nw

read(binary) (xlm(ijk),ijk=1,nw)





xlm( 2) =




xlm( 3) =



xlm( 4) =



xlm( 5) =



xlm( 6) = not used

xlm( 7) = total volume

xlm( 8) = total mass

xlm( 9) = total strain energy

xlm(10) = total plastic strain energy

xlm(11) = total creep strain energy

xlm(12) = total Kinetic energy

xlm(13) = total damping energy

xlm(14) = total work done by contact/external forces

xlm(15) = total thermal energy

xlm(16) = total elastic strain energy

xlm(17) = total work done by contact forces

xlm(18) = total work done by friction forces

xlm(19) = total work done by springs

xlm(20) = total work done by foundations

xlm(21) = total work done by applied-force/disp

xlm(22) = not used

xlm(23) = not used

xlm(24) = not used


566

blkend = =end=

Note: nw = 24

BLOCK 519nn - new model

***********************

if(newmo.ne.0) then

repeat BLOCK 502nn upto and including BLOCK 514nn

endif

newmo = remeshing flag (see BLOCK 517nn)

BLOCK 520nn - magnitude of distributed loads

********************************************


read(formatted,’(i13)’) ndistl

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (dist(ijk),ijk=1,ndistl)





read(binary) ndistl

read(binary) (dist(ijk),ijk=1,ndistl)



blkbegin = =beg=52001 (Magnitude of Distributed Loads)

ndistl = number of dist loads

dist(i) = magnitude of dist load i

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 521nn - magnitude of spring forces

****************************************



do ijk=1,nsprng

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) force1,force2

enddo




do ijk=1,nsprng


568

read(binary) force1,force2

enddo



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52100 (Magnitude of Spring Forces)

nsprng = number of springs (see BLOCK 509nn)

force1 = real force of spring ijk

force2 = imaginary force of spring ijk

only non-zero for complex analysis (see BLOCK 517nn)

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 522nn - contact body results

**********************************

if(ndie.gt.0) then


do ijk=1,ndie

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (ddat(ijk),ijk=1,36)

enddo





do ijk=1,ndie

read(binary) (ddat(ijk),ijk=1,36)

enddo



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52200 (Contact Body Results)

ddat( 1) - ddat( 3) =

x-, y-, z- position of center of body ijk

ddat( 4) = not used

ddat( 5) = not used

ddat( 6) = total angle rotated for body ijk

ddat( 7) - ddat( 9) =

x-, y-, z- velocity of center of body ijk

ddat(10) = not used

ddat(11) = not used

ddat(12) = angular velocity of body ijk

ddat(13) - ddat(15) =

x-, y-, z- force of body ijk

ddat(16) - ddat(18) =

moment around x-, y-, z- axis of body ijk

ddat(19) - ddat(34) =


570

4x4 rotation/translation matrix to transform

original position of body ijk to current position

ddat(35) = not used

ddat(36) = not used

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 523nn - element integration point values

**********************************************

if(jantyp.gt.100.and.npost.gt.0.and.numel.gt.0) then


do k=1,numel

j=jetyp(k)

nstres=nintps(j)

npost=npvars(j)

do ijl=1,nstres

read(formatted,'(6e13.6)') (elvar(ijk),ijk=1,npost)

enddo

enddo




do k=1,numel


j=jetyp(k)

nstres=nintps(j)

npost=npvars(j)

do ijl=1,nstres

read(binary) (elvar(ijk),ijk=1,npost)

enddo

enddo



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52301 (Element Integration Point Values)

numel = number of elements (see BLOCK 507nn)


jetyp(k) = element type index for element k (see BLOCK 507nn)

npvars(j)= number of valid postcodes for element type j (see BLOCK 538nn)

nintps(j)= number of integration points for element type j (see BLOCK 538nn)

elvar(i) = values of post codes for element k, integration point ijl

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 524nn - nodal results

***************************


572

if(jantyp.ne.60.and.jantyp.ne.61.and.knod.gt.0) then


read(formatted,’(6i13)’) nnqnod,nnvnod

do ijk=1,nnqnod

read(formatted,’(a48)’) cnam

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) (ivec(ijk),ijk=1,12)

nd=0


if(nd.gt.0) then

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (vecr(ijl),ijl=1,nd)


read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (veci(ijl),ijl=1,nd)

endif

endif

enddo




read(binary) nnqnod,nnvnod

do ijk=1,nnqnod

read(binary) (inam(ijl),ijl=1,48)

write(cnam,’(48a1)’) (inam(ijl),ijl=1,48)

read(binary) (ivec(ijk),ijk=1,12)


nd=0


if(nd.gt.0) then

read(binary) (vecr(ijl),ijl=1,nd)


read(binary) (veci(ijl),ijl=1,nd)

endif

endif



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52400 (Nodal Results)


knod = number of nodal variables (see BLOCK 517nn)


nnqnod = number of nodal vectors on post file

nnvnod = total number of nodal quantities on post file

cnam = name of nodal vector ijk

ivec( 1) = quantity identifier for vector ijk (see Table below)

ivec( 2) =

ivec( 3) =

ivec( 4) = number of components per node in vector ijk

ivec( 5) =

ivec( 6) = normal/modal/buckle/harmonic flag ijk


574

0 : normal

1 : modal

2 : buckle

3 : real harmonic

4 : complex harmonic (real + imaginary)

5 : complex harmonic (magnitude + phase)

ivec( 7) = number of nodes flag for vector ijk

-1 : values for all nodes given

0 : all values zero, no values given

ivec( 8) = not used

ivec( 9) = not used

ivec(10) = not used

ivec(11) = not used

ivec(11) = not used

vecr(i) = real values for vector ijk (or magnitude)

veci(i) = imaginary values for vector ijk (or phase)

blkend = =end=

Description of quantity identifiers of nodal vectors:

1 = Displacement

2 = Rotation

3 = External Force

4 = External Moment

5 = Reaction Force

6 = Reaction Moment

7 = Fluid Velocity


8 = Fluid Pressure

9 = External Fluid Force

10 = Reaction Fluid Force

11 = Sound Pressure

12 = External Sound Source

13 = Reaction Sound Source

14 = Temperature

15 = External Heat Flux

16 = Reaction Heat Flux

17 = Electric Potential

18 = External Electric Charge

19 = Reaction Electric Charge

20 = Magnetic Potential

21 = External Electric Current

22 = Reaction Electric Current

23 = Pore Pressure

24 = External Mass Flux

25 = Reaction Mass Flux

26 = Bearing Pressure

27 = Bearing Force

28 = Velocity

29 = Rotational Velocity

30 = Acceleration

31 = Rotational Acceleration

32 = Modal Mass

33 = Rotational Modal Mass


576

34 = Contact Normal Stress

35 = Contact Normal Force

36 = Contact Friction Stress

37 = Contact Friction Force

38 = Contact Status

39 = Contact Touched Body

40 = Herrmann Variable

cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccc

BLOCK 525nn - response gradients

*****************************



read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (respon(ijk),ijk=1,ndsvar)




read(binary) (respon(ijk),ijk=1,ndsvar)



endif


blkbegin = =beg=52500 (Response Gradients)



respon(i)= response gradient for design variable i

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 526nn - element contribution to response

**********************************************



read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (elcon(ijk),ijk=1,numel)




read(binary) (elcon(ijk),ijk=1,numel)



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52600 (Element Contribution to the Response)


578



elcon(i) = contribution of element i to the response

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 527nn - design variable values

************************************



read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (desvar(ijk),ijk=1,ndsvar)




read(binary) (desvar(ijk),ijk=1,ndsvar)



endif

blkbegin = =beg=52700 (Design Variable Values)




desvar(i)= value of design variable i

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 528nn - flow line updates

********************************

if(numndgr.gt.0) then


do ijk=1,numndgr

if(numcrgr.eq.2) read(formatted,’(i13,2e13.6)’) inod,yp,yp

if(numcrgr.eq.3) read(formatted,’(i13,3e13.6)’) inod,yp,yp,zp

enddo




do ijk=1,numndgr

if(numcrgr.eq.2) read(binary) inod,yp,yp

if(numcrgr.eq.3) read(binary) inod,yp,yp,zp

enddo



endif


580


numndgr = number of "nodes" in grid (see BLOCK 515nn)

numcrgr = dimension of grid (see BLOCK 515nn)

inod = id of grid "node" ijk

xp,yp,zp = x-, y-, z- coordinate of grid "node" ijk

blkend = =end=

BLOCK 529nn - global variables

******************************


read(formatted,’(2i13)’) inumv,inumt

do ijk=1,inumv

read(formatted,’(a48)’) globename(ijk)

read(formatted,’(6i13)’) ityp,id2,inum,nnum,id5,id6

read(formatted,’(6e13.6)’) (xlm(ijl),ijl=1,nnum)

enddo




do ijk=1,inumv

read(binary) (inam(ijl)’),ijl=1,48)

write(globnam,’48a1)’) (inam(ijl),ijl=1,48)


read(binary) ityp,id2,inum,nnum,id5,id6

read(binary) (xlm(ijl)’),ijl=1,nnum)

enddo




inumv = number of items in this block

inumt = total number of global variables in this block

globname = global variable name for this item

ityp = global variable type:

1=Cavity Pressure

2=Cavity volume

3=Global State Variable

4=Cavity Mass

5=Cavity Temperature

6=Throat Coordinate

7=Loadcase percentage complete


inum = id for this global variable, e.g. cavity number

nnum = 1 (number of variables in this item)


id6 = 0 (for future use)

xlm = value of the global variables defined in this item

blkend = =end=


582

BLOCK yyyyy - end increment indicator

*************************************


read(binary) isee


csee = indicator

---- end of incremental data

Chapter 10 Mathematical Utility Routines List

Utility Routine Page

DDOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

GMADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588GMPRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589GMSUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590GMTRA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591GTPRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

INV3X3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594INVERT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

MCPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

PRINCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

SCLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597



584

Chapter 10 Mathematical Utility Routines



586

This chapter discusses a selection of the mathematical utility routines that may be called from any subroutine to simplify the program.

587CHAPTER 10Utility Routines List

■ DDOT

Inner Product of Two Vectors

Description

Returns the dot product of two vectors.

Format

Utility function DDOT can be used in the following format:ANS=DDOT(NN,A,IA,B,IB)

where:

Note: Vectors A, B, and ANS are real*8 variables.

Input:

NN number of items in each vector to be used

A first input vector

IA stride in vector A

B second input vector

IB stride in vector B

Required Output:

ANS inner product of vectors A and B


588

■ GMADD

Matrix Add

Description

Add two matrices and put sum into third matrix.

Format

Utility routine GMADD can be called with the following format:CALL GMADD (W,X,Y,N,M)

where:

Note: Matrices W, X, and Y are real*8 arrays.

Input:

W first input matrix

X second input matrix

N first dimension of W, X, and Y

M second dimension of W, X, and Y

Required Output:

Y output matrix, Y W X+=


■ GMPRD

Matrix Product

Description

Multiply two matrices and put product in third matrix.

Format

Utility routine GMPRD can be called with the following format:CALL GMPRD (W,X,Y,N,M)

where:


Input:



N first dimension of W and Y

M second dimension of W and first dimension of X

L second dimension of X and Y

Required Output:

Y output matrix, Y W * X=


590

■ GMSUB

Matrix Subtract

Description

Subtract two matrices and put remainder in third matrix.

Format

Utility routine GMSUB can be called with the following format:CALL GMSUB (W,X,Y,N,M)

where:


Input:



N first dimension of W, X, and Y

M second dimension of W, X, and Y

Required Output:

Y output matrix, Y W X–=


■ GMTRA

Matrix Transpose

Description

Transpose a matrix.

Format

Utility routine GMTRA can be called with the following format:CALL GMTRA (W,X,N,M)

where:

Note: Matrices W and X are real*8 matrices.

Input:

W input matrix

N first dimension of W and second dimension of X

M second dimension of W and first dimension of X

Required Output:

X output matrix X WT=


592

■ GTPRD

Transpose Matrix Product

Description

Transpose product of two matrices.

Format

Utility routine GTPRD can be called with the following format:CALL GTPRD (W,X,Y,N,M.L)

where:

Note: Matrices W, X, and Y are real*8 matrices.

Input:



N first dimension of W and X

M second dimension of W and first dimension of Y

L second dimension of X and Y

Required Output:

Y output matrix Y WT*X=


■ INVERT

Invert Matrix

Description

Matrix inversion and system solution (for small matrices, 15x15 max).

Format

Utility routine INVERT can be called with the following format:CALL INVERT (A,N,B,MR,D2,IDIM)

where:

Note: Matrices A, B, and scalar D2 are real*8.

If D2 equals zero, the matrix is singular; neither the inverse or the solution are calculated.

If N is greater than 15, an error message is printed and the matrix is not inverted.

Input:

A input matrix

N number of rows and columns of A, must be less than or equal 15

B array of right-hand side vectors for which the solution is required

MR number of right hand side vectors. If , only inversion is performed

IDIM dimension of A in storage

Required Output:

A inverse of input matrix A

B array of solution vectors

D2 determinant of A

MR 0=


594

■ INV3X3

Invert 3 x 3 Matrix

Description

Invert 3 x 3 matrices.

Format

Utility routine INV3X3 can be called with the following format:CALL INV3X3 (A,AINV,DET,IFLAG)

where:

Note: Matrices A, AINV, and scalar DET are real*8 variables.

If DET = 0, the matrix is singular and the inverse is not calculated.

Input:

A input matrix

IFLAG flag for output

Required Output:

A inverse of input matrix A if IFLAG = 1

AINV inverse of input matrix A if IFLAG is not = 1

DET determinant of A


■ MCPY

Matrix Copy

Description

Copy a matrix.

Format

Utility routine MCPY can be called with the following format:CALL MCPY (W,X,N,M,MS)

where:

Note: Matrices W and X are real*8 arrays.

Input:

W input matrix

N first dimension of W and X

M second dimension of W and X

MS not used

Required Output:

X output matrix, X W=


596

■ PRINCV

Find Principle Values

Description

Solves 3 x 3 Eigen problem with Jacobi transformations to find principle values of stresses and strains.

Format

Utility routine PRINCV can be called with the following format:CALL PRINCV (PV,R,V,NDI,NSHEAR,ISS,JCR1,JCR2,JCR3)

where:

Note: Vectors and matrices PV, R, and V are real*8 arrays.

Input:

V(6) vector of strains or stresses.

NDI number of direct stress or strain components.

NSHEAR number of shear stress or strain components.

ISS flag to indicate whether V is stress or strain.if ISS = 0, V is stressif ISS = 1, V is strain

JCR1 set to 0

JCR2 set to 0

JCR3 set to 0

Required Output:

PV(3) vector of principal values

R(3,3) matrix of principal directions


■ SCLA

Set Matrix to Value

Description

Assign a scalar value to a matrix.

Format

Utility routine SCLA can be called with the following format:CALL SCLA (W,C,N,M,MS)

where:

Note: Matrix W and scalar C are real*8 variables.

Input:

W input matrix

C scalar

N first dimension of W

M second dimension of W

MS not used

Required Output:

W output matrix


598

Chapter 11 Considerations for Parallel Processing

11 Considerations for Parallel Processing

Overview 600

Auxiliary Routines 600

Sharing Data 604


600

This chapter describes some special considerations that need to be taken into account when writing user subroutines for parallel processing.

OverviewIn a parallel run with Marc, the finite element mesh is subdivided into domains where each element is part of one domain. Nodes at the boundary between domains are present in all domains sharing that boundary. Each domain is run on one process in the job, normally corresponding to a processor (CPU).

Note: There is a difference between process and processor. A process is run by a processor. A processor can run multiple processes, but in a parallel analysis, each process is normally run by one processor for efficiency.

Auxiliary RoutinesThere are a number of auxiliary routines available for parallel applications.

DOMFLAG

The DOMFLAG subroutine is used for sharing variables between domains. The variables can be summed, the maximum taken etc. Suppose the variables num1, r1, and volume have been obtained on each domain. Each domain may have different values of these variables. Now, the user wants to calculate the largest value of num1 and r1 and the variable volume should be summed over the domains. The code for doing this would look like:

include ’cdominfo’

ibuff1(1)=num1dbuff1(1)=r1dbuff1(2)=volumeitest1(1)=1itest2(1)=1itest2(2)=3call domflag(ibuff1,dbuff1,itest1,itest2,1,2)num1=ibuff1(1)r1=dbuff1(1)volume=dbuff1(2)

This code sets num1 and r2 to the maximum over the domains and sets num1 to the sum over the domains. The action taken is controlled by the value set to itest1 and itest2:

601CHAPTER 11Considerations for Parallel Processing

= 0: minimum= 1: maximum= 2: average= 3: sum

The last two arguments of DOMFLAG specify the number of integers and reals, respectively, that are involved. The arrays ibuff1, dbuff1, itest1, and itest2 are declared in cdominfo with a range also defined in cdominfo (currently 512). If only one variable is used, one can skip the use of the arrays, for instance

call domflag(int1,ddummy,3,0,1,0)

for summing int1 over the domains.


602

Reading InputReading input into a user subroutine requires that all domains get access to the data. This can be accomplished in different ways:

A. The data file is copied to one file for each domain using a unique name and each domain reads its own file.

B. The parent domain reads the file and sends each line to the child domains.

C. The parent domain reads the whole file, possibly processes the data and sends the data to the child domains.

Option A has the disadvantage that the user has to copy the file before the job is started (possibly to remote machines if the job is run on a cluster). With Option B, the data file remains the same as for a serial run. It can be inefficient for large amounts of data, though. Option C can be more efficient depending on the type of data that is processed.

For Option A, it is necessary to create a filename which is unique to each domain. Suppose a file called yourname.txt contains data that is read from a user subroutine. For each domain, a copy of the file is made into 1yourname.txt, 2yourname.txt, etc. These files can be read using the following piece of code:

include 'cdominfo'include 'jname'include 'prepro'include 'machin'character file*200,line*200

file=dirjid(1:ljid)length=last_char(file)if (nprocd.gt.0) then if(iprcnm.lt.10) then write(file(length+1:length+2), '(i1)') iprcnm else write(file(length+1:length+3), '(i2)') iprcnm endifendiflength=last_char(file)file=file(1:length)//'yourname.txt'

Now the file can be opened as in a serial run.


The string variable dirjid contains the full path to the directory where the Marc input file is located for each domain. The variable iprcnm (from cdominfo) is the process (domain) number. The auxiliary function last_char returns the last nonblank character of a string.

The following code can be used for Option B:include 'cdominfo'include 'jname'include 'prepro'include 'machin'

character file*200,line*200

c open a file on the parent process (domain 1) only, and send c each line read to the other domainscfile='yourname.txt'iunit=68iostatus=0if (iparent.eq.0) then open(iunit,file=file,access='sequential', 1 status='old',form='formatted',iostat=iostatus)endifif (nprocd.gt.0) then call domflag(iostatus,dummy,3,0,1,0) ! share the status flagendifif (iostatus.gt.0) thenc error in open file, bail out with marc exit 999 call quit(999)endiflastread=1do i=1,100000 ! loop over all lines in the file iostatus=0 if (iparent.eq.0) then ! only read on parent read(iunit,'(a80)',iostat=iostatus) line endif if (nprocd.gt.0) then call domflag(iostatus,dummy,3,0,1,0) ! share the status flag endif if (iostatus.ne.0) then go to 102 ! found end of file else if (nprocd.gt.0) call domstring(line) endif


604

cc now "line" is available on all domainsc write(kou,*) 'line',line(1:last_char(line))enddo

102 continue

The file is only opened if iparent = 0, which is the case in a serial run and for the parent process in a parallel run. The code also makes certain that all processes stop if an error occurs while opening the file. Use is made of the DOMFLAG auxiliary routine to make sure all domains have the same value of iostatus. The DOMSTRING routine broadcasts the line read to all domains.

Sharing DataSince elements are distributed to different domains it is sometimes necessary to share data. Suppose that the total volume is calculated in a user subroutine by integrating over all elements. Each domain would then calculate the volume of the domain. To get the total volume, it is necessary to sum the contributions from all domains. This can be done with the DOMFLAG auxiliary routine :

include ’cdominfo’

c the variable vol contains the volume of each domainif (nprocd.gt.0) call domflag(idummy,vol,0,3,0,1)

It is crucial that all domains call this routine the same number of times. Sharing data should be avoided inside element loops. Apart from being inefficient, it usually causes the job to hang or crash since there are, in general, a different number of elements in the domains. If, for example, the code for calculating the volume is done in an element loop, the calculation of the total volume should be done outside the element loop (for instance, in the UEDINC user subroutine, which is called at the end of the increment).

Dealing with nodal arrays sometimes requires special attention since the nodes on interdomain boundaries are duplicated. One such example is when counting the total number of nodes with a certain property (like being in contact). If this number is summed up in each domain and then later added between domains it will be too large since the interdomain nodes are counted multiple times. This can be handled with the following code:


if (nprocd.gt.0) call domnodmask(mask)num=0do i=1,numnp if (nprocd.gt.0) then if (some_property(i).and.mask(i).eq.1) num=num+1 else if (some_property(i)) num=num+1 endifenddo

The integer array mask must be allocated with at least the number of nodes in the domain. The subroutine domnodmask returns mask(i) such that mask(i) = 0 if internal node i is also present in another domain and 1 otherwise (for each interdomain node, it is set to one in one domain and to zero in the rest).


606

Chapter 12 Code Coupling Interface User Subroutines and Utility List


CPLREG_EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614CPLREG_FINALIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616CPLREG_INIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612


CPLREG_FIND_NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617CPLREG_GET_ALL_NODE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629CPLREG_GET_GLOBAL_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624CPLREG_GET_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618CPLREG_GET_MESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621CPLREG_GET_NODE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626CPLREG_GET_QUANTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620CPLREG_PUT_ALL_EDGE_VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640CPLREG_PUT_ALL_ELEM_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648CPLREG_PUT_ALL_FACE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644CPLREG_PUT_ALL_NODE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

12 Code Coupling Interface User Subroutines and Utility List

MSC.Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines

608


CPLREG_PUT_EDGE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638CPLREG_PUT_ELEM_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646CPLREG_PUT_FACE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642CPLREG_PUT_GLOBAL_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632CPLREG_PUT_NODE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Chapter 12 Code Coupling Interface

12 Code Coupling Interface


610

The user subroutines and utility routines described in this chapter provide an application programming interface (API) to couple MSC.Marc with external numerical solvers, to apply complex boundary conditions to certain regions of the model or to develop dedicated post-processing tools. They must be used in conjunction with the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input).

The API allows code coupling software such as MpCCI1 to couple MSC.Marc with commercial computational fluid dynamics (CFD) codes, in order to solve fluid-structure interaction problems involving complex (turbulent) flows with large deformations of the structure that cannot be solved by MSC.Marc alone. Table 12-1 summarizes the user subroutines of the API, which are called by MSC.Marc if coupling regions are defined by the COUPLING REGION model definition option. Table 12-2 lists the utility routines that can be called from the user subroutines to obtain the connectivity and coordinates of coupling regions, to obtain the current values of a large number of physical quantities on coupling regions, or to prescribe the values of certain physical quantities on coupling regions. See Chapter 14 Code Coupling Interface in MSC.Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for more information.

1 Fraunhofer Institute for Algorithms and Scientific Computing SCAI. MpCCI 3.0.4: Manuals and Tutorials. April 25, 2005, http://www.scai.fraunhofer.de/mpcci.

Table 12-1 User Subroutines for Coupling Regions.

User SubroutineRequired Model

Definition OptionPurpose

CPLREG_INIT COUPLING REGION Initialize coupling regions for a coupled analysis with an external solver.

CPLREG_EXCHANGE COUPLING REGION Exchange data on coupling regions.

CPLREG_FINALIZE COUPLING REGION Finalize coupled analysis with an external solver.

611CHAPTER 12Code Coupling Interface

Table 12-2 Utility Subroutines for Coupling Regions.

Utility SubroutineAvailable in User

SubroutinesPurpose

CPLREG_FIND_NAME CPLREG_INITCPLREG_EXCHANGE

Find coupling regions by name.

CPLREG_GET_INFO CPLREG_INITCPLREG_EXCHANGE

Get general information about a coupling region.

CPLREG_GET_QUANTS CPLREG_INITCPLREG_EXCHANGE

Get the prescribed physical quantities on a coupling region.

CPLREG_GET_MESH CPLREG_INITCPLREG_EXCHANGE

Get the mesh of a coupling region.

CPLREG_GET_GLOBAL_VALUES CPLREG_EXCHANGE Get the values of a global quantity.

CPLREG_GET_NODE_VALUESCPLREG_GET_ALL_NODE_VALUES

CPLREG_EXCHANGE Get the values of a node-based quantity at a coupling region.

CPLREG_PUT_GLOBAL_VALUES CPLREG_EXCHANGE Put the values of a global quantity.

CPLREG_PUT_NODE_VALUESCPLREG_PUT_ALL_NODE_VALUES

CPLREG_EXCHANGE Put the values of a node-based quantity at a coupling region.

CPLREG_PUT_EDGE_VALUESCPLREG_PUT_ALL_EDGE_VALUES

CPLREG_EXCHANGE Put the values of an edge-based quantity at a coupling region.

CPLREG_PUT_FACE_VALUESCPLREG_PUT_ALL_FACE_VALUES

CPLREG_EXCHANGE Put the values of a face-based quantity at a coupling region.

CPLREG_PUT_ELEM_VALUESCPLREG_PUT_ALL_ELEM_VALUES

CPLREG_EXCHANGE Put the values of an element-based quantity at a coupling region.


612

■ CPLREG_INIT

Initialization of a Coupling Analysis

Description

The CPLREG_INIT user subroutine can be used to initialize a coupled analysis with an external solver. For example, in case the MSC.Marc mesh does not match the mesh of the external solver at the common boundary of the two meshes, interpolation is needed to transfer quantities from one mesh to the other. To be able to interpolate the data, the geometrical relationship between the two meshes must be established. The CPLREG_INIT user subroutine can be used to determine this relationship, before the actual data exchange is performed. In the subroutine, the CPLREG_GET_MESH utility routine (see below) can be called for all coupling regions defined by the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input) to obtain the positions of the nodes and the connectivity of the edges, faces or elements of these coupling regions. The latter should then be compared with the mesh of the external solver.

The subroutine is called only if coupling regions have been defined by the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input).

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_INIT is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CPLREG_INIT(NCPLREG,ICPLREG)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION ICPLREG(NCPLREG)

user coding

RETURNEND


where:

Note: The internal numbers of the coupling regions in the array ICPLREG provide handles to the regions and must be used in the calls to the utility routines discussed below. These internal numbers cannot be changed by the user.

Input:

NCPLREG is the number of coupling regions defined by the COUPLING REGION model definition option.

ICPLREG is the array with the internal numbers of the coupling regions in the model.


614

■ CPLREG_EXCHANGE

Exchange Data on a Coupling Region

Description

The CPLREG_EXCHANGE user subroutine can be used to exchange data with an external solver via calls to the various CPLREG_GET and CPLREG_PUT utility routines (see below). The routine is called twice per coupling time step, defined as the time between two data exchanges. The subroutine is called at the start and at the end of each coupling step. Typically, the call at the start will set the values of the prescribed quantities for this step via the CPLREG_PUT utility routines and the call at the end will extract the new values of quantities computed during the step via the CPLREG_GET utility routines.

The default coupling step is the MSC.Marc increment. In this case, the CPLREG_EXCHANGE user subroutine is called twice per increment, once at the start and once at the end of each increment. If the AUTO STEP stepping scheme is used, the coupling time step can be controlled by prescribing the global quantity "Coupling Time Step" (see CPLREG_GET_GLOBAL_VALUES below). In that case, a coupling step may consist of multiple increments. The CPLREG_EXCHANGE user subroutine is then called at the start of the first increment and at the end of the last increment of the coupling step.

The routine is called only if coupling regions have been defined by the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input).

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_EXCHANGE is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CPLREG_EXCHANGE(NCPLREG,ICPLREG,ICALL,INC,TIME)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION ICPLREG(NCPLREG)

user coding

RETURNEND


where

Notes: The internal numbers of the coupling regions in the array ICPLREG provide handles to the regions and must be used in the calls to the utility routines discussed below. These internal numbers cannot be changed by the user.

The current time, passed to the subroutine through the variable TIME, is the time at the start of the coupling step if ICALL=1 and the updated time at the end of the of the coupling step if ICALL=2.

Input:

NCPLREG is the number of coupling regions defined by the COUPLING REGION model definition option.

ICPLREG is the array with the internal numbers of the coupling regions in the model.

ICALL is a flag that indicates when the subroutine is called:1: subroutine is called at the start of the coupling step.2: subroutine is called at the end of the coupling step.




616

■ CPLREG_FINALIZE

Finalize the Coupling

Description

The CPLREG_FINALIZE user subroutine can be used to clean up any data structures needed for the coupled analysis or to inform the external solver that the MSC.Marc job has ended. It is called once per job, at the end of the analysis and only if coupling regions have been defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input).

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_FINALIZE is written with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CPLREG_FINALIZE(IEXIT)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)

user coding

RETURNEND

where:

Input:

IEXIT The MSC.Marc exit number of the job (see Appendix A in MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input).


■ CPLREG_FIND_NAME

Find Coupling Regions by Name

Description

The CPLREG_FIND_NAME utility routine finds the coupling region with a given name and returns the internal number of the region. The latter can be used in calls to the CPLREG_GET and CPLREG_PUT utility routines discussed below. The coupling region must have been defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input).

Format

Utility routine CPLREG_FIND_NAME is called with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CPLREG_FIND_NAME(RNAME,IREG,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)CHARACTER*32 RNAME

where:

Availability

This utility routine is available in the following user subroutines:CPLREG_INIT

CPLREG_EXCHANGE

Input:

RNAME is the name of the coupling region to find.

Required Output:

IREG is the internal number of the coupling region (see user subroutines CPLREG_INIT and CPLREG_EXCHANGE) or -1 if no region with that name exists.

IERROR is the error status:= 0: on success= 1: on error


618

■ CPLREG_GET_INFO

Get General Information about a Coupling Region

Description

The CPLREG_GET_INFO utility routine returns general information about a coupling region, defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input). The routine returns, among other things, the sizes of the finite element mesh of the region, which can be used to determine the amount of memory needed for storing the mesh of the coupling region (see the description of the CPLREG_GET_MESH utility below).

Format

Utility routine CPLREG_GET_INFO is called with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CPLREG_GET_INFO(IREG,RNAME,IRDIM,IACTIVE,NRQUANT, NRNODE,NRELEM,NRELNODE,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)CHARACTER*32 RNAME

where:

Input:

IREG is the internal number of the coupling region (see user subroutines CPLREG_INIT and CPLREG_EXCHANGE or utility routine CPLREG_FIND_NAME).

Required Output:

RNAME is the name of the coupling region

IRDIM is the dimension of the coupling region:= 1: region consists of edges or curves.= 2: region consists of faces or surfaces.= 3: region consists of elements or bodies.

IACTIVE is the activation state of the coupling region:= 0: region is not active in the present loadcase.> 0: region is active in the present loadcase.

NRQUANT is the number of prescribed quantities on this region.

NRNODE is the number of nodes of the coupling region.


Availability


CPLREG_EXCHANGE

NRELEM is the number of edges, faces or elements (depending on the dimension) of the coupling region.

NRELNODE is the maximum number of nodes per edge, face or element of the coupling region.



620

■ CPLREG_GET_QUANTS

Get the Prescribed Quantities on a Coupling Region

Description

The CPLREG_GET_QUANTS utility routine returns the quantities prescribed on a coupling region, defined by the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input).

Format

Utility routine CPLREG_GET_QUANTS is called with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CPLREG_GET_QUANTS(IREG,MXQUANT,IRQUANTS,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION IRQUANTS(MXQUANT)

where:

Availability


CPLREG_EXCHANGE

Input:


MXQUANT is the maximum number of prescribed quantities to return.

Required Output:

IRQUANT is the array of prescribed quantities on this region.



■ CPLREG_GET_MESH

Get the Mesh of a Coupling Region

Description

The CPLREG_GET_MESH utility routine returns the mesh of a coupling region, defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input) in a number of arrays. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the arrays are large enough to hold all data. The CPLREG_GET_INFO utility can be used to find the required sizes of these arrays.

Depending on the dimension of the region (1, 2 or 3, see the description of the CPLREG_GET_INFO utility routine), the CPLREG_GET_MESH utility returns the edges, the faces or the elements of the region. If the coupling region is defined via curves, surfaces or bodies (geometry types 3, 4, 5 or 16-19), the routine returns the edges or faces attached to these curves or surfaces via the ATTACH EDGE and ATTACH FACE model definition options or the elements of the bodies.

Format

Utility routine CPLREG_GET_MESH is called with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CPLREG_GET_MESH(IREG,MXNODE,MXCRD,MXELEM,MXELNODE, INODEIDS,COORDS,IELCLASS,IELTYPES, IELEMIDS,NELNODES,IELNODES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION INODEIDS(MXNODE),COORDS(MXCRD,MXNODE)DIMENSION IELCLASS(MXELEM),IELTYPES(MXELEM),IELEMIDS(MXELEM)DIMENSION NELNODES(MXELEM),IELNODES(MXELNODE,MXELEM)

where:

Input:


MXNODE is the maximum number of nodes to return.

MXCRD is the maximum number of coordinates per node to return.


622

Notes: The topology classes returned via the IELCLASS array uniquely characterize the shapes of the edges, faces or elements. The different classes are listed in Table 12-3, below.

If the region consists of edges or faces, then the element types returned via the IELTYPES array are the types of the underlying elements.

If the region consists of elements (dimension is equal to 3), then the ids returned via the IELEMIDS array are the user ids of the elements. If the region consists of edges or faces (dimension is 1 or 2), then the ids are packed numbers of the form ID*100+IEF, in which ID is the user element id of the underlying element and IEF is the edge or face number in the MSC.Marc convention. For example, 1103 represents face 3 of element 11.

The connectivity of the edges, faces or elements is returned in the local node numbering within the region via the IELNODES array. User node numbers can be obtained using INODEIDS array. That is, INODEIDS(IELNODES(I,J)) is the user node number of node I of edge, face or element J of the region

.

MXELEM is the maximum number of edges, faces or elements to return.

MXELNODE is the maximum number of nodes per edge, face or element to return.

Output:

INODEIDS is the array with the user ids of the nodes.

COORDS is the array with the initial coordinates of the nodes.

IELCLASS is the array with the topology classes to which the edges, faces or elements belong (see Table 12-3).

IELTYPES is the array with the types of the elements (see MSC.Marc Volume B: Element Library).

IELEMIDS is the array with the ids of the edges, faces or elements (see below).

NELNODES is the array with the number of nodes per edge, face or element.

IELNODES is the array with the connectivity of the edges, faces or elements.


Table 12-3 Topology Classes

Topology Class Number of Nodes Description

1 2 linear line element

2 3 quadratic line element

3 3 linear triangular element

4 6 quadratic triangular element


Availability


CPLREG_EXCHANGE

5 4 linear quadrilateral element

6 6 linear semi-infinite quadrilateral element

7 8 quadratic quadrilateral element

8 9 quadratic semi-infinite quadrilateral element

9 8 linear hexahedral element

10 12 linear semi-infinite hexahedral element

11 20 quadratic hexahedral element

12 27 quadratic semi-infinite quadrilateral element

13 4 linear tetrahedral element

14 10 quadratic tetrahedral element

15 6 linear pentahedral element

16 15 quadratic pentahedral element

Table 12-3 Topology Classes (continued)

Topology Class Number of Nodes Description


624

■ CPLREG_GET_GLOBAL_VALUES

Get the Values of a Global Quantity

Description

The CPLREG_GET_GLOBAL_VALUES utility routine returns the current value of a global quantity.

Format

Utility routine CPLREG_GET_GLOBAL_VALUES is called with the following headers:

SUBROUTINE CPLREG_GET_GLOBAL_VALUES(IQID,MXVAL,VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION VALUES(MXVAL)

where:

Quantities

Currently only one global quantity can accessed through this routine:

Availability

This utility routine is available in the following user subroutines:CPLREG_EXCHANGE

Input:

IQID is the quantity to return.

MXVAL is the maximum number of values to return.

Required Output:

VALUES is the array with the current values.


Quantity ID Type Description

1 Scalar Time Step


If the subroutine is called in CPLREG_EXCHANGE for ICALL=1, the values of the quantity at the start of the coupling step (i.e., the values at the end of the previous coupling step) are returned. If it is called for ICALL=2, the updated values at the end of the coupling step are returned.


626

■ CPLREG_GET_NODE_VALUES

Get the Values of a Nodal Quantity at a Coupling Region

Description

The CPLREG_GET_NODE_VALUES utility routine returns the values of a quantity at the nodes of a coupling region defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input).

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_GET_NODE_VALUES is called with the following headers:

SUBROUTINE CPLREG_GET_NODE_VALUES(IREG,IQID,NNODE,MXVAL, INODEIDS,VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION INODEIDS(NNODE),VALUES(MXVAL,NNODE)

where:

Notes: The CPLREG_GET_NODE_VALUES routine may be called multiple times to obtain the values of a quantity for a subset of nodes of the coupling region.

Input:


IQID is the quantity for which the values must be returned.

NNODE is the number of nodes for which the values must be returned.

MXVAL is the maximum number of values per node to return.

INODEIDS is the array with user ids of the nodes for which the values must be returned.

Required Output:

VALUES is the array with the values of the quantity at the nodes.



Quantities

The following quantities may be accessed through this routine:

Note: All mechanical nodal quantities are defined in the global coordinate system, except those tagged with "(Local)". The latter are defined in the local coordinate systems of the nodes, if such coordinate systems have been defined by the TRANSFORMATION or COORD SYSTEM model definition option, or in the global system, otherwise.


101 Vector Current Coordinates

102 Vector Displacement

103 Vector External Force

104 Vector Reaction Force

112 Vector Displacement (Local)

113 Vector External Force (Local)

114 Vector Reaction Force (Local)

121 Scalar Displacement X

122 Scalar Displacement Y

123 Scalar Displacement Z

124 Scalar External Force X

125 Scalar External Force Y

126 Scalar External Force Z

127 Scalar Reaction Force X

128 Scalar Reaction Force Y

129 Scalar Reaction Force Z

161 Scalar Displacement X (Local)

162 Scalar Displacement Y (Local)

163 Scalar Displacement Z (Local)

164 Scalar External Force X (Local)

165 Scalar External Force Y (Local)

166 Scalar External Force Z (Local)

167 Scalar Reaction Force X (Local)

168 Scalar Reaction Force Y (Local)

169 Scalar Reaction Force Z (Local)

201 Scalar Temperature

202 Scalar External Heat Flux

203 Scalar Reaction Heat Flux


628

Availability




■ CPLREG_GET_ALL_NODE_VALUES

Get the Values of a Nodal Quantity at a Coupling Region

Description

The CPLREG_GET_ALL_NODE_VALUES utility routine returns the values of a quantity at all nodes of a coupling region defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input). This utility routine is similar to the CPLREG_GET_NODE_VALUES utility, but more efficient if the values at all nodes of the region must be returned.

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_GET_ALL_NODE_VALUES is called with the following headers:

SUBROUTINE CPLREG_GET_ALL_NODE_VALUES(IREG,IQID,MXVAL, VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION VALUES(MXVAL,*)

where:

Notes: The dimension of the VALUES array must be at least (MXVAL,NRNODE), in which NRNODE is the number of nodes of the coupling region as returned by the CPLREG_GET_INFO utility. The order in which the values are returned is given by the INODEIDS array as returned by the CPLREG_GET_MESH utility.

Input:


IQID is the quantity for which the values must be returned.

MXVAL is the maximum number of values per node to return.

Required Output:

VALUES is the array with the values of the quantity at the nodes.



630

Quantities


Note: All mechanical nodal quantities are defined in the global coordinate system, except those tagged with "(Local)". The latter are defined in the local coordinate systems of the nodes, if such coordinate systems have been defined by the TRANSFORMATION or COORD SYSTEM model definition option, or in the global system, otherwise.


101 Vector Current Coordinates



104 Vector Reaction Force



114 Vector Reaction Force (Local)

121 Scalar Displacement X

122 Scalar Displacement Y

123 Scalar Displacement Z

124 Scalar External Force X

125 Scalar External Force Y

126 Scalar External Force Z

127 Scalar Reaction Force X

128 Scalar Reaction Force Y

129 Scalar Reaction Force Z







167 Scalar Reaction Force X (Local)

168 Scalar Reaction Force Y (Local)

169 Scalar Reaction Force Z (Local)



203 Scalar Reaction Heat Flux


Availability




632

■ CPLREG_PUT_GLOBAL_VALUES

Put the Values of a Global Quantity

Description

The CPLREG_PUT_GLOBAL_VALUES utility routine sets the new value of a global quantity, to be used in the subsequent coupling steps, until changed by a subsequent call to this routine.

Format

Utility routine CPLREG_PUT_GLOBAL_VALUES is called with the following headers:

SUBROUTINE CPLREG_PUT_GLOBAL_VALUES(IQID,MXVAL,VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION VALUES(MXVAL)

where:

Quantities

Currently only one global quantity can accessed through this routine:

Note: The Coupling Time Step is the time between two calls to CPLREG_EXCHANGE and defaults to the time increment. It can be changed only if the AUTO STEP stepping scheme is used. In that case, it must changed in the CPLREG_EXCHANGE user subroutine if ICALL=1.

Input:

IQID is the quantity for which the new value must be set.

MXVAL is the maximum number of values to set.

VALUES is the array with new values.

Required Output:



2 Scalar Coupling Time Step


Availability



634

■ CPLREG_PUT_NODE_VALUES

Put the Values of a Nodal Quantity at a Coupling Region

Description

The CPLREG_PUT_NODE_VALUES utility routine sets the new values of a quantity at the nodes of a coupling region defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input). The new values are used in the subsequent coupling step(s), until changed by a subsequent call to this routine. Note that the CPLREG_PUT_ALL_NODE_VALUES utility routine is more efficient if the values at all nodes of a region must be set.

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_PUT_NODE_VALUES is called with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CPLREG_PUT_NODE_VALUES(IREG,IQID,NNODE,MXVAL, INODEIDS,VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION INODEIDS(NNODE),VALUES(MXVAL,NNODE)

where:

Note: The CPLREG_PUT_NODE_VALUES routine may be called multiple times to set the values of a quantity for a subset of nodes of the coupling region.

Input:


IQID is the quantity for which the values must be set.

NNODE is the number of nodes for which the values must be set.

MXVAL is the maximum number of values per node to set.

INODEIDS is the array with user ids of the nodes for which values must be set.

VALUES is the array with the new values of the quantity at the nodes.

Required Output:



Quantities


Notes: All mechanical nodal quantities are defined in the global coordinate system, except those tagged with "(Local)". The latter are defined in the local coordinate systems of the nodes, if such coordinate systems have been defined by the TRANSFORMATION model definition option, or in the global system, otherwise.

Only quantities specified in the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input) for a given coupling region can be prescribed via this utility routine.

Availability
















636

■ CPLREG_PUT_ALL_NODE_VALUES

Put the Values of a Nodal Quantity at a Coupling Region

Description

The CPLREG_PUT_NODE_VALUES utility routine sets the new values of a quantity at all nodes of a coupling region defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input). The new values are used in the subsequent coupling step(s), until changed by a subsequent call to this routine. This utility routine is similar to the CPLREG_PUT_NODE_VALUES utility, but more efficient if the values at all nodes of the region must be set.

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_PUT_ALL_NODE_VALUES is called with the following headers:

SUBROUTINE CPLREG_PUT_ALL_NODE_VALUES(IREG,IQID,MXVAL, VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION VALUES(MXVAL,*)

where:

Notes: The dimension of the VALUES array must be at least (MXVAL,NRNODE), in which NRNODE is the number of nodes of the coupling region as returned by the CPLREG_GET_INFO utility. The values must be supplied in the order given by the INODEIDS array as returned by the CPLREG_GET_MESH utility.

Input:



MXVAL is the maximum number of values per node to set.

VALUES is the array with the new values of the quantity at the nodes.

Required Output:



Quantities


Notes: All mechanical nodal quantities are defined in the global coordinate system, except those tagged with "(Local)". The latter are defined in the local coordinate systems of the nodes, if such coordinate systems have been defined by the TRANSFORMATION model definition option, or in the global system, otherwise.

Only quantities specified in the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input) for a given coupling region can be prescribed via this utility routine.

Availability
















638

■ CPLREG_PUT_EDGE_VALUES

Put Edge Data at Coupling Regions

Description

The CPLREG_PUT_EDGE_VALUES utility routine sets the new values of a quantity at the edges of a coupling region defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input). The new values are used in the subsequent coupling step(s), until changed by a subsequent call to this routine.

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_GET_EDGE_VALUES is called with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CPLREG_GET_EDGE_VALUES(IREG,IQID,NEDGE,MXVAL, IEDGEIDS,VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION IEDGEIDS(NEDGE),VALUES(NVAL,NEDGE)

where:

Notes: The CPLREG_PUT_EDGE_VALUES routine may be called multiple times to set the values of a quantity for a subset of edges of the coupling region.

The IEDGEIDS array must contain packed numbers of the form ID*100+IEDGE, in which ID is the user id of the element and IEDGE is the edge number in the MSC.Marc convention (see CPLREG_GET_MESH utility).

Input:


IQID is the quantity for which the values must be set.NEDGE is the number of edges for which the values must be set.MXVAL is the number of values per edge to set.IEDGEIDS is the array with ids of the edges for which the values must be set.VALUES is the array with the new values of the quantity at the edges.

Required Output:



Quantities


Note: Only quantities specified in the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input) for a given coupling region can be prescribed via this utility routine.

Availability



1101 Scalar Total Pressure

1102 Vector Total Traction

1201 Scalar Heat Flux Density

1202 Scalar Film Coefficient

1203 Scalar Environment Temperature


640

■ CPLREG_PUT_ALL_EDGE_VALUES

Put Edge Data at Coupling Regions

Description

The CPLREG_PUT_ALL_EDGE_VALUES utility routine sets the new values of a quantity at all edges of a coupling region defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input). The new values are used in the subsequent coupling step(s), until changed by a subsequent call to this routine. This utility routine is similar to the CPLREG_PUT_EDGE_VALUES utility, but more efficient if the values at all edges of the region must be set.

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_PUT_ALL_EDGE_VALUES is called with the following headers:

SUBROUTINE CPLREG_PUT_ALL_EDGE_VALUES(IREG,IQID,MXVAL, VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION VALUES(MXVAL,*)

where:

Notes: The dimension of the VALUES array must be at least (MXVAL,NRELEM), in which NRELEM is the number of edges of the coupling region as returned by the CPLREG_GET_INFO utility. The values must be supplied in the order given by the IELEMIDS array as returned by the CPLREG_GET_MESH utility.

Input:



MXVAL is the number of values per edge to set.

VALUES is the array with the new values of the quantity at the edges.

Required Output:



Quantities



Availability









642

■ CPLREG_PUT_FACE_VALUES

Put Face Data at Coupling Regions

Description

The CPLREG_PUT_FACE_VALUES utility routine sets the new values of a quantity at the faces of a coupling region defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input). The new values are used in the subsequent coupling step(s), until changed by a subsequent call to this routine.

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_GET_FACE_VALUES is called with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CPLREG_GET_FACE_VALUES(IREG,IQID,NFACE,MXVAL, IFACEIDS,VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION IFACEIDS(NFACE),VALUES(NVAL,NFACE)

where:

Notes: The CPLREG_PUT_FACE_VALUES routine may be called multiple times to set the values of a quantity for a subset of faces of the coupling region.

The IFACEIDS array must contain packed numbers of the form ID*100+IFACE, in which ID is the user id of the element and IFACE is the face number in the MSC.Marc convention (see CPLREG_GET_MESH utility).

Input:


IQID is the quantity for which the values must be set.NFACE is the number of faces for which the values must be set.MXVAL is the number of values per face to set.IFACEIDS is the array with ids of the faces for which the values must be set.VALUES is the array with the new values of the quantity at the faces.

Required Output:



Quantities



Availability









644

■ CPLREG_PUT_ALL_FACE_VALUES

Put Face Data at Coupling Regions

Description

The CPLREG_PUT_FACE_VALUES utility routine sets the new values of a quantity at all faces of a coupling region defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input). The new values are used in the subsequent coupling step(s), until changed by a subsequent call to this routine. This utility routine is similar to the CPLREG_PUT_FACE_VALUES utility, but more efficient if the values at all faces of the region must be set.

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_PUT_ALL_FACE_VALUES is called with the following headers:

SUBROUTINE CPLREG_PUT_ALL_FACE_VALUES(IREG,IQID,MXVAL, VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION VALUES(MXVAL,*)

where:

Notes: The dimension of the VALUES array must be at least (MXVAL,NRELEM), in which NRELEM is the number of faces of the coupling region as returned by the CPLREG_GET_INFO utility. The values must be supplied in the order given by the IELEMIDS array as returned by the CPLREG_GET_MESH utility.

Input:



MXVAL is the number of values per face to set.

VALUES is the array with the new values of the quantity at the faces.

Required Output:



Quantities



Availability









646

■ CPLREG_PUT_ELEM_VALUES

Put Element Data at Coupling Regions

Description

The CPLREG_PUT_ELEM_VALUES utility routine sets the new values of a quantity at the elements of a coupling region defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input). The new values are used in the subsequent coupling step(s), until changed by a subsequent call to this routine. Note that the CPLREG_PUT_ALL_ELEM_VALUES utility routine is more efficient if the values at all elements of a region must be set.

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_GET_ELEM_VALUES is called with the following headers:SUBROUTINE CPLREG_GET_ELEM_VALUES(IREG,IQID,NELEM,MXVAL, IELEMIDS,VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION IELEMIDS(NELEM),VALUES(NVAL,NELEM)

where:

Note: The CPLREG_PUT_ELEM_VALUES routine may be called multiple times to set the values of a quantity for a subset of elements of the coupling region.

Input:



NELEM is the number of elements for which the values must be set.

MXVAL is the number of values per element to set.

IELEMIDS is the array with ids of the elements for which the values must be set.

VALUES is the array with the new values of the quantity at the elements.

Required Output:



Quantities



Availability



10101 Vector Volume Load

10131 Scalar Volume Load X

10132 Scalar Volume Load Y

10133 Scalar Volume Load Z


648

■ CPLREG_PUT_ALL_ELEM_VALUES

Put Element Data at Coupling Regions

Description

The CPLREG_PUT_ALL_ELEM_VALUES utility routine sets the new values of a quantity at all elements of a coupling region defined via the COUPLING REGION model definition option (see MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input). The new values are used in the subsequent coupling step(s), until changed by a subsequent call to this routine. This utility routine is similar to the CPLREG_PUT_ELEM_VALUES utility, but more efficient if the values at all elements of the region must be set.

Format

User subroutine CPLREG_PUT_ALL_ELEM_VALUES is called with the following headers:

SUBROUTINE CPLREG_PUT_ALL_ELEM_VALUES(IREG,IQID,MXVAL, VALUES,IERROR)IMPLICIT REAL*8 (A-H,O-Z)DIMENSION VALUES(MXVAL,*)

where:

Note: The dimension of the VALUES array must be at least (MXVAL,NRELEM), in which NRELEM is the number of elements of the coupling region as returned by the CPLREG_GET_INFO utility. The values must be supplied in the order given by the IELEMIDS array as returned by the CPLREG_GET_MESH utility.

Input:



MXVAL is the number of values per element to set.

VALUES is the array with the new values of the quantity at the elements.

Required Output:



Quantities



Availability



10101 Vector Volume Load

10131 Scalar Volume Load X

10132 Scalar Volume Load Y

10133 Scalar Volume Load Z


650

Appendix A User Subroutines and Special Routines List


ANELAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205ANEXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230ANKOND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232ANPLAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221ASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

CPLREG_EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614CPLREG_FINALIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616CPLREG_INIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612CREDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109CRPLAW (Viscoplastic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348CRPLAW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246CRPVIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362CUPFLX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

A User Subroutines, Special Routines, and Utility Routines List


652


DIGEOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

ELEVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428ELEVEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

FILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94FLUX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66FORCDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88FORCDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78FORCEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

GAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103GAPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310GENSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

HOOKLW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218HOOKVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368HYPELA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

IMPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420INITPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167INITPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168INITSV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112INTCRD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

MAP2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377MOTION (2-D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120MOTION (3-D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

NASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350NEWPO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169NEWSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

653APPENDIX AUser Subroutines, Special Routines, and Utility Routines List


ORIENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

PLOTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

REBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

SEPFOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132SEPFORBBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134SEPSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136SINCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

TENSOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263TRSFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

UABLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190UABLTNORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192UACOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323UACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387UACTUAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408UADAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394UADAP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399UADAPBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400UARRBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320UBEAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301UBEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443UBGINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433UBGITR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435UBGPASS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436UCAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171UCOHESIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304UCOKSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328UCOMPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308UCOORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393UCRACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261UCRACK_PARIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403


654


UCRACKGROW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395UCRPLW (Viscoplastic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244UCRPLW (Viscoplastic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346UCURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240UDAMAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273UDAMAGE_INDICATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143UEDINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434UELASTOMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294UELDAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283UELOOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437UENERG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279UEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234UFAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177UFAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223UFCONN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375UFILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98UFINITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291UFLUXMEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179UFMEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186UFORMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104UFOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96UFOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76UFRIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127UFRICBBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129UFRORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390UFTHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180UFXORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374UGASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312UGENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321UGLAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182UGMEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188UGRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271UGROOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444UGROWRIGID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126UHTCOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138UHTCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141UHTNRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145



UINSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74UMAKNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380UMDCOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156UMDCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159UMDNRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161UMOONY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278UMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235UNEWTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317UNORST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163UOBJFN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173UOGDEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281UPERM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277UPHI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306UPNOD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385UPOSTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415UPOWDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275UPRFILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175UPROGFAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225UPSTNO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418UPYROLEFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332UPYROLSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326UQVECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101URCONN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391UREACB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170URESTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445URPFLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318USDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117USELEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313USHELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406USHRET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265USHRINKAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242USIGMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237USINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116USINKPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100USIZEOUTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378USPCHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238USPCHTAB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335


656


USPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392USPLIT_MESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397USPRNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257USSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115USSUBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324UTHICK (Hydrodynamic Lubrication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447UTHICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407UTIMESTEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118UTIMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184UTRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405UVELOC (Hydrodynamic Lubrication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449UVELOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119UVOID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266UVOIDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267UVOIDRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269UVSCPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343UVTCOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148UVTCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151UVTNRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153UWATERSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330UWEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193UWELDFLUX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68UWELDPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

VSWELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

WKSLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

YIEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

ZERO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Special Routine Page

PLDUMP13/PLDUMP2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455


Coupling Utility Routine Page

CPLREG_FIND_NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617CPLREG_GET_ALL_NODE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629CPLREG_GET_GLOBAL_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624CPLREG_GET_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618CPLREG_GET_MESH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621CPLREG_GET_NODE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626CPLREG_GET_QUANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620CPLREG_PUT_ALL_EDGE_VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640CPLREG_PUT_ALL_ELEM_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648CPLREG_PUT_ALL_FACE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644CPLREG_PUT_ALL_NODE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636CPLREG_PUT_EDGE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638CPLREG_PUT_ELEM_VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646CPLREG_PUT_FACE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642CPLREG_PUT_GLOBAL_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632CPLREG_PUT_NODE_VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634Coupling Utility Routine Page

Mathematical Utility Routine Page

DDOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

GMADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588GMPRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589GMSUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590GMTRA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591GTPRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

INV3X3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594INVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

MCPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

PRINCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

SCLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597


658

Marc 2008 r1 Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines

Documents

Transcript of Marc 2008 r1 Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines